




■n » . " » 








































































































■ * ■ 















































































































































































































































































































































“There stood before them their old enemy, Smith ” 


Page 3 7 0 


War of 1812 Series 


the 


BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 



EVERETT T.r TOMLINSON 


AUTHOR OF “THE SEARCH FOR ANDREW FIELD ” “THE 
BOY SOLDIERS OF l8l2” “THREE 
COLONIAL BOYS” ETC. 



BOSTON 

LEE AND SHEPARD PUBLISHERS 

IO MILK STREET 

1896 

TV ' ' 




Copyright, 1895, by Lee and Shepard 


All rights reserved 


The Boy Officers of 1S12 


PRESS OF 

jRcrftfotll an& C^ttrcfrill 
BOSTON, U.S.A. 


PREFACE 


T HAVE endeavored in this, as in the other volumes 
of this series, not merely to tell a story, hut to 
lead the young readers into a conception of the times 
and men. 

The historical allusions are true and many of the 
incidents have an historical basis. I have not tried 
to prejudice my readers in favor of, or against, the 
names of the leaders, save as the facts themselves are 
presented by the historians. A thorough knowledge 
of this struggle of 1812 — something few have tried 
to gain — will lead to an increased patriotism, and 
surely will give a hopeful view of the men who are 
making the times in which we are living. 


EVERETT T. TOMLINSON. 





CONTENTS 


Chapter Page 

I. General Harrison’s Express 9 

IT. A New Proposition 21 

III. An Interruption 29 

IV. A Night in the Caye 38 

V. The Solitary Horseman 48 

VI. An Expedition against Toronto .... 57 

VII. The Camp in the Forest 65 

VIII. A Strange Hiding-Place 74 

IX. The Living among the Dead 83 

X. The Warning of the “ Lady of the Lake,” 91 

XL An Attack on Sackett’s Harbor. . . . 100 

XH. The Prisoner’s Story 108 

XIII. The Corporal changes Masters .... 116 

XIV. John Smart’s Mistake 126 

XV. Into Fort Meigs 134 

XVI. Goose Bay 142 

XVH. Captain Hoover’s Story 150 

XVHI. Friends in Need 161 

XIX. The Patient at Donald McGann’s . . . 170 

XX. Heman’s New Boy Friend 180 

XXI. The Defence of Fort Meigs 188 

XXII. Elijah’s Visitors 197 

XXIII. A Meeting on the Lake 209 

XXIV. The Hermit tells a Story 218 


6 


CONTENTS 


Chapter Page 

XXV. Captured 229 

XXVI. The Dwarf uses Wings 238 

XXVLL. Perry’s Victory 247 

XXVIII. A Strange Visitor 257 

XXIX. The Dwarf again uses Wings 267 

XXX. A Strange Letter 277 

XXXI. Smith’s Interview 288 

XXXII. New Plans 297 

XXXIII. Leaving the Island 306 

XXXIV. Down the Long Saut 316 

XXXV. Conclusion 326 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE 

“There stood before them their old enemy, Smith” 

Frontispiece ^ 

“‘You're my prisoner,’ said Smith” 54^ 

“Come on, boys, the day is ours!” 103^ 

“Advance, friends, and give the countersign” . . 158’" 

“They' recognized the face of their lost friend” . 179"^ 

“He YVAS BECOYIING WEAKER EVERY' MOMENT ” .... 203 ^ 

“ Andrew reentered accompanied by a very strange- 

LOOKING BEING” 260^ 

“He knew it was his only hope” 327^" 




THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER I 

GENERAL HARRISON’S EXPRESS 

fTHE winter of 1812-13 was a trying one for the 
people of the United States. The war which they 
then were waging with Great Britain had many op- 
ponents at home, and the lack of success which had 
attended the most of the efforts of the Americans was 
disheartening in the extreme. A feeling of uncer- 
tainty pervaded the country. Some were enthusiastic 
in carrying on the war, while others were only half- 
hearted, and many openly were opposed to it. 

This opposition was particularly manifested in the 
New England States ; and Massachusetts and Con- 
necticut as yet had furnished almost nothing to help 
in making the war a success. The cowardly sur- 
render of General Hull at Detroit, the failure at 
Niagara, and the disastrous battle at Queenston 
Heights, however, had served to arouse to some 
extent the dormant patriotism. 


10 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


New York State had been among the most loyal 
after the surrender of General Hull had occurred, 
and the people of Albany and other places had been 
stirred to give large subscriptions for raising a regi- 
ment of volunteers. Other parts of the country also 
became aroused. The city of Baltimore had raised 
a regiment of soldiers and given fifteen thousand dol- 
lars to equip them. Virginia quickly gathered a 
force of fifteen hundred men, and the ladies of Rich- 
mond offered to make tents and knapsacks for their 
soldiers ; and so quickly was it all done, that within 
five days after the work was begun all the men 
were ready to start. When the people of Lexington, 
Kentucky, learned of the surrender of Hull, they 
quickly raised a large number of volunteers, who 
shouldered their muskets and soon were ready to go 
to the front. 

In the rural communities the feeling was even 
more intense; but no place in the country gave a 
more striking example of patriotism than did an old 
farm-house not far from Sackett’s Harbor, on Lake 
Ontario, where were dwelling Andrew Field with 
his wife and mother, and his younger brother David. 
Both of these young men, the elder just twenty-one 
years of age and the younger only seventeen, had 
already taken an active part in the struggles of 
their country. 

Living with them, at the time when our story 


GENERAL HARRISON’S EXPRESS 11 

opens, were an old man wlio had for a long time been 
living as a hermit upon the St. Lawrence river, and 
who already had shared with the boys in some of the 
exciting experiences of the times, and a quaint 
character who had been the cook upon the vessel into 
whose service Andrew at one time had been pressed, 
and who had left the British service when his young 
friend escaped. For a few days there also had been 
with them another man whom they had met on a 
voyage to Fort Niagara, and who had surprised the 
boys upon their return from Ogdensburg by meeting 
them in their own home. They had supposed him to 
be dead, as they knew he was shot in the battle of 
Queenston Heights. 

Not far from their home, two other boys named 
Elijah and Henry Spicer were living with their 
father and mother, and these boys had also shared 
with David and Andrew in their previous service. 
They were almost like brothers to the Field boys, 
being neighbors, and of David’s age, and for a 
long time had been such close friends that they 
knew but little difference between the feeling they 
had for one another and that which they felt for 
their own kin. 

Everybody in that part of the country was highly 
excited at the time. The soldiers were rapidly 
gathering at Sackett’s Harbor, and it was evident 
that some great projects were at hand, though 


12 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


few knew what they were to be. Almost every 
day some one from the farm-house would be found 
at Sackett’s Harbor, an interested spectator of the 
movements of the soldiers there, and eagerly listening 
to the reports that were current of coming events. 

One day David and Elijah with their friend 
He man had visited the barracks, as they had done 
almost every day since their return, and were watch- 
ing the soldiers as they were going through their 
military drill. They were surprised when a man 
approached them, and after looking curiously at 
Heman, soon gave him a loud slap on the back 
and said, “Heman! Heman Jeduthan! Heman 
Jeduthan Chubb! Is that you? What in the 
world are you doing here ! How is Chronicles ? ” 

Heman turned quickly about at the unexpected 
salutation, surprised at the hail which had been given 
him, and at once recognized the new-comer as a 
man who had been with him in the previous autumn 
when he had marched with General Hull from Day- 
ton to Detroit. 

“Yes,” said Heman, a broad smile covering his 
face, “ you’re right, and Chronicles are all right too ; 
but I don’t see how you came to be here.” 

The stranger laughed as he replied, “There never 
was a Yankee yet who didn’t answer one question by 
asking another, but I should really like to know how 
you ever came to be here at Sackett’s Harbor when I 


GENERAL HARRISON’S EXPRESS 


13 


thought you were either killed or taken prisoner at 
Detroit.” 

In response to his question Heinan gave him an 
outline of the experiences through which he had 
passed, and which we already have related in the 
“ Boy Soldiers of 1812.” He meanwhile had intro- 
duced his young companions, and the boys, who 
were interested observers of the two friends who 
had met in such a strange way, at once urged the 
stranger, whose name they learned to be John Smart, 
or as Heman familiarly called him, “Jack,” to go 
home with them and there renew his acquaintance 
with Heman. 

Jack Smart told them how that he had come as an 
“ express ” from General Harrison, and was expect- 
ing to return in a day or two to the headquarters 
of the army in the North-west. 

“That won’t prevent your coming home and 
spending the night with us,” said David ; “ will 
it?” 

“ I don’t know that it will,” said the stranger hesi- 
tating a little. “At any rate I’ll be back in a 
moment, just as soon as I see the General.” 

He returned in a few minutes with the word that 
he could go with them, and the little party started at 
once for the home of the Field boys. 

As they walked on together, the conversation of 
Heman and his friend was largely about the experi- 


14 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


ences through which they had passed in the preced- 
ing year. 

Heman told him how that his zeal for the fife and 
song had decreased somewhat, and that if he ever 
entered the army again it would not be as a fifer or 
a drummer. 

“ But I tell you, you used to stir the men up,” said 
Jack. “ We never had any one like you.” 

“ I might do it again,” said Heman, his old spirit 
beginning to assert itself somewhat under the praise 
of his companion, “ though I haven’t done very much 
of it this winter. I did think a little of starting a 
singing-school here, but my young friends didn’t en- 
courage it very much.” 

“No,” said David; “there were other kinds of song 
in which we were more interested. I think the British 
guns are likely to make music for us that we shall 
understand without much trouble.” 

“ Whew ! ” said the man as they walked on, “ I 
haven’t found any such cold days as these in all my 
trip.” 

“ It is getting colder,” replied David, and by the 
time they had arrived at his home they were all 
thoroughly chilled ; but when he opened the door, 
the sight of the great fireplace with the large logs 
burning upon it, and of his mother and Andrew^s 
wife as they moved about preparing the evening 
meal, soon made them forget the bitter cold outside. 


GENERAL HARRISON’S EXPRESS 


15 


There was a welcome for the new-comer such as only 
the hospitable homes in a newly settled country 
know how to offer. When the supper had been 
eaten, and the company gathered in front of the 
fireplace, they were interested listeners to the story 
which John Smart had to tell them of the condition 
of affairs on the Western borders. 

“ You see,” said he, “ General Harrison is a very 
prompt man, and he’s been having the people put 
up block-houses and stockades all through the West. 
A lot of soldiers have been gathered from Ohio, 
Indiana, and Kentucky, and they all wanted Harrison 
to be Commander-in-Chief, but he’s a very modest 
man, and he preferred to have General Winchester 
take charge ; but it was finally arranged that Har- 
rison should take the position, and you ought to 
have heard the men cheer when they first heard of it. 

“ Tecumseh didn’t have much trouble after Macki- 
naw, Detroit, and Chicago fell, in persuading the 
Indians that the time had come for them to drive all 
the white people out. Of course the British made use 
of them all, and stirred up all the feeling they could. 
General Harrison was kept busy at the time, but 
most of the people in the country didn’t know any- 
thing about war, and they thought all he had to do 
was to march straight on for Detroit and take it back 
again. They didn’t know anything about marching 
through a swampy country in winter with a lot of 


ie 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


undisciplined soldiers and with almost no supplies, 
and the Indians making trouble for him on every side. 
He had to goto Fort Wayne twice, and to some other 
places too, on account of Indian scares, and all these 
things hindered him in carrying out his plan.” 

“ What was that plan ? ” asked Andrew. 

“ He aimed to occupy the Rapids of the Miami, 
and to gather a lot of provisions there, and to start 
out from that place, and only making a pretence of an 
attack upon Detroit, to go down the strait upon the 
ice and get hold of Malden. He hoped to have be- 
tween four and five thousand men at the Rapids. 
General Harrison in the early part of January sent 
orders to General Winchester, who was then at Fort 
Defiance, to advance to the Rapids as soon as he had 
provisions enough to last him twenty days. He told 
him to commence to build huts there so as to make the 
enemy think that he was going into winter quarters, 
and then at the same time he was to put all his men 
into the work of building sleds for the expedition 
against Malden, which was what he really had in 
mind. 

“ General Winchester did as he was commanded, 
and arrived at the Rapids about the tenth of Janu- 
ary and fortified his camp there. About a week after 
he sent Colonels Lewis and Alden with about six 
hundred and fifty men to the River Raisin. They 
started all right, and hearing that there were a good 


GENERAL HARRISON’S EXPRESS 


17 


many British and Indians at Frenchtown on that 
river, Colonel Lewis made up his mind to attack it. 
When he came up close to the place he found they 
were ready for him, but he made a charge and the 
enemy ran. He made up his mind to hold that place, 
and sent word to General Harrison and also to Gen- 
eral Winchester.” 

“How large a place was Frenchtown?” asked 
David. 

“ There were thirty-three families there then,” re- 
plied John. “ They had gardens and orchards around 
their houses, and they’d enclosed them with pun- 
cheons.” 

“ What are they ? ” asked Elijah. 

“Why, puncheons,” replied John, “are made of 
sapling logs split in two, driven in the ground, and 
sometimes sharpened at the top.” 

“ Did the British have control of Frenchtown all 
this time ? ” asked Andrew. 

“Yes,” replied John. “ Two days after the surren- 
der of Detroit, General Brock sent Colonel Elliott 
from Malden to take it, and he did. He left the 
people on parole and promised them protection ; but 
that didn’t amount to much, for they were kept in 
a constant state of alarm, and two Indians named 
Round-head and Walk-in-the-water have had about 
four hundred Indians there ever since last fall. This 
charge I was telling you about lasted from three o’clock 


18 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


in the afternoon until six, and when Lewis made up 
his mind to hold the place everybody was just wild 
to go on. They didn’t appear to realize what a criti- 
cal situation they were in at all. You see, Malden 
was only eighteen miles away, and the British were 
not going to let us get a hold anywhere around there 
if they could prevent it. 

“ General Winchester only took three hundred 
men, for he didn’t dare to take many away from the 
camp at the Rapids, and pushed on for Frenclitown. 
Peter Navarre, a friendly Frenchman, who was sent 
out by Winchester as a scout, brought word that the 
British had started out from Malden ; but Winchester 
didn’t believe him. You see Jacques La Salle, who 
lived there at Frenchtown, was a strong Britisher, and 
he completely fooled the General. Other scouts came 
in and confirmed Peter’s words, but somehow the 
leaders wouldn’t believe them, and almost everybody 
went to sleep that night quiet as kittens ; but the next 
morning, just as the drummer-boy was playing the 
three calls, they heard the sentinel’s gun, and then 
there was a perfect shower of bomb-shells and canis- 
ter-shot. They couldn’t see the British, and the In- 
dians yelled like fiends. Nobody knew how many 
there were of them, but they tried to fight it out as 
well as they could, waiting for daylight. 

“ Lewis tried to join Winchester in rallying the 
troops behind the houses and fences on the south side 


GENERAL HARRISON’S EXPRESS 


19 


of the Raisin, but they couldn’t do it, and right there 
within a space of a hundred yards almost a hundred 
Kentuckians fell under the hatchets of the savages. 
Those who tried to escape met the bloody Indians on 
every side. Round-head took Lewis and Winchester 
both prisoners and marched them off to Colonel 
Proctor, stripped of most of their clothing. You 
see this was the right wing of Lewis’ army that 
was suffering this way, but the left and the centre 
were defending themselves pretty well. Proctor 
found out he couldn’t drive them out very easily and 
drew his forces off to the woods. 

44 The Americans got their breakfast ready, and 
while they were eating they saw a white flag ap- 
proaching from the British line. Major Madison 
thought it was a truce to make arrangements so that 
the dead might be buried ; but when he got there he 
found it was Major Overton, who was one of Win- 
chester’s staff, and Colonel Proctor was with him. 
They brought word from General Winchester to 
surrender at once, and that was the first they knew 
that the others were prisoners. 

44 Madison didn’t want to surrender. 4 The Indians 
will massacre the wounded and the prisoners too,’ 
he said. 4 1 shan’t agree to surrender unless you 
promise us safety and protection.’ 

44 That made Proctor angry, and he stamped his 
foot, and said, 4 Do you mean to dictate to me ? ’ 


20 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ ‘ I mean to dictate for myself,’ Madison said. 
‘We’ll sell our lives as dearly as possible before 
we’ll be massacred.’ You see Proctor was a mean 
sneak any way, and even General Brock wouldn’t 
trust him any ; but Madison didn’t know any- 
thing about that, so supposing that he was a man of 
his word, he surrendered ; but he’d hardly done it 
before the Indians began to plunder, and Madison, for 
all that he had surrendered, up and ordered his men 
to resist them even if they had to use the bayonets. 
That scared off the Indians for a while, but Proctor 
had heard that Harrison was on his way there and so 
he drew off the most of the regulars to Malden. That 
left the men at Frenchtown in a fearful condition. 
All of a sudden about two hundred Indians, the 
most of them half drunk and with their faces painted 
Ted and black, with awful yells fell on the defence- 
less men. It was a terrible time, and out of the 
whole of that division of the American army, only 
thirty-three escaped. I tell you the Kentucky men 
are just stirred up, and they have now as a war-cry, 
‘ Remember the River Raisin ! ’ You’ll hear from the 
Kentucky men before the war is over.” 

The little group was greatly depressed at the 
story which Heman’s friend had told, and without 
much being said they soon took their candles and 
started for their beds. 


A NEW PROPOSITION 


21 


CHAPTER II 

A NEW PROPOSITION 

TT was a long time before David and Elijah, who 
slept together that night, became quiet. It did 
seem as if every effort the Americans made on land was 
bound to come to some bad end, and the boys for a 
long time talked over the story to which they had 
listened ; but in the morning a part of the gloom had 
disappeared, and as they gathered at the breakfast 
table it was with spirits somewhat more cheerful. 

“ How did you come to Sackett’s Harbor ? ” said 
David to their visitor. 

“ Most of the way on skates and snow-shoes. I had 
some hard experiences though ; but this is my line of 
work, and I’m going to start back again to-morrow.” 

He m an was unusually sober and had taken but 
little part in the conversation, although he had been 
an attentive listener to the story of his friend on the 
previous evening. 

“ What’s the matter, Heman ? ” said David, looking- 
up at him, and trying to draw his friend into the con- 
versation. 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


22 


“Nothing much,” replied Heman. “I’ve been 
thinking out a pretty knotty problem, and I’ve only 
just found the answer to it.” 

“ What is it ? Tell us about it,” said David. 

“ Oh ! It’s nothing much,” replied Heman ; “ it’s 
only just this: I’ve made up my mind to go back 
with Jack to-morrow.” 

Everybody looked up in astonishment, and there 
was silence for a moment. 

“ What,” said Andrew, who sat at the head of the 
table, “ going away out to General Harrison’s 
army ? ” 

“Yes,” said Heman quietly, “that’s just what I’m 
going to do. There’s nothing more for me to do here, 
and I haven’t any one dependent on me, and almost no 
friends in this world.” 

“But you know you’ve friends here,” said Mrs. 
Field quietly, for any one who had shared with her 
boy the dangers of war found a large place in her 
motherly heart. 

“ Yes, I know that,” said Heman, looking towards 
Mrs. Field affectionately ; “ but the boys will soon be 
going into the war again, and the hermit and the 
cook can look after the place all right, and I think 
the best thing I can do is to go back with Jack; that 
is, if he’s willing to have me.” 

“Nothing would suit me better,” said his friend, 
“ if you think you can stand it to keep up on a steady 
stretch for three weeks, may be.” 


A NEW PROPOSITION 


23 


“ I think I can,” replied Heman ; “ at least I’m 
going to try it.” 

“ That’s just the way he joined us,” said Elijah, 
turning to David. “Don’t you remember how he 
came aboard the ‘Corporal’ when we were going out 
to Niagara ? ” 

It was soon settled that Heman was to go. The 
boys were sorry to have him leave them, but he 
promised Mrs. Field that he would regard their 
place as his home, and if all things went well with 
him, that some day he would return. The boys were 
quite excited over the new expedition of their friend, 
and Elijah Spicer even proposed to his father that he 
himself should join in it, but a sharp negative from 
Mr. Spicer at once put an end to his plans in that 
direction. 

After breakfast, John Sharp returned to Sackett’s 
Harbor, but Heman remained for the day at the 
home of the Fields. It had been arranged that he 
should join his friend on the following morning and 
start with him on that long journey which might 
lead him into many dangers, and which certainly 
would bring him many strange experiences. 

On the following morning a little group, made up 
of the boys and the men in the party which we have 
described, stood on the dock at Sackett’s Harbor to 
bid farewell to Heman and his friend as they were 
about to start. Heman was wonderfully cheerful, 


24 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


though quiet all the time ; and when the good-byes 
at last had been spoken, Heman started and reso- 
lutely kept at the side of his friend, and the boys 
watched them until they had disappeared in the dis- 
tance. At last they turned from the dock, and after 
watching the drill of the soldiers for a time went 
back to their homes. There was little for them to do 
in the dead of winter. The snow covered the ground 
and in some places buried the fences out of sight. 
The intense cold had made the ice on the lake very 
thick, and the sharp winter winds had swept it clear 
of the snow. The boys frequently spent a part of the 
day in skating over the lake and in fishing through 
the ice, but the time dragged even then somewhat, 
so quiet did it all seem after their exciting experiences 
during the previous autumn. 

“ I expect we shall have to let the boys go again,” 
said Mr. Spicer one day to Mrs. Field. “They’re 
going to be needed and the war isn’t finished yet. 
The President isn’t willing to accept the armistice 
which Great Britain has proposed, and I think he was 
just right.” 

Mrs. Field made no reply except to draw a heavy 
sigh, for she knew that the time was soon coming 
when the boys would again desire to renew their ex- 
periences, and to take their share in the defence of 
their country. 

At last in the latter part of February the boys 


A NEW PROPOSITION 


25 


were surprised one day on their visit to Sackett’s 
Harbor to see their old friend Captain Forsythe, whom 
they had left a few weeks before at Ogdensburg. 

“ Good morning, Captain,” said Elijah, hailing him 
across the street and running to meet him. 

“ You mustn’t call me Captain now,” said their 
friend with a laugh. 

“ What am I to call you, then ? ” said Elijah. 

“I’m Major now; I’ve just been promoted. We 
got driven out of Ogdensburg by the British, and I 
suppose the President thought I’d feel badly about it, 
so they made a Major out of me.” 

“ Well, I’m glad to find you’re here again,” said 
David. “I hope you’re going to stay.” 

“That depends,” replied the Major, glancing af- 
fectionately towards his young friends. “ I suppose 
you know the authorities at Washington are planning 
an active campaign against Canada. General Dear- 
born is to be placed in command of this part, and 
there are four thousand men soon to be gathered at 
Sackett’s Harbor and three thousand at Niagara. 
They want us to go over to Kingston, and after we’ve 
taken that place, then to go on to Toronto. There 
are lots of stores there, and besides that they are said 
to be building two frigates.” 

“ I hope we can go with you,” said the boys ex- 
citedly. “ Don’t you suppose we can ? ” 

“I don’t know; that will depend upon some other 


26 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

things,” said the Major. “ General Dearborn will be 
here in a few days and then our plans will be 
formed.” 

When the boys returned to their homes they 
were filled with the thoughts of the project of which 
the Major had told them and were eager to join in 
the expedition. When General Dearborn arrived a 
few days later there were great rejoicings at Sackett’s 
Harbor, and yet there were grave fears on every side, 
for the reports had come that Sir George Prevost had 
adjourned the Canadian Parliament and had arrived 
at Kingston and was making plans for an early attack 
upon Sackett’s Harbor. 

There was another report, that six or eight thou- 
sand men had been gathered from Quebec and Mon- 
treal and that they were to unite in an attack, and as 
a consequence there was great excitement and fear all 
about Sackett’s Harbor. The forces there had not 
yet been fully assembled, and they could rely only 
upon about three thousand men. General Brown had 
received orders to call out several hundred of the 
militia, and two expresses had been sent to General 
Pike, who was in command at Plattsburg, for him to 
come at once and bring eight hundred men with him. 
One day, when the boys had met their friend Major 
Forsythe, they learned from him that no word had 
been received from Pike, and that General Dearborn 
was very much worried about the delay. 


A NEW PROPOSITION 


27 

“If we should be attacked,” said the Major, “by 
any such force as it is reported they have at Kings- 
ton, the General is very much afraid it’ll go hard 
with us. He has sent two expresses already to Platts- 
burg, but not a word has been heard yet from either 
of them.” 

“ Is that the only place he’s looking for help 
from?” asked David. 

“No, he’s expecting a small body of men from 
Rome and Utica ; but if Pike does not come, it will be 
a sad loss to us, for he is one of the hardest fighters I 
ever knew, and his men have a good deal of his 
spirit too.” 

“ Well, why don’t they hurry him up ? ” 

“ That’s what they have been trying to do,” said 
the Major with a smile ; “ but they’ve heard nothing 
from either of the expresses, and what else can we 
do?” 

“ Send another one,” said Elijah impulsively. 

“ That’s just what I proposed to General Dear- 
born should be done,” replied the Major; “and I 
rather think it will.” 

“ When will it be sent? ” asked David. 

“Just as soon as it can be gotten ready,” replied 
the Major, “ and those we want to go on it can 
start.” 

“ Who’s going ? ” asked Elijah. 

“ Two young friends of mine,” replied the Major 


28 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


quietly ; “ one of them is named David Field and the 
other Elijah Spicer.” 

The boys looked at him in astonishment and asked 
him if he were not joking. 

“ No,” replied the Major, “there’s no joke about it. 
I’ve had a long talk with General Dearborn about 
this very thing, and I’ve told him of what you did on 
your trip to Niagara and down the St. Lawrence. I 
would rather trust you than any two men I know, 
and I have at last convinced the General that in spite 
of your age you are the ones to send with another 
message. We can’t afford to lose any of our men 
here, and I think your parents will be more willing 
for you to go on an errand like this, than they would 
be to have you enter the service here. But come 
with me,” he added, “ and we’ll go and see General 
Dearborn. He wants you to start right away, and 
wishes to see you before you go.” 


AN INTERRUPTION 


29 


CHAPTER III 

AN INTERRUPTION 

TT was soon decided that the boys should go on 
the expedition which the Major had proposed. 
The consent of their parents had been gained, though 
Mrs. Field had given hers somewhat reluctantly; 
and it was only when Mr. Spicer and Andrew had 
assured her that David could be trusted perfectly to 
depend upon himself, and that there . would be no 
great danger in the journey which they were to under- 
take, that she had at last withdrawn her objections. 

One of the former expresses sent by General 
Dearborn to Plattsburg had gone through the forest 
and the other had gone by the way of Whitehall. It 
was now proposed to send David and Elijah by the 
way of the St. Lawrence. 

“ You see,” the Major explained to them, “ Platts- 
burg can’t be over sixty-five or seventy miles from 
the St. Lawrence, and you can make your way 
down the river easily. You’ll find good skating most 
of the way, and where you can’t skate, you can 
use your snow-shoes.” 


30 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

“That’s what we can,” replied Elijah; “and if 
there’s any one of these Kanucks who thinks he can 
catch us on snow-shoes, or skates either, for that 
matter, he’s welcome to. Don’t you remember how we 
ran in that fellow on the St. Lawrence who was tinker- 
ing with the St. Regis Indians ? He thought he could 
skate some ; but he couldn’t get away from us before 
we took him, or after we laid hands on him either.” 

“ I remember it very well,” said the Major with a 
smile. “ He was exchanged afterward, and it was a 
good piece of work that you boys did.” 

“ I suppose we shall have to be on our guard when 
we pass Brockville and Prescott, won’t we ? ” asked 
David. 

“Yes, somewhat,” replied the Major, “though I 
think the most of their men have b6en withdrawn 
and sent to Kingston. You know it’s from there it’s 
reported that they’re going to make the attack on us. 
I don’t need to remind you boys,” he added, “ that 
the faster you can go the better it will be for us all. 
Pike will add greatly to our strength here, and mean- 
while we’re liable to be attacked any day.” 

“We shan’t stop to study the scenery of the St. 
Lawrence very much,” said Elijah, “and we’re going 
to start right away.” 

The boys were not to be dressed as soldiers, and 
carried on their backs only such things as would be 
absolutely necessary to them on their journey. A 


AN INTERRUPTION 


31 


pair of snow-shoes, a blanket, a change of clothing, a 
small hatchet, and food enough to last them for a 
couple of days formed all the load they had to carry 
in addition to their guns. They trusted to their own 
ability to provide a part of their own food while they 
were gone, and there were places along the river 
where they also had planned to stop for rest and 
food. Two weeks was placed as the utmost limit of 
time they would need, and it was hoped that much 
less than that would be required. 

The Major stood on the dock and watched them as 
they started on their journey. They were both 
strong and rugged boys, and though only seventeen 
years of age, they had been accustomed to take their 
axes and hold their own with the men through the 
long days in felling the trees and clearing the land 
in that newly settled country. 

“They’ll do,” said the Major to himself as he 
watched the long strokes which the boys took. 
“ Those youngsters have the right ring about them. 
I’m glad they’ve taken both their skates and snow- 
shoes, for they’ll find a good many places where they 
can’t use one of them but they can the other.” 

The boys found the St. Lawrence free from snow 
for the most part, and they had little difficulty in 
making their way mile after mile on their skates. 
The wind was with them, and as they swept rapidly 
on, talking but little, and yet keeping a sharp look- 


32 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


out ahead, they made rapid headway. When they 
stopped for dinner it was always on the shore, and 
they made a fire out of the dry branches of the trees, 
and Elijah frequently would cut a hole through the ice 
and with little exertion add some fish to their 
other food. The weather was intensely cold, and yet 
the wind swept them on so rapidly that with the ex- 
ertions they put forth they felt little but the pleasure 
of their skating. 

The first stop they made at any house was at Goose 
Bay, where in the autumn before they had made the 
acquaintance of the man who dwelt there, for there 
they were to spend the night; and so tired were they 
that the warmth of the great log-fire and the food 
which was prepared for them did not keep them long 
from their beds. 

“ This man Smith,” said their host,* 44 who had some 
dealings with you last year has got a great place over 
there on one of the islands.” 

44 We’ve heard something about that,” said the 
boys. 44 It isn’t right near here, is it?” 

44 No, it’s up the river a piece ; and they tell great 
stories about his quarters there. It’s said he’s got a 
cave on that island, and he’s got it so fitted out that 
he can live there all the year around if he wants to ; 
and then he’s got from ten to fifty men with him, 
sometimes more and sometimes less, and they have 
great times,” 


AN INTERRUPTION 


33 


u Which side is he on now?” asked David. 

“I don’t just know,” said the man with a laugh ; 
“ but he keeps his eye open, and it’s on the side that 
pays the best, I can assure you. He has the place all 
fortified, and there have been some strange doings on 
either side of the river that they can trace back to 
Smith and his gang. He makes no bones of saying 
that he’s on either side that will pay him better. Why, 
they even say he shipped aboard an American vessel 
last fall.” 

“ He did,” replied Elijah. “ He was a messmate of 
Tom Garnet’s.” 

“Who’s Tom Garnet?” asked the man. 

The boys were sober in a moment as they told the 
story of their friend’s experiences with the press- 
gang, and of his sad death in the first attack which 
Chauncey’s fleet had made upon the enemy. 

“ This Smith has a daughter,” said their host, re- 
suming his story, “ who lives on the mainland. 
People have seen her carrying food over to her 
father and his crew, and they sometimes think she 
carries word over to him too of what’s going on 
around here ; but somehow no one has quite the nerve 
to go over there himself and find out just the condi- 
tion of things. Smith says he’ll take the heart out 
of any man who tries to land on his island, and I 
don’t know but he would, too.” 

“ He’s an ugly customer,” said David, “ and I only 
hope I shall never see him again.” 


34 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

“ That’s so,” said Elijah. “ I’d rather meet the 
British.” 

When the boys resumed their journey on the fol- 
lowing morning they found that it would be wiser 
for them to reserve their strength and not try to 
make such rapid progress as they had on the previous 
day. They both were exceptionally strong, but they 
had found it would be wise for them to harbor their 
strength, and the stories w T hich their host had told 
them of Smith and his followers had made them 
both apprehensive. As they passed by some of the 
familiar places they recalled many of their former 
experiences on the river, and when they came in 
sight of the place where they had made a capture of 
the British soldier a few weeks before they became 
more watchful still, but they passed the place with- 
out having been hailed by any one or seeing anything 
that threatened them on either side of the river. 

‘‘I’m going to stop at that house I see ahead there 
on the right,” said David, “ and see if we can’t get 
something to eat.” 

“ I’m with you there,” said Elijah ; and the boys 
at once approached the shore, and taking off their 
skates hid their bundles and approached the house. 
They received a kindly welcome from the wife of the 
farmer who lived there, and she at once began to 
prepare for them a warm meal. 

“That pork smells good,” said Elijah as they 


AN INTERRUPTION 


35 


watched the good woman. “This skating on the 
river makes one hungry.” 

“ Have you been skating far ? ” she asked. 

“ Yes, quite a ways,” replied David. “ Are there 
many people passing here now ? ” 

“ Not so many since our soldiers got driven away,” 
she replied. 

“ That was too bad that they got driven off,” said 
Elijah. “I should have thought they would have 
bothered you here some.” 

“ They didn’t,” said the woman, her eyes snapping. 
“ All of my neighbors left when they heard the British 
were coming ; but you didn’t suppose I was going to 
run off and leave all the jelly and things I’d been work- 
ing on all last summer, do you ? No, sir ! I just stayed 
right here, and when the soldiers came up to my 
door and asked me for all the provisions we had in 
the house, I just said they couldn’t have them.” 

“ What did they do ? ” said David. 

“ Do? ” replied the woman. “ Why, the officer looked 
at me a minute and then he began to laugh, and said, 
‘ All right, my good woman, we won’t disturb you ; 
you’ve got more nerve than your men-folks have.’ 
That wasn’t true at all,” she added, “ for they stayed 
around here a great deal longer than I ever thought 
they could.” 

The boys soon sat down to the meal which she had 
prepared for them and ate as only hungry boys know 


36 


TIIE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


how. The keen air of the winter day and the 
work of skating so steadily and rapidly as they had 
done gave them both very keen appetites, and the 
good woman stood by, seeming to enjoy the rapid 
way in which her food disappeared, and constantly 
urging them to allow her to help them to “somethin’ 
more.” She told them all she knew of the condition 
of the country thereabout, and of what she had 
heard of the plans of the British soldiers across the 
river ; but she added nothing to what the boys already 
knew, only confirming the reports which they had 
heard, that the most of the British soldiers were 
being assembled at Kingston, and that it was reported 
that an attack would soon be made from that place 
upon Sackett’s Harbor. 

The boys, without telling her of the object of their 
journey, had yet given her assurances of their own 
loyalty to the side she favored in the struggle, and 
there was nothing, in consequence, too good for her 
to do for them. She talked steadily through the 
early part of the meal, but the boys being too hungry 
to reply only listened respectfully to what she had 
to say. 

When the keenness of their appetite had gone they 
responded to some of her questions and told her of 
some of their own experiences on the river, but they 
were only partly through with their eating when 
there came a loud rap on the door of the room in 


AN INTERRUPTION 


37 


which they were sitting. The woman quickly re- 
sponded, and the boys looked up as she opened the 
door. They were more than startled at the sight which 
met their eyes. There stood before them their old 
enemy Smith, and with him were four or five of his 
companions, and among them they noticed one 
Indian. The strange stories which, their friend at 
Goose Bay had told them of Smith’s dealings and of 
the fortified place which, he had on the river, only 
served to increase their alarm when they saw the 
company before them. They glanced all about them, 
but no way of escape presented itself. They half 
started from their chairs to move to the place where 
their guns were standing when the party entered, the 
room. It was too late for them to do anything to 
defend themselves, and there appeared to be no way 
of escape. Elijah glanced at his companion’s face, and 
noticing his look of determination, quickly decided 
to allow his friend to take the lead; but David 
only quietly stood in his place and waited to see 
what the party would do. 


38 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER IV 

A NIGHT IN THE CAVE 

QMITH at once recognized the boys, and the scowl 
^ which at first came over his face soon gave way 
to a more pleasant expression, and the words which 
he spoke apparently were cordial. 

The boys were upon their guard, and this unex- 
pected manner of their old-time enemy, like the old 
Trojans who were afraid of the Greeks even when 
they were offering gifts, made them determined to 
be more watchful than ever against Smith, even 
though he did appear to be unusually friendly. He 
at once entered into conversation with them and 
made many inquiries as to the condition of things 
at Sackett’s Harbor. The replies of the boys were 
brief, and they were constantly on the watch for an 
opportunity to escape from the house. 

“ The Americans have had some losses this winter, 
I hear,” said Smith, “ and the Canadians are in high 
feather. They think they’ll have no trouble in whip- 
ping the Yankees, and I understand that they’ve got 
personal designs against Sackett’s Harbor, too.” 


A NIGHT IN THE CAYE 


39 


“ So we hear,” replied David ; “ but if they want 
that place they’ll have to come and take it, that’s all 
I can say.” 

“ They’re getting the Indians pretty well stirred 
up,” said Smith. “I think it’s five dollars they’ve 
offered for every scalp, isn’t it ? ” said he turning to 
the Indian, who only nodded his head and made no 
other reply. 

The boys became silent, and the reference which 
Smith had made to the reward which the British had 
offered for every scalp brought in by the Indians 
had not served to quiet their minds. What could 
they do against the man before them? A contest 
would certainly end in their capture at last, and the 
reference which had been made to scalps made them 
both afraid that Smith himself might not be averse 
to entering into that method of gaining some English 
money. Here the}' were at the very beginning of 
their trip apparently shut off from any progress, 
and in the power of a man whose good graces they 
had no right to expect, and who in all probability 
would only be too glad to repay them for the losses 
he himself had suffered at their hands. 

44 What are you doing down here, boys, anyway ? ” 
said Smith at last. 

David hesitated a moment before he replied, and 
then deciding that the frankest way would be the 
best, said, 44 We were on our way to Plattsburg.” 


40 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

“ Plattsburg ? ” said Smith in surprise. “ Why, 
you’re away out of your course. This is no way 
to go there.” 

“ It’s one way,” said David quietly. 

“What were you going for?” continued Smith. 
“ I suppose you were going over to hurry up Pike. 
I’ve no doubt they have need of him and all his men 
at Sackett’s Harbor now, eh, boys ? ” 

“ Yes, we are going to hurry him up,” said David, 
“ and I think we’d better be starting on.” 

“Well, there’s no use in your going there now, 
boys,” said Smith quietly. 

“ Why not ? ” said David. 

“ For the simple reason that he isn’t there,” said 
Smith. “ I’ve got word that he’s already started for 
Sackett’s Harbor, and I shouldn’t be surprised very 
much if he was there even now,” and he took from 
his pocket and handed to the boys a letter which 
certainly confirmed his words, that Pike had started 
across the country for Sackett’s Harbor. 

The boys were puzzled. Smith certainly showed no 
disposition to harm them, at least openly, and the 
message which he placed before them surely showed 
that there would be no use in their continuing their 
journey. And yet, could they trust him? They 
knew that at times he was friendly to the American 
cause, and that when the promise of pay was better 
he did what he could for those on the Southern side 


A NIGHT IN THE CAVE 


41 


of the river. Perhaps he was disposed now to be 
friendly ; and if so, had they not better, so far as ap- 
pearances went, at least, trust his words ? 

44 I’m on my way to Sackett’s Harbor myself,” said 
Smith after a little pause, 44 and I think you’d better 
go back with me. Oh ! you needn’t be afraid,” he 
added in a moment as he saw a look of hesitation on 
the faces of the boys ; 44 I’m a Yankee now, and I can 
sing Yankee Doodle with the best of them. I know 
what’s going on too,” he added significantly ; 44 I’ve 
been in Toronto and Kingston both, and I’ve got 
something to say to General Dearborn that’ll interest 
him, I know. In fact, I rather expect he’s looking for 
me now,” and he showed the boys a letter which he 
had in his pocket from General Dearborn and which 
clearly showed that there was an understanding be- 
tween them. 

44 I think we’d better go back, ” said David in a low 
voice to Elijah. 

Elijah nodded his head in reply, and David said, 
44 All right, we’ll go back with you, ” and the com- 
pany at once started up the river. 

The boys were suspicious all the time, and while 
they skated steadily onward they were watchful of 
their companions and prepared to meet any emergency 
that might arise. Here they were in the company of 
the very man who less than a year before had been 
very bitter against them, and who had done his 


42 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


utmost to make them prisoners, and many times had 
threatened their lives,, and yet apparently he was 
cordial in his feelings now towards them, and showed 
no disposition to do them harm. 

The parties skated steadily and rapidly on, Smith 
occasionally exchanging a few words with the boys 
and showing them that he was thoroughly posted as 
to the condition of things on both sides of the river. 
They knew that he had been in the service of the 
commanders at Sackett’s Harbor, and they soon de- 
cided that the only thing for them to do now was to 
lay aside all appearances of suspicion, and whatever 
their real feelings were, to go on with him as if they 
had no fear. 

In a few hours they came to the part of the river 
where they knew Smith made his headquarters. The 
party halted for a minute and the leader said to the 
boys, “I’m not going to Sackett’s Harbor till to- 
morrow. I’m going to stop overnight at my place, and 
I’m going to do something for you I never have done 
any outsider before : I’m going to ask you to stay all 
night with me.” 

“ I think we’d better push on for home, ” said 
Elijah, whose face betrayed the suspicions which were 
in his heart, and even David had no desire to put 
himself so completely in the power of his old-time 
enemy as he knew he would by spending the night 
in his home, which was far from either shore of the 


A NIGHT IN THE CAVE 


43 


river, and to which it was not at all likely any help 
could come if it were needed. 

Smith laughed and said, “ You boys are still sus- 
picious of me. Now, I’ll own up that when I was 
running some things into the country last year with- 
out stopping to pay the duties that I didn’t think the 
government had any right to ask of me, that I did 
feel a good deal riled at you youngsters for the way 
in which you got the best of me. I don’t mind sayin’ 
that a bit ; but if I wanted to do you any harm I 
shouldn’t have asked you to come over to my place, 
for I should have done for both of you when I first 
caught you. I shouldn’t have had much trouble with 
all these men in putting you out of the way if I had 
wanted to do that, now, would I ? ” 

“No,” said David slowly; “that’s so.” 

“ Now, I swear to you boys that I won’t do any- 
thing to you except to give you a good night’s 
lodging and pilot you straight to Sackett’s Harbor 
to-morrow morning.” 

“All right,” said David, “we’ll take your word 
for it ; ” and although Elijah shook his head they both 
followed Smith as he struck out towards the middle 
of the river, and soon came to the island where he 
had his home. The boys already had heard many 
things of this place, and they looked with curiosity 
about them when they drew near it. There was a 
large cave on the island, and in this Smith lived. It 


44 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

was not only a home, but a place which he could 
defend easily, and in which evidently he could shelter 
a large number of men. Some of his companions 
were there when the party arrived, and came forth 
to meet them, glancing at the boys with curious 
looks. They were a rough set of men, and David’s 
heart sank when he saw the desperate character of 
the company. 

Smith at once led the w'ay into the interior of the 
cave, only stopping a moment as they entered the 
door to call the attention of the boys to the six- 
pound cannon which stood at the mouth. 

“ Ye see,” said he, “ we’ve somethin’ to give a 
salute with to any. visitors we might happen to 
have,” and he laughed as he spoke. The boys 
found that the interior of the cave had been roughly 
fitted out, and hammocks were hung in various parts 
of it for the use of the men who were there. But 
little conversation was indulged in, the boys having 
no inclination for it, and Smith and his companions 
at once busied themselves in preparing supper. 
The boys were hungry, and accepted the invitation 
which was given them to join in the evening meal. 
Smith apparently paid but little attention to them, 
busying himself in the reports which some of his 
companions had to give him of their doings, or of 
what they had learned. 

The meal was interrupted by the entrance of a 


A NIGHT IN THE CAVE 


45 


woman, and the boys looked curiously at her as she 
came in, and at once recognized her as a daughter 
of Smith whom they had frequently seen when he 
lived near them, and of whom they had heard many 
reports since he had had this place of retreat on the 
St. Lawrence. It was commonly reported that she 
kept her father informed as to the condition of affairs 
along the river and frequently brought him food at 
the cave. She only remained this time, however, 
for a few moments, and when she had gone the men 
at once began to make preparations for the night. 

“You see we turn in early,” said Smith to the 
boys, “ and these ’ere hammocks are for you.” 

There was not much sleep for David and Elijah that 
night. The strange position in which they found them- 
selves in the home of these men who had been des- 
perate smugglers before the war began, and who now 
were on neither side in the struggle, but continually 
changing and selling out to the party which offered 
the highest reward for their services, made them more 
than anxious. The boys knew that the most of the 
men did not look upon them with much favor, and 
seemed to be angry at their leader for bringing them 
to the cave. But the long night passed at last, and 
by the time it was light they had eaten their break- 
fast, and Smith, leaving behind him all his own men, 
had started with them for Sackett’s Harbor. 

It was late in the afternoon when they arrived 


46 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


there, and eager as the boys were to go back to their 
own homes, they were so filled with curiosity as to 
Smith’s relations with the General, that they went 
with him to the quarters of General Dearborn. 

They were both pleased and surprised to find 
Major Forsythe there, and he was as greatly sur- 
prised as they to see them so soon at home again ; 
but before they had any opportunity to explain. 
Smith said, “I found these boys down the river. 
General, and as I knew that Pike had started from 
Plattsburg, and was probably here by this time, I took 
the liberty of bringing them along back with me.” 

“ That’s right,” said the General; “ we expect Pike’s 
men here to-morrow, and I’m glad the boys have 
come back. Have you any other news for me ? ” 

“ Yes ; I hear,” said Smith, “ that there is a mes- 
senger regularly goin’ on horseback from Toronto to 
Kingston. I think we can lay a trap for him and 
snare him if you want him.” 

“ That’s just what I do want,” said the General 
eagerly, “ and I’ve got a good big prize for the man 
who does it.” 

“ I’m your man,” said Smith, his avarice stirred by 
the promised reward; “but I shall want some help, and 
I don’t think I’d better take any of my men with me.” 

“No,” said the major, “you’d better take these 
two boys and their older brother, Andrew. They’re 
just the ones to go with you.” 


A NIGHT IN THE CAVE 


47 


Smith gave a whistle, and said slowly, “ Just as 
you say. I don’t suppose we’d have any trouble,” and 
he glanced questioningly at the boys. They made 
no reply, and soon left the company and started for 
home. 

Major Forsythe the next day came over to their 
farm and explained to them why it was he wanted 
all three of them to go with Smith. While, he felt 
reasonably sure that he would do what General 
Dearborn wanted him to for the sake of the reward 
which had been promised him, at the same time he 
felt suspicious of him. If the three boys were to go 
with him they would not be likely to suffer anything 
at his hands, as they would be so much stronger, and 
at the same time they might prevent any treachery 
on his part. 

But Mr. Spicer interposed a decided veto. “ I 
shan’t give my consent to their going now. It’s 
almost time for the ice to break up in the lake, and 
I’m not willing that Elijah should take any such 
chances,” 

“ Would you have any objections to their going 
when the ice breaks up?” asked the Major. 

“ Not at all,” said Mr. Spicer ; and it was finally 
arranged that when the ice was gone the three boys 
should go with Smith on his expedition to catch the 
messenger v 7 ho regularly went between Toronto and 
Kingston. 


48 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER V 

THE SOLITARY HORSEMAN 

T7 ARLY in April the ice in Lake Ontario began to 
- break up. Warm days were at hand and the 
long spring rains set in. The boys were impatient 
for the lake to become clear, as they were eager to 
start on their new expedition. Their fears of Smith 
had somewhat subsided since their last meeting with 
him, and they were so confident in their own strength 
when there were three of them together, that the 
thought of any possible treachery on his part did not 
alarm them. 

General Pike meanwhile had arrived with eight 
hundred men from Plattsburg. They were a de- 
termined-looking body of soldiers, and for General 
Pike himself the boys had unbounded admiration. 

“ He looks like a born fighter, doesn’t he ? ” said 
Elijah one day when they were at Sackett’s Harbor. 

“Yes, he does,” replied David ; “ and he’ll need all 
the grit he’s got, too, with such men as we have here, 
for the most of them don’t like the smell of gun- 
powder.” 


THE SOLITARY HORSEMAN 


49 


“ But tliey haven’t got used to it yet,” protested 
Elijah. “ Give them a chance to get acquainted with 
it and they’ll be all right.” 

“ I hope so,” said David ; “ but our soldiers haven’t 
done anything to be very proud of yet.” 

At last there came a day when the boys had gone 
over to see a new body of soldiers which they heard 
had arrived, and were standing on the street watch- 
ing them as they went through the drill when Elijah 
called his friend’s attention to some one coming up 
from the shore. 

“ That’s Smith, he’s come at last,” he said, “ and 
I’m glad of it. It makes me think of the text the 
Elder used last Sunday : ‘ The time of my departure 
is at hand.’ ” 

David laughed as he said “ I didn’t suppose you 
ever remembered the text, but that’s Smith sure 
enough.” 

Smith paid little attention to them as he passed, 
evidently being in a hurry, and when the boys had 
waited for some time for some word to be sent them 
that they were wanted at the General’s quarters, they 
felt somewhat chagrined that so little attention was 
paid to them, and started for home. 

“ I don’t believe the General means to send us at 
all,” said Elijah complainingly. “ I wish he hadn’t 
said anything to us about it in the first place.” 

“ It wasn’t the General, it was the Major,” said 


50 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


David; “and if there’s anything we ought to know 
we shall know it soon, you may be perfectly sure 
of that.” 

On the following morning, as if in fulfilment of 
David’s words, Major Forsythe himself came over on 
horseback to their home to summon the boys. He 
explained to them that Smith was going to start as 
soon as they could get ready, and that he had found 
out just the time when the messenger was to be sent 
from Toronto and the places he would pass on the 
road. 

“Do you think we can depend upon him ? ” asked 
Andrew. 

“ Yes,” said the Major with a smile, “ the reward 
he will receive if he is successful will settle that, and 
you boys, I might say also, will not be the losers if 
you capture the messenger. General Dearborn is very 
anxious to find out just what is going on across the 
lake, for he doesn’t know whether we are to expect 
an attack from there or whether we ought to be the 
first to make one.” 

The boys were to start early the next morning 
and were to sail in Smith’s boat. When at last they 
put out from the dock the younger boys were more 
than half afraid, and yet the presence of Andrew, 
and the fact that there were three of them against 
Smith in case trouble arose, made them soon forget 
their fears and become interested observers of their 


THE SOLITARY HORSEMAN 


51 


companion. He handled the boat with great skill, 
and more and more the boys wondered how they had 
ever been fortunate enough to escape him in the pre- 
ceding summer. 

They sailed almost directly across the lake and 
then skirted the Canadian shore. Smith seemed to 
be thoroughly posted as to the course, and as familiar 
with the Canadian shore as he was with the other. 
The next day, in the afternoon, Smith landed, and 
made fast his boat in a concealed place on the shore, 
and the entire party left the lake and soon came to 
the road which for some distance ran parallel with 
the shore. He had little to say to the party until they 
came to a place in the road which he had evidently 
been looking for, and then he stopped to give them 
directions. 

“ This messenger is coming on horseback, and he’ll 
have to pass right by this place. It isn’t possible for 
him to have come j^et, but he may pass here in the 
night.” 

“ What makes you think he’s going to pass here?” 
said Andrew. 

“ That doesn’t make any difference how I know,” 
said Smith ; “ I’ve got means of finding out, and 
that’s enough. I know he’s going to pass here, and I 
know we’re going to get him ; that’s enough for 
anybody to know.” 

He proceeded to arrange his party in two divisions, 


52 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


placing two on either side of the road and nearly 
opposite each other. The place he had chosen was 
in a little valley, the road coming down a long hill 
on one side and passing up a steep hill on the other. 
A little brook crossed the road a short distance below 
them, and the entire party were concealed behind the 
bushes which grew along the roadside. They could 
see a long distance on either side, and no one could 
approach from either direction without making known 
his coming. Andrew and David were stationed on 
one side of the road and Elijah and Smith on the 
other. Elijah did not seem to like this at first, but 
there was nothing for him to do but to obey their 
leader, who appeared to be unusually sullen that 
day. 

When they had taken their positions, all they 
could do was to wait. It had been agreed that 
Andrew and David should watch one hill, and Smith 
and Elijah the other. The excitement which the 
boys had felt when they first took their positions 
cooled under their long-continued waiting, and 
David at last started up from behind the bushes 
which concealed him, but a savage word from their 
leader made him drop again into the position he had 
held. 

The waiting became monotonous and their limbs 
became cramped, but Smith appeared to be so certain 
that they were doing just the right thing that all 


THE SOLITARY HORSEMAN 


53 


made the best of it. The sun was now getting low, 
and all things indicated that they would have to pass 
the night there. 

“You don’t suppose he’s passed, do you?” said 
David in a low whisper to Andrew. 

“ No, I think Smith understands his business,” re- 
plied his brother; “but look up the hill there; there’s 
a horse coming now, and he’s coming on the run, too,” 
he added in a minute as he gave a low whistle to 
which Smith responded, and the eyes of all the party 
were fixed upon the horseman who was coming down 
the hill at as rapid a pace as his horse could take. 

“ I wonder if that’s the man we’re waiting for,” 
said David. 

“ We’ll soon know,” whispered Andrew ; “but keep 
still now or you’ll have Smith after you.” 

They all became silent and watched the man as he 
came down the hill. When he had come near to the 
bottom Smith called out to them in a low voice, 
“ Get your guns all ready ; he’ll never get away from 
us alive if he’s the man we’re after.” 

The stranger, when he came to the brook, stopped 
his horse and led him down the side of the road to 
let him drink. While he was busy with his horse 
Smith stepped forth from his place of concealment 
and approached him. The man started when he 
heard the sound of his footsteps and gave a quick 
and suspicious look all about him. Smith at once 


54 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


entered into conversation with him, and though the 
boys could not hear all that was said, they readily 
could see that he was trying to disarm the man of his 
suspicions. The stranger was watchful, and the look 
of determination which they could see upon his face 
made them think he would not be taken without a 
struggle ; but at last they heard the stranger say as 
he gave his bridle a jerk and prepared to mount, “ I 
must go on, so good-day to you.” 

“ Not yet,” they heard Smith say in a loud tone ; 
“ don’t go yet.” 

“ Why not ? ” said the man in an angry tone as he 
started to take his gun. 

“ Hold on, look back there ! ” said Smith ; and at 
these words, which previously had been agreed upon 
as a signal, all three of the boys stepped into the road 
and covered the horseman with their guns. 

“ You’re my prisoner,” said Smith, “ and you’ve 
got to come with us. I don’t want your horse, that 
can go on about its business,” and he gave it a quick 
cut with a switch which he was carrying in his hand, 
and with a sudden plunge the horse started up the 
hill. “ Come with us,” said Smith to the man; 
“ there’s nothing else for you to do, and you might 
just as well give up with a good grace as with a bad 
one.” 

The stranger was evidently desperate, but after 
glancing quickly about him he saw that the outlook 



« < You’re my prisoner,’ said Smith ” Page 54, 







THE SOLITARY HORSEMAN 


55 


was all against him, and lie started slowly to follow 
Smith. When they came to the boat Smith halted 
the party, and turning to the stranger said, “ I’ll take 
those despatches you’ve got.” 

The stranger hesitated a moment, and Smith said 
savagely, “ Will you give them to us, or shall we take 
them from you?” The stranger evidently concluded 
there was nothing else for him to do, and taking a 
letter from his pocket he handed it to the leader. 

“ That isn’t all,” said Smith in a tone yet more 
savage ; “ I want everything you’ve got, and if you 
don’t hand it over pretty quick I’ll throw your carcass 
into the lake.” 

The man’s face flushed and he appeared to hesitate 
for a moment, and then reaching into the lining of 
his sleeve he drew forth another letter which he 
handed to his captor. Smith took this with a grunt, 
and when the man began to beg to be allowed to go, 
now that his despatches had been taken from him, he 
said, “ No, sir, there’s no going for you except with 
us. Step aboard the boat, and be lively about it. We 
haven’t any time to waste over here,” and the party 
at once embarked and started for the waters of the 
open lake. 

“You’re just in time, you see,” said the captive, 
u for some of my friends are coming down the hill 
over yonder,” and he pointed towards a party of men 
who were coming down the hill opposite. “I was 


56 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


expecting to meet them here,” he added, “ and when 
you first came up I didn’t know but you were the 
ones I was to meet; but you did the thing all right 
and there’s nothing for me to do but to make the 
best of it. I should like to know, though,” he said, 
“how you ever found out about it.” 

“ Oh, you wouldn’t understand it any better if I 
should tell you, ” said Smith ; “so I won’t take the 
time now, I want to give all my attention to getting 
home as soon as we can,” and he turned from the 
captive to give his entire attention to the boat. 


AN EXPEDITION AGAINST TORONTO 


57 


CHAPTER VI 

AN EXPEDITION AGAINST TORONTO 

rrHE little party arrived at Sackett’s Harbor safely 
and delivered their prisoner to the authorities. 
General Dearborn was more than pleased at the suc- 
cess of their expedition and was generous in his 
praise and rewards. The uncertainty which had been 
in his mind was relieved by the information which 
the despatches contained, and he now could form his 
plans with something of a knowledge as to what lay 
before him. 

In the despatches which had been captured he 
learned that the plans of the British had been com- 
pletely changed, and instead of their making an 
attack upon Sackett’s Harbor they were giving their 
attention to other matters entirely. This was exactly 
the opportunity which the General desired, and in- 
stead of waiting to be attacked he at once decided 
that the Americans themselves, acting upon the sug- 
gestion of the Secretary of War as well as upon his 
own, should move against the Canadian towns. 

It was decided that an expedition against Toronto 


58 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


should be made at once, and now that there were 
one thousand three hundred sailors there, and the 
new brigs “ Jefferson ” and “ Jones ” had been com- 
pleted, and the keel of the “ General Pike ” been 
laid, he felt that five thousand regulars and two 
thousand militia could make a very respectable show- 
ing in an aggressive movement. 

Andrew Field had received, through the kindness 
and influence of Major Forsythe, a corporal’s com- 
mission, and he with David and Elijah were to go 
under the command of the Major, and take their 
part as soldiers in the army. When the fleet started 
at last, very few of the soldiers knew what their 
destination was to be. From some things the boys 
had heard they were satisfied that they had started 
for Toronto, and Smith, who also was going on the 
expedition, was certain of it. He told them that 
Toronto, which then was the capital of Upper Canada 
and called York, was founded by Governor Simcoe 
in 1798, and was the provincial capital. It was 
situated on a small bay, and contained about three 
hundred houses built mostly of wood, and many 
buildings belonging to the government. 

When the expedition first started from Sackett’s 
Harbor a heavy storm arose and it was compelled 
to put back again, but on the twenty-fifth of April 
it started again, and arrived at Toronto on the 
twenty-seventh about seven o’clock in the morning, 


AN EXPEDITION AGAINST TORONTO 


59 


and immediately preparations were made for landing 
opposite the site of the old fort. 

David and Elijah could see a body of the British 
grenadiers that were paraded on the shore, and Smith 
called their attention to some soldiers who appeared 
at another point, who, he said, were called the 44 Glen- 
gary Fencibles.” A good many Indians also were 
visible, and they soon saw some horsemen moving 
into the town and the Indians led out to some stations 
that had been arranged, so that they could fire at our 
men if they should attempt to land. More and 
more soldiers appeared, and the boys, trembling in their 
excitement and with something of fear as well, took 
their places in the bateaux in which Major Forsythe 
and his men were placed and pulled toward the clear 
ground where he had been told to land. 

The Major told his men to rest a little before they 
replied to the fire of the enemy, and while they were 
lying on their oars and priming, General Pike, who 
never could wait a moment, jumped up on deck and 
said, 44 1 can’t stay here any longer. Come, jump 
into the boat! ” which his men did in spite of the balls 
which then were whistling all about them. 

The infantry also had embarked and formed 
platoons as they reached the shore. General Pike 
took charge of the first platoon he met, and ordered 
the whole to prepare for a charge ; but they did not 
have time to form completely before the British 


60 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


grenadiers turned and ran. At just that moment 
the sound of Forsythe’s bugles were heard, and 
they all knew that that meant he also was succeed- 
ing. The Indians seemed to know it as well, for as 
soon as they heard it they gave a yell and fled in 
every direction. 

Commodore Chauncey had arranged the naval 
squadron in such 9, way as to cover the landing of 
the soldiers, and he kept up a constant fire of grape 
against the woods, and held many of the British 
from moving against our men. When the infantry 
joined the riflemen of Forsythe they at once opened a 
heavy fire upon the enemy, who gave way before our 
men could use their bayonets. 

While they were making their way up the bank, a 
large body of fresh grenadiers appeared and compelled 
our men to drop back for a little, but they quickly 
rallied and drove the enemy rapidly before them. 
Our men held the bank which they had gained and 
faced the fresh body of British soldiers which had 
appeared; but the Americans were instantly formed 
for the charge, and began at the top of their voices to 
sing “ Yankee Doodle,” and started for the enemy. 
Whether it was the song or the sight of our guns that 
the British did not like will never be known, but at 
any rate they gave way and fled in great disorder. 

By this time all the American forces had been 
landed and collected, and after they had been formed 


AN EXPEDITION AGAINST TORONTO 61 

into platoons they started for the enemy’s works. 
This took a long time, however, because the bridges 
over the little streams that crossed the road had 
been destroyed, and our soldiers had to collect logfs 
and lay across them before they could pass over any 
of the field-pieces. 

They finally got one field-piece and one howitzer 
across, and went on through the woods, and as they 
came out they found a battery of twenty-four 
pounders before them. The General sent a couple 
of men around to the right of the battery to see how 
many men there were there, and they soon brought 
back word and told how the enemy were spiking their 
own guns. 

A charge was ordered, but the British did not wait 
to receive it. The American soldiers marched on, 
when a fire was opened upon them from the quarters 
of the British Governor. The General ordered his 
men to lie close, and gave orders for the artillery to 
be brought to the front, and this soon put to silence 
every gun of the enemy there. The firing had now 
ceased, and everybody was expecting a flag of sur- 
render. 

Suddenly, upon the stillness that had followed the 
noise of the guns, there arose the sound of an explo- 
sion which was terrific and awful. It was the British 
magazine, which contained five hundred pounds of 
powder, many cart-loads of stone, and an immense 


62 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


quantity of iron, shells, and shot. General Pike had 
just been to the inn to see one of his wounded men, 
and had seated himself upon a stump beside a British 
sergeant who had been taken prisoner and whom he 
was examining. But the General and the British ser- 
geant were both mortally wounded by this explosion, 
and between two and three hundred of the American 
soldiers were hit, and thirty-eight of them killed in 
this same disaster. Many of the British were also 
killed and wounded. The explosion was probably 
accidental, although at the time every one thought it 
was the slip of a mine. 

General Pearce, who now had the chief command, 
sent a flag demanding an immediate surrender, which 
was quickly granted, the only condition being that 
private property should be respected. The British 
General, however, made his escape, and quite a large 
body of regulars with him. 

Andrew Field was sent by Major Forsythe to the 
place where the wounded General Pike had been 
carried, to tell him that the British Union Jack was 
coming down, and the Stars were going up. Andrew 
was greatly touched at the smile which the General 
gave him at the announcement, and he helped to 
carry him on board the Commodore’s ship, and re- 
mained with him until he died. Just as he was 
dying, the surrendered British standard was brought 
to him, and, making a sign to have it placed under 


AN EXPEDITION AGAINST TORONTO 


68 


his head, he died without a groan, though his suffer- 
ings must have been extreme. 

An immense quantity of provisions and naval 
stores were taken by the Americans, but there were 
not boats enough in which they could carry the pris- 
oners back with them. There were seven hundred 
and fifty of these, and five hundred of them had to 
be released on their parole. Andrew and David went 
into the council chamber, and when they brought out 
the mace which was hanging over the chair of the 
Speaker, they found a human scalp also suspended 
there. 

“Fine business that for Great Britain, isn’t it?” 
said David with a look of disgust as he threw it to 
the floor. 

“ It’s what you must expect,” said Andrew, “ from 
men who will pay Indians for every scalp they bring 
in.” 

The boys also went with the soldiers and helped 
set fire to the government barracks and public build- 
ings, and watched them with a strange joy as they 
burned. No private property, however, was touched, 
and the time soon came for their return. 

The boys became separated here, David having 
gone to watch the departure of most of the army, 
which was taken from Toronto to Niagara, and when 
they arrived at Sackett’s Harbor he looked around 
for Elijah, but not a word from him could he 


64 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


hear. Whether he had been injured, or taken 
prisoner by some straggling British soldiers, or what 
had become of him, he could not learn. Smith also 
had disappeared, and anxious as Elijah’s parents were, 
they waited patiently, hoping that the lost boy would 
return with Commodore Chauncey when he came 
back. But a few days later when Chauncey did return 
to Sackett’s Harbor no tokens of the missing boy 
were received. What had become of Elijah? This 
was the question uppermost in the mind of David, 
and over which Elijah’s parents were as sadly 
troubled as was he. 

“ It’s strange,” said David one day to Andrew, 
44 that Smith hasn’t shown up.” 

“ I’ve thought of that,” said Andrew, 44 and it may 
be that that accounts in part for Elijah’s strange dis- 
appearance.” 

44 Well, whether it does or not Elijah isn’t here,” 
replied David, 44 and I only wish I knew what had 
become of him.” 

But day after day passed and the problem received 
no solution. Elijah had disappeared, and grief and 
perplexity were in the hearts of all his friends at 
home. 


THE CAMP IN THE FOREST 


65 


CHAPTER VII 

THE CAMP IN THE FOREST 

TX7TIEN Heman and his old time friend John Smart 
" * started on their long journey, they struck into 
a swinging gait and steadily held to it until they 
had passed around the point out of the sight of their 
friends who were watching 1 them from the dock at 
Sackett’s Harbor. The wind was cold and swept 
directly across the lake, and yet for hour after hour 
they held to the rapid pace which they had taken 
when they had first set out. John had no thought 
that Heman would be able to keep up with him, and 
in fact he had not been very enthusiastic when he 
had first suggested returning with him; but as his 
companion steadily kept by his side and showed no 
signs of fatigue, his respect for him increased, and 
several times he told him how glad he was to have 
him with him. 

John had a contrivance which he carried with him 
for keeping off the wind whenever they stopped to 
eat something on the shore. He was fully posted 
on all the needs of a man making a journey along 


66 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


the frontier, but this contrivance was one which 
Heman especially admired. He seemed to enjoy 
the rest of an hour which they took in the middle 
of the day as much as any part of their experience, 
and yet he never complained, no matter how rapid 
the pace which his companion set. 

When night drew near John explained to him how 
he was going to wait until morning before starting 
on. 

“Where will you stay?” asked Heman. “We 
can’t sleep in the woods without a tent.” 

“ That’s so,” replied John, “ and I don’t propose to ; 
but how w^ould you like to sleep in a house ? ” 

“I should like it,” replied Heman; “but I don’t 
know what makes you talk in that way, there’s no 
house anywhere about here.” 

John only laughed, and going to the shore he re- 
moved his skates, as Heman did also, and leading 
the way, in a short time came to a little log-house 
which was concealed among the trees. He knew 
just how to open the door, and when Heman stepped 
inside he uttered an exclamation of surprise. On 
the table in the centre of the room there were large 
pieces of pork and some corn-meal, and other pro- 
visions which appeared very tempting to the tired 
travellers. Wood was all arranged on the fireplace, 
and even the great kettle which hung over it on the 
crane had w^ater in it. Some one had evidently 


THE CAMP IN THE FOREST 


67 


been there not long before, and Heman was greatly 
puzzled to know how his companion knew anything 
about the place. 

While they were preparing their supper John ex- 
plained to him that all along the shore, at certain 
places which were known by the scouts and ex- 
presses, these little houses had been built, and were 
kept supplied with provisions by friends of the cause 
who were living not far away. 

Their hunger satisfied, the travellers soon made 
arrangements for the night, and slept soundly until 
near daybreak, when they arose, and after preparing 
and eating their breakfast started on again. In 
this way their journey continued, and they arrived at 
Niagara some little time before they had expected to. 
Heman looked with interest at the familiar places, 
but the soldiers were changed so often in those days, 
that none of his former companions could he find. 
There were rumors of an attack on Canada soon to 
be made, and the men at Niagara were waiting for 
General Dearborn to come to them. They were in- 
terested in the reports Heman and his friend brought 
them from Sackett’s Harbor, and when they told of 
the large number of men that were gathering there, 
considerable enthusiasm was shown. 

John Smart was delayed at Niagara longer than he 
had expected to be, and when he made arrangements 
to start again on his journey many of the older men 


68 


TIIE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


advised him not to return by the way of the lake. 
Signs of a heavy rain were seen and the ice was likely 
to break up soon. 

Acting upon this advice John and Heman crossed 
the lake to the Canadian side and decided that 
they would make their journey by land. The snow 
was still very deep, and while soft and coarse in some 
places, still gave them a foothold for their snow-shoes, 
and as both of them were accustomed to the use of 
these they made quite rapid progress. They fre- 
quently stopped at some of the little houses on the 
frontier and had no difficulty in passing as Canadians. 
Several times their journey was interrupted by 
storms, and they would be compelled to remain for two 
or three days at some house, and at such times John’s 
nature seemed to change completely. He became 
quiet, having almost nothing to say even to his com- 
panion. Meanwhile he had put the despatches which 
he was carrying inside the lining of his coat. 

The progress which they made was slow now, and 
frequently as the snow disappeared they found they 
were compelled to make their way through mud and 
over swampy soil, and April was well advanced before 
they had arrived on familiar ground. One night, 
when they had stopped to wait till morning before 
they went on, John turned to Heman and said, “We 
shall have to be very careful now or Proctor’ll get 


THE CAMP IN THE FOREST 


60 


“ Is Proctor in command of the British around 
Detroit now ? ” asked Heman. 

“ Yes,” replied John, “ and he’s the greatest blow 
in the British army. He doesn’t think the Yankees 
are of much account, and threatens to sweep us all up 
in no time into Lake Erie or Lake Michigan.” 

“ Still I think he’s to be feared somewhat,” said 
Heman. 

“No doubt,” remarked John dryly. “After the 
experience on the River Raisin one must be prepared 
for almost anything.” 

During the day signs of men were seen and John’s 
watchfulness was greatly increased. He was thor- 
oughly familiar with his ground now, and Heman had 
great confidence that he would lead the way safely 
through the midst of the enemy. Their plan was to 
make their way as speedily as possible to Fort Meigs, 
where General Harrison was in command in person. 

A little later John suddenly stopped and called his 
friend’s attention to smoke which he could see in the 
distance. Heman could not make it out at first, but 
after John had shown him where it was he could see 
it, although he was inclined to doubt whether it was 
anything more than a cloud or not. 

“ It’s strange,” said John in a low tone, “ that men 
should be building a fire in this way in the daytime. 
They must feel pretty sure of their ground. I hope 
nothing’s happened to General Harrison.” 


70 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ You don’t suppose there has, do you ? ” said 
Heman, sharing some of the anxiety which his com- 
panion expressed. 

“No, I don’t,” replied John. “I don’t think Proc- 
tor will ever get near enough to Harrison to see the 
color of his hair, unless it is as a prisoner.” 

But they were very careful as they went on, and 
later in the day Heman felt his companion pull his 
sleeve quickly and call his attention to a man they 
could see in front of them. He wore the British 
uniform and was evidently a soldier. 

“ There’s a body of them near here somewhere,” 
said John. 

“ That’s so,” replied Heman, “ and I presume 
we’re in considerable danger.” 

John looked at him in surprise. In their early 
acquaintance he had never known Heman to speak 
of danger in such a matter-of-fact way, and evidently 
his feelings became manifest by the curious look he 
gave him. Heman understood it too, for he smiled 
as he said, “ After a man has had his hair parted by 
an Indian’s bullet, he loses some of his old feelings.” 

“ That’s true,” said John. “ A smell of gunpowder 
is sometimes good for chills.” 

They still could see the man in front of them, and 
J ohn said, “ He’s going to the camp.” 

“ How do you know ? ” said Heman. 

“ Because he’s going in the direction from which 


THE CAMP IN THE FOREST 


71 


that smoke came that we saw back there ; but there’s 
nothing for us to do except to push on and find out 
a little more about it.” 

Accordingly they continued on their journey, but 
used much more care as they advanced, and fre- 
quently they waited behind trees and went ahead 
only when they were certain that the way seemed 
clear. The night was not far distant, and they had 
no desire to spend it where they were unless they 
could find out something about their neighbors. It 
was not long before the sounds of singing and men 
engaged in conversation were heard. 

“ There are some Indians and soldiers there,” said 
John; but Heman made no reply, and they went 
stealthily ahead, passing from the shelter of one tree 
to another as they went on. 

A low whisper from John indicated to Heman that 
they must be near the camp which they were seek- 
ing, and when Heman changed his position he was 
startled, as, looking ahead, he saw a camp in which 
there seemed to be a dozen or more men. A part of 
them were Indians, and the others were soldiers who 
were drinking, and evidently were entirely unsus- 
picious that any one was near. 

“ That looks bad for us if we get caught,” said 
John. “ These men can’t hold back the Indians 
when all of them are full of bad whiskey.” 

Heman nodded his head in reply, wishing in his 


72 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


heart that his friend would not talk any more, and 
yet he was wondering what his plan would be now. 

“We’ve seen enough,” said John in a low tone. 
“ It’s time for us to get out of this ; ” and as he spoke 
he turned to leave, and beckoned to his companion to 
follow. 

Heman’s foot slipped as he started to follow his 
companion’s example, and when he tried to recover 
himself he fell heavily to the ground. The noise he 
made in falling, and the smothered exclamation 
which he gave, were easily heard in the camp. 

“ Jump up behind the tree and stay right where 
you are,” said John, setting the example himself and 
taking his stand behind a large tree. 

But the noise of Heman’s fall at once produced a 
change in the camp. A silence followed the shout- 
ing and singing which they had heard, and when 
John peered forth carefully he saw the men scatter- 
ing in every direction. It was evident that they 
were going to try to find the cause of the disturbance 
if they could. 

Some little time had passed and the hiding-place 
which the two men had taken as yet had not been 
discovered. Hope began to rise in Heman’s heart, 
and he thought there was a possibility of their es- 
caping. He was about to whisper his thought to his 
friend when he suddenly glanced to his right and saw 
an Indian standing there and watching them. John 


THE CAMP IN THE FOREST 


73 


already had seen him, and as he heard the startled 
exclamation which Heman gave he quietly said, 
u We’re caught, and we might as well give in. There 
are a couple of soldiers coming this way too, and 
we’d have no chance against the company. Come on, 
Heman, we’ll have to make the best of it,” and he 
stepped forth and followed the Indian, who at once 
led the way into the camp. Here he gave a call and 
quickly summoned all his companions, who at once 
returned to camp, and, as they entered, gave John 
and Heman glances that were not at all reassuring. 


74 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER VIII 

A STRANGE HIDING-PLACE 

TT was a strange company in which the two captives 
soon found themselves. The evidences of their 
carousal were plainly to be seen, and they had been 
drinking just enough to make many of them nearly 
wild. Some of the Indians wanted to kill the prison- 
ers at once, and Heman’s face became pale as he saw 
the disposition so many of the men manifested; but 
the man who was in command, whom several of them 
addressed as “ captain,” soon put an end to any demon- 
stration of the kind. Both the prisoners then knew 
that their main reliance, and perhaps their only one, 
was upon him. John had been cool and collected all 
through the trouble, and while Heman’s face had 
been unusually pale he too had been remarkably 
quiet. 

When all the company at last had become still 
and the captain saw that the prisoners were in no 
immediate danger he turned to them and said, “ Who 
are you, and where’d you come from ? ” 

Heman made a sign to his companion to do all the 


A STRANGE HIDING-PLACE 


75 


talking, and John said, “We were coming through 
the woods and stumbled on your camp.” 

“ That sounds well,” said the captain good-na- 
turedly ; “ but how do I know you’re not spies ? I 
never saw either of you before, to my knowledge.” 

“ And you won’t see us again very soon either,” 
said John, “ if you'll let us out of this.” 

“ We shall have to search you first and see whether 
you have anything about you that’s suspicious,” said 
the captain ; and as John made no reply and offered 
no resistance, the search was at once made. They 
did not discover the despatches that John had con- 
cealed in the lining of his coat, but they found 
enough to convince them that the men belonged on 
the other side. 

“Yes,” said John, in reply to a question of the 
captain’s, “ we were on our way to join Harrison’s 
army. We can’t dodge that very well after what 
you’ve found ; but you’ll protect us, won’t you, cap- 
tain, from these savages? They’re the only ones I’m 
afraid of, for I haven’t forgotten their performances 
at the River Raisin.” 

“ Neither have I,” said their captor with a scowl ; 
but John couldn’t decide whether this was an indica- 
tion that he was angry at what was done to the 
Americans, or at the Americans themselves, but in a 
moment the captain added, “ I never liked that, do 
you know, at all. No one but Proctor would ever have 


76 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


allowed it, and I don’t mind telling you that he hasn’t 
an officer under him that thinks he’s fit to command. 
He doesn’t seem to understand the first principles of 
civilized warfare. I’ll protect you,” continued the 
captain ; “ you can rely upon me for that, but I shall 
have to take away your arms and pinion your hands 
behind you.” 

“All right,” said John. “Here’s my gun, and 
Heman, you give him yours too.” 

He said nothing, however, about the knife which 
he carried in his leggin, and which he hoped to re- 
tain when he saw the captain was not disposed to 
search him further. Their hands were soon tied 
behind them, and they took their seats on a stump 
which was in the centre of the camp. 

In the conversation which followed they learned 
that evidently great things were in preparation. It 
came out that Harrison was still in command at Fort 
Meigs and that plans were being formed for attacking 
him ; it also was brought out that the company which 
had captured John and Heman had been out scouting 
and had brought back such information as they had 
gained from the region about Harrison’s camp. 

“ This is a great piece of news,” said John in a low 
tone to Heman, who sat by his side. “ I wonder if 
Harrison has any idea of the plans these fellows are 
making to attack him. He’s no such fool as Win- 
chester was, who wouldn’t listen to a word his scouts 


A STRANGE HIDING-PLACE 


77 


brought in, and he had some of the best scouts in the 
army too.” 

As his friend then became silent Heman looked 
toward him just in time to see a startled look upon 
his face which he had the presence of mind to allow 
to pass at once, but in glancing about the company 
John’s look had fallen upon a strange-looking man 
whom he was sure he recognized as Peter Navarre. 
John wondered what he could be doing in this com- 
pany, but the quick look which the Frenchman had 
given him showed him that he also had been recog- 
nized, and knowing how thoroughly he could be de- 
pended upon, John’s heart at once became very much 
lighter. 

“ I don’t just see,” he whispered to Heman a little 
later, telling him of his discovery, “ how Peter ever 
came to be here, but it’ll be a good thing for us that 
he is here. He’s one you can depend upon, and he 
won’t forget me either, for I did him a friendly turn 
myself one time.” 

“ Do you suppose they’ll stay here all night ? ” said 
Heman, glancing at the sun which already had dis- 
appeared below the edge of the forest. 

“ I don’t know, ” replied John ; “ but wherever they 
take us I hope they’ll leave us together for the night.” 

“So do I,” replied Heman ; “though I don’t know 
that I could be of much use in trying to get away.” 

It was soon settled, however, that they should not 


78 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


remain where they were for the night. The entire 
party began to move with the prisoners in the midst 
of them and soon came to a large camp. Here it 
was evident that they had been expected, and the 
captain turned his prisoners at once over to another 
man. There were a large number of Indians there, 
and many sharp and savage glances were given the 
prisoners as they were led to the edge of the camp, 
where their fastenings were once more looked to, 
and they were left to themselves. 

“ If they’ll only put us into the same tent to-night,” 
said John, “it’ll mean so much more for us. We can 
then help each other, and we’ll stand ten times as 
good a chance of getting away.” 

Heman made no reply, and the silence was main- 
tained till the darkness had settled upon them. A 
couple of soldiers were then sent to conduct them to 
the place in which they were to pass the night, but 
in a moment they saw that the}^ were not to be left 
together. Heman was thrust into one tent and John 
led on to another at some distance from it. 

That night John Sharp determined that there 
should be no sleep for him. He did not know just 
what to expect, and yet in his heart there was the 
hope that somehow he might make his way out of the 
camp. He did not know whether General Harrison 
knew of the plans that were being formed against him 
or not, and the desire to tell him of these, as well as 


A STRANGE HIDING-PLACE 


79 


to give him the despatches which had not been taken 
from him, increased his desire to escape. The pres- 
ence of Peter Navarre also promised good things, and 
altogether John was not without hope that somehow 
an opening for him to escape would appear. A guard 
had been stationed in front of his tent, and as the 
long hours passed and no signs of any help appeared 
he began almost to lose heart. 

It was long past midnight, and silence had come 
over the entire camp when John, who was lying on a 
blanket on the floor of the tent as far as he could get 
from the watchman, heard a low whisper from outside 
the tent. “ Here ! Here ! ” and the sound was re- 
peated. Without changing his position John moved 
the side of the tent in such a way as to show any one 
outside that his words had been heard. A silence fol- 
lowed, and John eagerly watched to see whether his 
guard had become suspicious or not, but when several 
more minutes had passed and he found that he had not 
paid any attention to his prisoner, he noticed that 
the piece of the tent behind him was lifted and some 
one pushed through his head. In spite of the dark- 
ness John could see the outlines of the form, and he 
at once concluded that his visitor must be Peter. He 
rolled over on his side in such a way as to shut off 
the view of Peter’s head from the front of the tent, 
and found that a place large enough for him to crawl 
through had been cut in the canvas. 

O 


80 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


Peter reached with his knife and cut the thongs 
which bound John’s hands behind him, and helped 
him as he slowly slid backward through the slit 
which had been made in the tent. He had just 
arisen to his feet and waited for a moment to see, if 
he could, what the prospects of escaping were, when 
he heard the guard move. Peter also caught the 
sound and knew that the watchman was entering the 
tent. 

“ Now run,” whispered Peter grasping his friend’s 
hand, and both started and ran as silently and swiftly 
as they could. They heard the guns fired behind 
them, and at once the camp was thrown into confu- 
sion. It seemed to John that the Indians were on 
every side of him, but it was so dark that the dusky 
forms could not be distinguished from the lighter 
ones. Peter brought their flight to a walk, and 
moving about among the Indians, who had no torches, 
he kept John close to his side, and yet steadily made 
his way towards the outside of the camp. 

When this had been gained Peter started on the 
run again, only grasping his friend by the hand. 
John had not the slightest idea in which direction 
they were moving nor where they were going, but 
satisfied that he could trust his guide completely, he 
ran on in the darkness, keeping close to the side of 
his friend. They could hear the sound of guns be- 
hind them, and torches appeared here and there ; but 


A STRANGE HIDING-PLACE 


81 


tliey had gone but a short distance from the camp 
when Peter stopped behind a very large tree whose 
outlines could be seen even in the darkness, and 
crouching upon his knees he took John’s hand and 
showed him where there was a large hole in the bark. 

“Tree hollow, crawl in,” said Peter, and suiting 
the action to the word he at once entered, and John 
quickly followed him. The tree was hollow, and 
evidently had been used for similar purposes before. 
There were places in the side of the tree through 
which they could peer, and John saw for a long time 
the lights moving about the forest. Several times 
men passed the tree in which they were concealed, 
but none seemed to know of their hiding-place. After 
a long time it was evident the Indians and the sol- 
diers were returning to the camp, and John knew 
that in the number that had gone forth their own 
steps could not be traced, and that it was not likely 
that they would be discovered unless some one knew 
of the hiding-place. 

Meanwhile the captain who had made them 
prisoners went into Heman’s tent. Heman at once 
knew that he was angry, but he was ignorant of the 
cause. He wondered as the captain saw that the 
thongs which bound his hands and feet were drawn 
more tightly, and asked what it all was for. 

“ I don’t intend to let you get away,” said the 
captain. 


82 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ I haven’t been trying to,” replied Heman. 

“Well, that friend of yours has given us the slip, 
and I don’t intend to have you join him if I can pre- 
vent it,” said the captain. 

“ Has he got away ? ” asked Heman eagerly. 

“ Yes,” replied the captain ; “ hut we shall get him 
again very soon,” and he turned and left the tent. 


THE LIVING AMONG THE DEAD 


83 


CHAPTER IX 

THE LIVING AMONG THE DEAD 

fTHE battle-field at Toronto, after the storming had 
taken place and the troops had surrendered, pre- 
sented a sad sight. The dead lay scattered here and 
there, and the force of the explosion was nowhere 
seen in a more distressing light than in its effects 
upon the bodies of the men. Here a headless body 
lay stretched, and there could be seen limbs which 
had been torn from their place and thrown a distance 
of many feet. Distorted and blackened faces were 
turned towards the light, and the dead men seemed 
to have suffered a death far worse than the fortune 
of war often brings. 

Occasionally those who were moving about the 
battle-field would catch the sound of a groan or a moan 
without being able to distinguish from whom it came. 
The burning fort still smouldered, and as the smoke 
from the blackened ruins of the burned barracks was 
still rising, it was a scene to make any one sick at 
heart, and the sight of the dead, and the mangled 
bodies of some of those who were yet living, would 
arouse the pity of the hardest heart. 


84 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


All through the day men had been busy gathering 
the wounded and placing them on shipboard, as an 
early departure was eagerly looked for, for the expe- 
dition would be considered as completed only when 
they had safely brought back their men and prisoners 
to the American shore. 

Some had been busy in gathering the bodies of the 
dead and preparing them for a hurried burial. Friend 
and foe had united in this work, and together had 
searched the field for the face of a friend or the body 
of some comrade. Many a time a strong man would 
be seen to break down, and sobs would be heard as he 
would discover the body of some one he had known 
and loved. A father would find the mangled body 
of his son, a brother would stumble over a corpse 
which he would soon recognize as that of his own 
brother, and the scene of carnage was followed, as it 
always is, by a scene of sorrow. 

As the day wore on even women were seen upon 
the battle-field searching for the dead or caring for the 
wounded, and many a suffering man had that day to 
bless the gentleness and tenderness of some unknown 
woman. 

The sun had set at last and the full moon rose. As 
it came up above the horizon full and glorious and 
beautiful, it looked upon such a sight as is seldom 
seen. The ground was all stained with blood, and 
covered with the bodies of men who had been shot, 


THE LIVING AMONG THE DEAD 


85 


or pierced with the bayonet, or tom to pieces by the 
awful explosion so much worse than both combined. 
The search did not cease as the moon rose. Far into 
the night and all through the next day some were 
busy in burying the unknown dead and caring for 
the wounded, and laying away the bodies of those 
who had been known as friends. 

Early in the evening under the full moonlight two 
men were together searching for the body of the son 
of one of them. All through the afternoon they had 
been looking without success, and far into the night 
their efforts were continued. 

44 What an awful, awful thing war is ! ” said one of 
them. 

“ Yes,” said the other. “ It seems so unnecessary. 
All this bloodshed and waste of money might have 
been avoided if only a little of a Christian spirit had 
been shown.” 

44 1 know it,” replied the other, 44 and I think our 
own government is more to blame. They never had 
any right to use that press-gang. It was bad when 
they took our own men, but worse when they took 
those of the States.” 

44 Yes,” replied his companion; 44 but when the 
States make war upon us we have to defend our- 
selves, whatever we may think about the original 
cause of the war.” 

44 1 don’t know about that,” replied the other, dubi- 


86 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


ously, but just then a cry arose from bis companion. 
He bad stumbled over a body, and when he had 
stooped to examine it he had quickly recognized it as 
that of his own son. 

“ He was only eighteen years old,” said the heart- 
broken father. u I never wanted him to go into the 
fight at all, but he did go, and this is all there is left 
of him for me. What will his mother say? I’m 
afraid the blow will kill her.” 

His companion was silent, though he deeply sym- 
pathized with the sad man by his side who at last 
had found the object of his search. The lost son had 
indeed been found, but only found to intensify a loss, 
the sense of which would increase with the years. 

They obtained a rude stretcher, and tenderly 
placing the dead body of the young soldier upon it, 
were moving from the field and had come near to the 
edge of the place where the battle had been fought, 
when one of them thought he heard a groan. At a 
word from the father they both stopped and listened. 
Again the groan was heard, though it was now very 
faint, and placing upon the ground the body of the 
dead they looked about to see what they could do for 
the living. 

The groan was not repeated, however, though they 
were quite certain that they had found the body from 
whence it came. Marking the place in such a way 
that they could recognize it when they returned, 


THE LIVING AMONG THE DEAD 


87 


they took up their load again, and carrying it to the 
home of the sad father, left it there. 

His friend at once left the house, not wishing to be 
a witness of the sorrow of the mother, and made his 
way back to the battle-field. He had no difficulty in 
recognizing in a moment the mark he had left, but 
listen as he would, the groan which had at first at- 
tracted his attention was not repeated. 

Sad and silent he walked about among the bodies, 
listening for the sound which did not come and 
searching for any one who might yet be alive. He 
was about to give up the search, but stopped a 
moment as he found a body apart from the others and 
over which he had almost stumbled. He lifted it 
tenderly, but it showed no signs of life. Placing his 
hand over the heart he thought he detected a slight 
action. He resolved to take the body to his own 
home and see whether life could be brought back or 
not. He had no difficulty in getting another man to 
help him with the stretcher which he obtained, and 
together they placed the body upon it, and as they 
lifted the load a slight groan showed them that life 
was still there. 

“ My boys are all girls,” said the man, “ and some- 
times I’m not very sorry that it is so, especially in 
times like these. I’ve just been home with my friend 
McAllister, who has found all that is left of his only 
son here on the battle-field. From all that I can see 


88 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


this man we have on the stretcher must be a young 
fellow. You’re in no shape to have any one in your 
house, so I’ll take him home with me and do what I 
can for him. ’Twas a good thing the Yankees 
agreed not to touch private property, for if they’d 
burned the houses I don’t know how the wounded 
ever would have been cared for.” 

His companion assented to all that he said, and 
they soon came to the place which the other man 
called his home. It was a surprised group he met as 
he and his companion bore the apparently lifeless 
body into the house. The mother and her four 
daughters with startled looks watched them as they 
came in, showing in their manner the strain under 
which they had been throughout the day, and the 
effects of the sorrow which had come at its close. 

“Put him in the spare room, father. We’ll do the 
best we can for him,” said Mrs. McGann. 

It was a sad sight they saw when the body had 
been lifted from the stretcher and placed upon the bed. 
The hair had been burned from the head, the e}’e- 
brows were scorched and almost gone, and the 
face itself was black as if it had been burned by 
powder. One arm was limp and evidently had been 
broken. 

“It will be lucky if it’s only an arm that’s 
broken,” said the man after he had listened again 
to make sure that the, heart was still beating. 


THE LIVING AMONG THE DEAD 


89 


44 The uniform he wears shows he is an American,” 
he added in a moment. 

44 That makes no difference, we’ll care for him 
just the same. He’s only a boy,” said his wife 
sympathetically. “ Poor boy, how his mother would 
feel if she knew ! Perhaps she’s already afraid that 
he’s dead, as I, too, fear he soon will be.” 

44 It is a sad house McAllister has,” said her hus- 
band gently. 44 1 helped him home with the body.” 

44 It might have been ours, too, if our boy had 
lived to grow up,” said his wife ; 44 but we’ll do the 
best we can in taking care of this one.” 

Medical assistance it was impossible to obtain until 
the following day. A careful examination on the 
part of the physician showed that an arm had 
been broken, and while the face was badly burned 
the greatest danger came from the bruises upon the 
head. 

44 1 can find nothing else wrong,” he said after he 
had finished his examination. 44 It may be that his 
skull is fractured, I can’t tell yet, but it has had some 
fearful blows, and it may be a long time, too, before 
he’ll be conscious again,. — that is, if he ever does 
become conscious. A good deal will depend upon 
the care you give him,” he said as he left, prom- 
ising to come again the next day and look after 
the young soldier. 

The patient still lay quietly in the bed. Occa- 


90 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


sionally he uttered a groan, and sometimes would 
moan as he attempted to roll his head. The arm 
had been placed in splints, but the face was still 
black from the burn it had received, and the hair was 
nearly gone. Compresses wrung out of cold water lay 
upon his forehead, and by the bedside all of the time 
sat some one of the family. But if his own mother 
had seen him she would hardly have recognized in 
the suffering and battered boy, who constantly 
moaned as he lay in the bed, so black and bruised 
as to destroy all of the expression of his face, our 
impetuous young friend and soldier, Elijah Spicer. 


WARNING OF THE “LADY OF THE LAKE” 91 


CHAPTER X 


THE WARNING OF THE “LADY OF THE LAKE ” 
BOUT Sackett’s Harbor a great change had 



■ i " 1 “ come. Many of the soldiers had not returned 
from Toronto, but had gone directly to the other end 
of the lake, and consequently there was less bustle 
and stir, and everything appeared much more quiet 
than formerly. Commodore Chauncey came about 
the middle of May, but he did not remain long, and 
took three hundred and fifty more of the soldiers 
awa} r with him when he went. 

Sackett’s Harbor, therefore, was in a poor condi- 
tion for defence. Fort Tompkins had about two 
hundred dismounted dragoons, about forty artillery- 
men, and seventy odds and ends. Colonel Backus 
was now in command, and he well knew how weak 
the place was against any attack that might be made 
by the enemy. Fort Volunteer, which stood a little 
east of the village, was a poor structure, having been 
built by the exempts, and could offer but little 
assistance in defending the place. 

The people around Sackett’s Harbor shared in the 


92 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


general fear. The great value of the stores which 
were there would be a tempting object for the enemy, 
and the small number of the soldiers left to defend 
them would be able to do but little against a force of 
any size. 

About a mile from the shore was Horse Island. 
This contained about twenty-nine acres, and was 
covered with timber. A bar connected it with 
the mainland, and sometimes the water was low 
enough to enable any one to wade the whole length 
of it, and sometimes portions of it were even dry 
enough to walk on. 

Opposite the island, on the beach, there was a 
bluff four or five feet high extending for some dis- 
tance, and behind this were the woods, which had 
never been touched by the settlers. They were 
thick, and their presence suggested to the commander 
that it would be a good thing to use them as an aid 
in the defence of the place, for it was thought that 
if the British tried to land, in case they made an 
attack, that in all probability they would make use 
of Horse Island and this bluff which lay opposite to 
it on the shore. 

It was in accordance with this idea that Corporal 
Andrew with his younger brother David were given 
a force of men, and set to work in these woods. 
They began to fell the trees in every direction, and 
let them lie where they fell, so as to furnish an 


WARNING OF THE “LADY OF THE LAKE ” 93 

obstruction to the British soldiers if they should try 
to make their way through them. For several days 
the men had been at work there, and from early 
morning until late at night the sound of their axes 
was continually heard. It was not long, therefore, 
before the number of trees which had been cut had 
greatly increased, and while they might not stop the 
approach of the British, they certainly would serve 
to retard it. 

One day, while they were busily at work cutting 
the timber, as David looked up from the tree 
which he was chopping he saw a little sail out on 
the lake coming around the point. He paused a 
moment in his work to watch the little boat as it 
came nearer. Andrew had noticed that the at- 
tention of David had been called to something 
out on the lake, and his look followed that of his 
brother’s. 

“ If I’m not mistaken,” said Andrew, “ that’s Smith’s 
boat.” 

“ I don’t see how you can tell,” said David, “ when 
it’s so far away. I never can, and yet somehow you 
seem to know almost every boat on the lake as far 
away as you can see it.” 

Andrew laughed as he said, “ Well, that’s Smith’s 
boat, I am sure ; and there’s only one on board, and 
that must be Smith himself.” 

“ I wonder if he was hurt in the fight at Toronto,” 


94 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


said David ; “ I haven’t seen or heard anything of him 
since.” 

“ I don’t know,” replied Andrew. “ You know 
we’ve always thought he might know something 
about Elijah.” 

“ That’s so,” replied David eagerly; “and if you 
don’t care, I think I’ll run over to Sackett’s Harbor 
and talk with Smith when he lands. If he was mixed 
up in any way in Elijah’s loss, it may be that I can 
find out something.” 

Accordingly David dropped his axe and started at 
once for Sackett’s Harbor. The remembrance of 
Elijah served as a great incentive to him, and he ran 
as rapidly as he could. The thought was in his mind 
that he might learn something about his missing 
friend, and while he was suspicious of the man him- 
self, he hoped he might be able to judge from his 
actions, even if he did not learn anything from his 
words, as to whether Smith knew where his young 
friend was or not. 

So rapidly did he run that he arrived soon after 
the boat. He at once sought out the quarters of 
Major Forsythe, and was disappointed when he 
found he was not there. He quickly turned 
and started for the quarters of Colonel Backus, 
but he could get no admittance. Some one was 
in there, the guard told him, and that he had 
orders to admit no one while he was there. The 


WARNING OF THE “LADY OF THE LAKE” 95 

“ some one ” David felt almost certain must be 
Smith ; but there was nothing for him to do but wait, 
so with as much patience as he could command he 
seated himself and waited for permission to enter. 

After some time David was not surprised to see 
Smith himself come forth from the Colonel’s quarters, 
and as he started down the street David hailed him. 
Smith at once stopped, and while the expression on 
his face as he recognized the young man was not over- 
cordial, he still waited for him to approach. 

“ Do you know what has become of Elijah Spicer ? ” 
said David as he approached. 

The look of surprise that at once came over Smith’s 
face showed David that in all probability he knew 
nothing of his young companion’s whereabouts. 

“ No,” replied Smith ; “ I haven’t seen anything of 
him. I thought he must be with you, you’re always 
like each other’s shadow.” 

“ Well, he isn’t here ; ” replied David ; “ and he hasn’t 
been since the fight at Toronto.” 

“ Well, that’s the last I saw of him,” said Smith as he 
turned to leave. Just then Major Forsythe came from 
the Colonel’s quarters, and as he recognized his young 
friend he stopped to speak to him. David quickly 
told him of the interview he had just had, and of the 
disappointment he felt in learning nothing of Elijah. 

“I think he must have been shot,” said David 
sadly, “ or else killed by that explosion.” 


96 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


The Major was silent for a moment, for he had 
little hope to offer that Elijah would ever be seen 
again. He knew that the chances were all in favor 
of his having been killed, and perhaps so badly muti- 
lated as not to have been recognized ; but after a little 
he said, “ Smith has just been here to bring us word 
that the British are fitting out an expedition from 
Kingston, and are coming to make an attack upon us. 
General Dearborn has written General Brown to take 
command and make provisions for defence. You 
know he’s been on his farm eight miles from here 
ever since his time was up.” 

“ I hope he’ll do it,” said David. 

“ I hardly think he will,” replied the Major, “ on 
account of his feeling of delicacy towards Colonel 
Backus ; but we’re all going to do the best we can to 
defend the place. We’re going to keep just as sharp 
a lookout as we can, and that work you and your 
brother have been doing down there on the bluff is 
sure to be of great use, I think.” 

“ I hope so,” said David ; “ we’re been working hard 
enough.” 

“ I think it would be a good thing,” said the Major, 
“ if you would get three or four men and go and 
camp on Horse Island a few days. You could keep a 
sharp lookout, and let us know if anything came up. 
We’re going to have the 4 Lady of the Lake’ cruise 
about and keep a sharp lookout for any fleet of the 


WARNING OF THE “LADY OF THE LAKE” 97 

enemy. Do you think you could go over to Horse 
Island?” 

“ Yes, I know we could,” replied David, as he left 
the Major and started for home. 

It was in accordance with this suggestion of Major 
Forsythe’s that Andrew and David, together with 
the hermit and the cook, with whom our readers are 
already familiar, took a tent and some provisions and 
encamped on Horse Island. The fleet little catboat, 
the “Corporal,” which they had used before was 
given them, and there they remained for several days 
and nights. Every day they took the “ Corporal ” 
and sailed out beyond Pillar Point into the waters of 
the open lake, but no signs of any British fleet ap- 
peared. They often could see the “ Lady of the 
Lake ” in the distance, but none of the signals which 
had been agreed upon were given by her, until at 
last when they were out one day the schooner, which 
they could see in the distance, fired the gun which 
had been agreed upon as the warning of the approach 
of the enemy. 

“ The British are coming sure, boys,” said the her- 
mit, “ and we’ll have to put into port right away with 
the news.” The only vessel which they could see was 
the schooner which had given them the signal, and 
yet when this was repeated and they thought that 
they could make out that she herself was headed 
towards them, they put about and sailed at once for 


98 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


Sackett’s Harbor. They hailed and reported what 
they had learned to the friends they had left on 
Horse Island, but did not stop there. 

The greatest excitement prevailed at Sackett’s 
Harbor when they arrived with the news they brought, 
and active preparations were at once made for de- 
fending the place. A despatch was sent to General 
Brown, and Andrew and other men were sent 
throughout the neighborhood to arouse and summon 
the minute-men. 

David went down to the shore to wait and watch 
for events, and it was not long before the British 
fleet itself could be seen. Smith had taken his stand 
beside David, and seemed wonderfully familiar with 
the equipment and conditions of the enemy. 

“ That’s the ‘ Wolfe ’ off there,” he said, pointing to 
one of the largest vessels in the approaching fleet. 
“ She carries twenty-four guns ; and the 4 Royal 
George’ off there, she also has twenty-four. That 
brig you see is the 4 Earl of Moira,’ she’s got 
eighteen guns ; and those three schooners are 4 Prince 
Regent,’ the 4 Simcoe,’ and the 4 Seneca,’ and each 
one of them has quite a number of guns.” Besides 
all these, David saw two gunboats and about forty 
barges. 

44 1 tell you,” said Smith, 44 Sir James Yeo under- 
stands his business, and his twelve hundred men that 
he’s got with him are fighters, I know.” 


WARNING OF THE “LADY OF THE LAKE” 99 


“ You seem pretty well posted,” said David 
quietly. 

Smith only laughed in reply, and David had noth- 
ing further to say. He could hear the signal guns at 
intervals in the distance rousing the men in the 
country, but he himself was quiet. He was afraid 
that it would prove to be a sad day for Sackett’s 
Harbor, and he knew they were poorly prepared to 
meet such a fleet as was bearing down upon them. 

For some strange reason the British did not land 
that day, and the cause of the delay was not known 
until it was afterwards reported that a fleet of 
American barges had been coming from Oswego 
bringing reenforcements for Sackett’s Harbor. The 
enemy had turned their attention to these, and 
while they took twelve of the barges, their crews 
escaped into the woods, and seven other barges had 
succeeded in sailing past the enemy. All the re en- 
forcements did not arrive, so difficult was the path 
which they had to follow along the shore after they 
had left their barges, until nine o’clock in the evening. 

Meanwhile there was the greatest excitement in 
Sackett’s Harbor, no one knowing just when or 
where the British would land, or what the first move 
they would make would be. 


100 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XI 

AN ATTACK ON SACKETT’S HARBOR 

ENERAL BROWN, who had quickly been sum- 
^ moned, spent the night in making preparations 
for resisting the attack. The shore for some distance 
from the village was a precipice fifteen feet high. 
The British fleet, if it landed above the village, would 
have to pass the batteries that had been placed there, 
and would also have to have winds that would favor 
them. 

Because of this the General, as fast as the militia 
arrived, had sent them over to Horse Island, where it 
was thought, in view of all the circumstances, the 
British would first attempt to land. About six hun- 
dred of these militia-men, unused to war and fresh 
from their homes, who came in during the day were sta- 
tioned there, and about three hundred regulars were 
added to them ; and a hundred of the men who had 
just come from Oswego, thoroughly worn out by their 
march, were also placed on the island. All the rest 
of the forces at Sackett’s Harbor were placed at differ- 
ent positions on the shore, at whatever points were 
considered the best. 


AN ATTACK ON SACKETT’S HARBOR 101 

The morning of the twenty-ninth of May was won- 
derfully clear and calm, and when- David looked out 
over the lake he could not see that a breath of air ruf- 
fled its surface. The sounds could be heard a much 
longer distance than usual, and the excitement which 
began at Sackett’s Harbor soon spread. Fathers, 
husbands, and sons, many of whom had been quickly 
summoned from their homes, were that day to be 
stationed as targets for the bullets of the enemy. 
People in the country for miles around were gath- 
ered in. groups, and signals were arranged by which 
the progress of the battle might be known. 

Almost as soon as it was light, thirty-three large 
boats were seen approaching filled with soldiers and 
protected by the gunboats. These landed on the op- 
posite side of the island and formed there without any 
opposition, but when they tried to march across the 
bar they met a heavy fire and many of their men fell. 

The heavy gun at Fort Tompkins was directed 
towards them and did a good deal of damage. The 
militia-men on the shore at first did well, but their 
Colonel fell early in the battle, and when they heard 
the bullets whistling over their heads, and saw how 
they cut down the branches of the trees and threat- 
ened the men with death, they were thrown into a 
panic and turned and fled. Not all of them did this, 
but many were panic-stricken and would not stop at 
any call their officers made. 


102 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


When General Brown found that he was left 
almost alone, he retired towards the village; the 
British meanwhile, having gained the beach without 
any opposition, and scattering the militia easily, 
started to march towards the town. Colonel Backus 
met them with his men, and while they were com- 
pelled to fall back, they did so slowly and firing as 
they went through the half-cleared woods. 

General Brown had succeeded in rallying about a 
hundred of the militia, and soon joined the forces of 
Backus, but just then he happened to look towards 
the ship-yard and saw volumes of smoke pouring 
forth from the store-houses where all the spoils they 
had captured at Toronto were kept. He did not know 
but the enemy had gained his rear, and he rushed to 
the place and learned that Lieutenant Chauncey, of 
the navy, who was in charge there, had had reports 
brought to him that everything had fallen before 
the British, and so to prevent their gaining these 
stores he had set fire to them. General Brown was 
greatly relieved when he found the enemy was still 
only on one side of the village, and he went back 
quickly to his soldiers. These, although Colonel 
Backus soon fell, fought as they had never done 
before. 

The British had been very cool and brave, and 
were under the immediate command of Captain 
Gray, who was advancing in front of the ranks, and 



Page JOS 







AN ATTACK ON SACKETT’S HARBOR 


103 


was walking backwards waving his sword and urging 
his men onward. 

“ Come on, boys, the day is ours ! Remember 
Toronto !” he shouted ; but he had hardly uttered the 
words before a bullet struck him, and he fell. 

At that time very unexpectedly a signal for retreat 
came from the British fleet, and the enemy fell back 
to the boats. The Americans did not at the time 
understand the reason for this, but it was afterwards 
learned that when they heard the sound of the guns 
of the militia that had been rallied on the right, they 
had thought they were reenforcements. This was 
not true ; and it afterwards appeared that the British 
and the Americans were really almost running from 
each other, and in opposite directions : the Americans 
thinking the British were after them, and the British 
thinking our men were reenforced and likely to cut 
them off from a possible return to their boats. 

However, this made no difference so long as the 
British left. The Americans were in poor condition 
for defence at best, and were delighted that the 
enemy left, no matter for what reason. The Ameri- 
cans had lost their stores, which would have been 
saved except but for the misunderstanding ; and while 
these were valued at almost a half a million of dol- 
lars, they still saved the ship “ Pike,” which was on 
the stocks and almost completed. During the battle, 
and after the fire had been kindled, Lieutenant Tal- 


104 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


man, who was a warm friend of Andrew’s, had called 
to him when they saw that the schooner “ The Duke 
of Gloucester,” which had been taken at Toronto, 
had been set on fire by the flames of the store-house, 
and asked him to assist in putting out the fire. 
Andrew quickly responded with others, and rushing 
on board they soon put out the fires and brought her 
from under the flames of the store-house. When it 
is remembered that large quantities of gunpowder 
were on board of her, Lieutenant Talman’s courage 
will be the better appreciated. 

The day at last was finished, and while the Ajneri- 
cans had lost some valuable property, and about 
a hundred and fifty were killed, wounded, or miss- 
ing, they were rejoiced that still the place had been 
held in the face of such odds, and that about a hun- 
dred and fifty of the British had been killed or 
wounded, besides some officers and privates who had 
been made prisoners. 

General Brown, after the excitement had all 
passed, recognizing David one day as he met him 
on the street, had called him into his quarters, and 
in the course of his conversation showed him the 
following letter which he had just written to the 
Governor of New York: 

Dear Sir: We were attacked at the dawn of this 
day by the British regular force of at least nine hundred 
men, most probably twelve hundred. They made good 


AN ATTACK ON SACKETT’S HARBOR 


105 


their landing at Horse Island. The enemy’s fleet con- 
sisted of two ships, four schooners, and thirty large, open 
boats. We are completely victorious. The enemy lost 
a considerable number of killed and wounded on the 
field, and among the number several officers of distinc- 
tion. After having reembarked they sent a flag, desir- 
ing us to have their killed and wounded attended to. I 
made them satisfied on that subject. Americans will be 
distinguished for humanity and bravery. Our loss is 
not numerous, but serious from the great worth of those 
who have fallen. Colonel Mills was shot dead at the 
commencement, and Colonel Backus, of the First Begi- 
ment of Light Dragoons, nobly fell at the head of the 
regiment, as victory was declaring for us. I will not 
presume to praise this regiment. Their gallant conduct 
on this day merits much more than praise. The new 
ship and Commodore Chauncey’s prize, the “Duke of 
Gloucester,” are yet safe in Sackett’s Harbor. Sir 
George Prevost landed and commanded in person. Sir 
James Yeo commanded the enemy’s fleet. 

In haste, yours, 

Jacob Brown. 

His Excellency D. D. Tompkins. 


When Commodore Chauncey arrived a few days 
later, to remain for two months, he brought the story 
of how the Americans had captured Fort George. 
This was a very exciting expedition, and the boys 
were especially interested when they learned that, 


106 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


after the gate had been forced, Colonel Scott had 
hauled down the British flag with his own hands. 
They also learned how he had chased the British 
soldiers, and stopped only when he had been ordered 
to do so by his superior officers. In the capture of 
Fort George, which had occupied only three hours, 
the Americans had had only about forty killed and a 
hundred wounded, while the entire loss of the British 
was eight hundred and sixty-three. Quite a large 
quantity of stores was also gained by this capture. 

Quiet again had come to Sackett’s Harbor. Andrew 
was there now almost all the time, while David 
remained at home. Occasionally Andrew returned 
for a visit, and one evening about the middle of June, 
which he was spending with his family, was inter- 
rupted by Lieutenant Chauncey, w T ho had been search- 
ing unsuccessfully for him at Sackett’s Harbor. He 
told how Commodore Chauncey had ordered him to 
go on a cruise in the “ Lady of the Lake,” and look 
out for the English schooner “Lady Murray,” which 
was going from Kingston to Toronto, loaded with 
provisions, powder, and shot. They had a long talk, 
and when they returned to the house from the long 
walk which they had taken together down the road, 
Andrew’s wife met them at the door. She said noth- 
ing, but the anxious expression she had upon her face 
showed the fear which was in her heart. She was 
certain that these young men would not be talking 


AN ATTACK ON SACKRTT’S HARBOR 107 

so earnestly and for so long a time unless there was 
some serious business on hand. 

“ It’s nothing much,” said Andrew, replying to the 
question which her eyes indicated. “We’re only 
going on a little trip. We’ve got word of an English 
schooner that we think we can make a prize of. No, 
there won’t be any danger,” he added, “ for it’s not 
armed, and we shall be. Smith has brought word 
about it, and his information has a market value, you 
know.” 

“Smith! Smith!” repeated Andrew’s wife ; “it’s 
always Smith. You never have any trouble except 
when Smith is the cause of it ; but I wish you suc- 
cess,” she added, for she knew the determined look 
which Andrew showed upon his face was not eas% 
to be opposed. 

“ Is David going? ” asked his mother. 

“Yes, David is going,” replied Andrew; “and 
we’re all going over to Sackett’s Harbor to get ready 
to start to-night. There’ll be no danger, at least no 
great danger, in what we’re going to do ; but if we 
succeed in capturing that schooner, and I think we 
shall, it will be quite a feather in our caps.” 


108 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XII 

THE PRISONER’S STORY 

T\AVID enjoyed the prospect of going on the “ Lady 
^ of the Lake.” His natural preference was for 
the water rather than for the land ; and now that he had 
an opportunity of engaging in the more serious part 
of the war, and also sail in the fleet “ Lady of the 
Lake,” the promised voyage seemed to him only a 
pleasure. The schooner was one of the swiftest on 
the lake, and her crew, when she sailed, one of the 
most enthusiastic that ever started forth on an expe- 
dition. They were a jolly lot of men, and sang at 
their work, and constantly were playing their jokes 
on one another. 

Smith was there with them, of course, for it was 
he who had told of the “ Lady Murray ” and brought 
word of the expedition from Kingston to Toronto. 
Heretofore the information which he had brought 
had been always found reliable, and yet the place 
which he held down on the St. Lawrence, and the 
number of followers which he had, and the certainty 
that he would sell out to whichever side paid him 
more, made the men at times suspicious of him. 


THE PRISONER’S STORY 


109 


“ He seems to be loyal enough now,” said David 
to Andrew when they were well out on the lake. 

44 But I’m afraid of him,” replied Andrew. “ I’ve 
no doubt he’s told us the truth about the ‘ Lady Mur- 
ray,’ and yet I shouldn’t be at all surprised to find 
instead of a schooner loaded with provisions, that it 
was the 4 Earl of Moira ’ with a load of twenty-four 
guns. However, we’ll wait and see, and we won’t 
borrow any trouble before it comes.” 

The schooner kept out toward the open lake and 
cruised about for some time without any sign of 
the 44 Lady Murray ” appearing. The sailors were all 
anxious for the fight, and continually scanned the 
horizon, on the lookout for the approaching vessel. 
Several times their conversation turned upon Tom 
Garnet, whose sad life and sadder death we have 
already told in another story. Many were the 
incidents in Tom’s career which were brought out, 
and the expressions of affection for him on the part 
of all who knew him were marked. Several times 
the sailors tried to get David to tell of his own ex- 
periences on the St. Lawrence in the previous 
summer,' but the presence of Smith, whose face 
scowled at every mention of David’s escape from 
him, and the natural dislike which he had to tell 
of his own exploits, kept him from entering into many 
of the details. 

Early on the morning of the sixteenth of June there 


110 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


came a call of “ Sail ho ! ” from the masthead. At 
once great excitement prevailed on board. The eyes 
of all were turned in the direction indicated by the 
lookout, and the sail in the distance could be seen. 
The course was at once changed, and the “ Lady of the 
Lake ” began to follow the strange vessel. Not many 
minutes had passed before it was evident that she 
was gaining upon her, and when she ran in closer it 
became clear that the schooner they were pursuing 
was the one for which they were searching, the “ Lady 
Murray.” 

The deck was at once cleared for action, and David 
felt a strange excitement as he watched the gunner 
preparing for his work. How cool he seemed ! And 
how slow every one of his movements appeared to be ! 
He stopped to wipe the perspiration from his brow, 
and then, at last, when the word was given the great 
gun was fired. 

David could see in the distance where the ball 
struck the water and passed along its surface. It went 
directly across the bow of the “ Lady Murray,” and 
her progress was at once stopped. They watched 
her curiously, and could see her men as they were 
gathered about her deck or near the rail watching 
this schooner which had so suddenly brought her 
voyage to an end. David was selected as one of the 
men who were to board her, but the merchantman 
offered no opposition, and the “ Lady of the Lake ” 


THE PRISONER’S STORY 


111 


started at once for Sackett’s Harbor followed by her 
prize. 

There was great rejoicing on board, and the easy 
capture which had been made was looked upon as 
one that would be a source of profit to themselves as 
well as of credit to the navy. They were not molested 
on their way back, and when they had arrived at 
Sackett’s Harbor David was detailed as one of the 
men who were to conduct the prisoners they had 
taken to the barracks. 

David had noticed one of the prisoners, who was a 
young man about his own age, and several times had 
tried to enter into conversation with him. The lad 
seemed to be a proud-spirited fellow, however, and 
had resented all of David’s friendly overtures. It 
was only on a later visit which he made the next day 
that David could get him to enter into any conversa- 
tion with him, and then only because he had become 
convinced that the friendly expressions of his young 
captor were sincere. 

“ I’m glad we took you,” said David, “ though I’m 
sorry you had to get caught.” 

“ That’s all right,” said the prisoner ; “ we have to 
take our chances, though it does seem strange that 
when I lived right near Toronto and had a hand in that 
fight you Yankees brought on there, that I should 
have got out of that all free with never a bone broken 
nor a scratch on my body, and then that I should 


112 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


have been taken prisoner on this old coaster so soon 
after we had started out from Kingston.” 

“ Then you live near Toronto, do you ? ” said David. 
“ I had a part in that fight too. That was a great 
battle, at least for us. Was that explosion accidental, 
or was there a mine there ? ” 

“ There was no mine at all,” said the prisoner. “ It 
was all an accident. It hurt more of our men than 
it did of yours, I think.” 

“ My, but how it knocked things to pieces ! ” said 
David. “ It wounded and killed more than the bul- 
lets did.” 

“ Yes,” said the prisoner ; “ and it was a good thing 
that you Yankees decided to respect private property, 
too.” 

“ I know it,” said David. “ But why was it a good 
thing ? What do you mean ? ” 

“ Why, I mean that a good many of the Yankee 
soldiers were hurt so badly their own mothers wouldn’t 
have recognized them, and some of them are being 
cared for in those very houses they agreed to respect. 
If you had burned the town, your own men would 
have suffered more than ours.” 

“ Yes, that’s so,” said David slowly. Somehow he 
was thinking of his young friend Elijah Spicer, and 
wondering whether he could be one of those who 
were being cared for by some of the families at 
Toronto. 


THE PRISONER’S STORY 


113 


“ Yes,” continued the prisoner, “ there’s a man that 
lives right near my home who’s got a young Yankee 
in bed, and he’s had him ever since the fight. He’ll 
be apt to keep him for some time yet, I think.” 

“ In bed ? ” asked David. 

“ Yes ; he’s hurt, and he’s hurt badly, too. They 
were out on the battle-field some two or three hours 
after the fight looking for the body of another neigh- 
bor’s son. They found him too, but he was dead ; but 
while they were looking for him it seems they heard 
this fellow they’ve got there now groan, at least 
they thought they did ; but when they came back 
with their stretcher and tried to search him out, why, 
when they got him they couldn’t tell whether he was 
dead or alive. He’d stopped groaning then, and 
he lay just like a dead man. They didn’t know but 
he was dead, but finally they concluded to pick him 
up and carry him home and see whether there were 
any signs of life left in him or not.” 

David was beginning to feel interested, and he was 
thoughtful and silent for a time. 

“ What’s the matter ? ” said the prisoner, who had 
been showing a decidedly more friendly manner. 
“ What’s the matter ? Are you sorry to see a young 
fellow your own age prisoner? Well, you needn’t 
weep any tears or waste any sorrow over me ; I shall 
get out of this all right ; I always do. I don’t believe 
there is a man in the world who has better luck than 


114 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


I do, even when I’m taken prisoner. I’ll get ont of it 
all right, you see if I don’t.” 

“ It isn’t that,” said David. “ I’m thinking about 
this young fellow you’re telling me of over at To- 
ronto. Tell me all you know about him. Did you 
see him yourself?” 

“ Only once, so I don’t know much about him ; 
and as he can’t talk, of course he can’t tell us any- 
thing about himself.” 

“Was he about my size and age, do you think?” 
said David. 

“ I guess so,” replied the prisoner ; “ but he was in 
bed, and he lay there like a log, as I said. All he did 
was to moan a little and roll his head at times. I 
think he must have been struck on the head; at 
least, that’s what every one says that sees him.” 

“ Did he have brown hair ? ” 

“ I can’t tell you,” said the prisoner, wondering 
at David’s eagerness and at the questions he 
asked. “ You see they’ve had to shave his head, and 
I couldn’t tell anything about the color of his hair.” 

“ Well, did you see whether there was a scar over 
the left ear?” persisted David. 

“ No, I didn’t notice it,” said the prisoner ; “ I wasn’t 
minding him very particularly, anyway. You see I 
just went in one day, and Mrs. McGann and the girls 
asked me to look at the poor fellow ; so I just stepped 
inside the door and looked at him a minute and saw 


THE PRISONER’S STORY 


115 


how he was suffering, moaning most of the time, and 
never saying but one word over and over again.” 

“ What was that?” asked David. 

“ He kept saying 4 Dave ! Dave ! ’ I guess that 
must be his name, for that’s the only thing they’ve 
got by which to know who he is. But hold on ! 
Where’re you going ? ” he said in surprise. 

David, as soon as he heard the word which the 
prisoner said the young patient was constantly say- 
ing, had uttered an exclamation, and started to leave 
the barracks. 

“ Hold on ! Where are you going ? ” the prisoner 
called out again, but David had already disappeared 
and was beyond the sound of his voice. 


116 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XIII 

THE “CORPORAL” CHANGES MASTERS 

TV AVID had started directly for his home. He had 
^ been so surprised and excited by the words of 
the young prisoner that he acted upon his first im- 
pulse, and left him without waiting for any further 
information. Even the surprise which was mani- 
fested in the words which the prisoner shouted after 
him had no effect. 

In his own mind he was certain that the suffering 
patient at Toronto could be none other than his own 
lost companion. 

“It’s ’Lige, I know it is,” he kept repeating to 
himself as he went towards home, sometimes walking, 
but more frequently running, so eager was he to talk 
over his discovery with his friends. It was not often 
that David quickly arrived at his conclusions, but in 
this case he had acted as impetuously as Elijah ever 
had done. The mere fact that his friend had disap- 
peared and that no word from him had been received 
since the attack on Toronto he at once had joined to 
the story to which he had just listened, of the young 


THE “CORPORAL” CHANGES MASTERS 117 


soldier who was suffering in the home of an unknown 
man near the battle-field. All that he had to furnish 
the connecting link was the word “ Dave ! ” which he 
understood the sufferer was repeatedly muttering. 
Of course there were a great many Davids in the 
country, and he had no right to assume that he him- 
self was the particular one referred to in the uncon- 
scious moments by an unknown sufferer so far from 
his own home. 

When he entered his house and found no one 
there but his mother, he at once unfolded to her the 
discovery which he thought he had made. 

“ But I’m not so sure, David,” said his mother in 
her quiet manner, “ that this young man of whom 
you have heard is Elijah. I only hope it is, but you 
have no way of knowing, that I can see. 

“Oh! but I’m sure of it,” replied David. “You 
see, not a word has been heard from Elijah since the 
fight, and he wasn’t reported among the dead or the 
wounded. If he had been merely left behind, we 
should have had some word from him long before this, 
and this story which the prisoner has told me fits in 
exactly with all the circumstances, so that I’m just cer- 
tain that Elijah’s the one he’s been telling me about.” 

“ Perhaps you’d better go over and tell his father 
about it,” said Mrs. Field. “ That can do no harm, 
and it probably is the wisest thing to be done under 
the circumstances.” 


118 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ That’s just what I’m going to do,” said David, as 
he quickly took his hat and started for the barn for 
his horse. 

He found Mr. Spicer at home, and to him and his 
wife and Henry he hurriedly told his story. A 
great change had come over the Spicers’ home. The 
gloom which had followed the loss of Elijah had 
deepened every day, as the uncertainty as to his fate 
was even more wearing than the knowledge of his 
whereabouts, however sad, could possibly have been. 

A long conversation followed the announcement 
which David made, and many questions were asked ; 
and although Mr. Spicer and his wife did not feel 
the certainty which David manifested, they still 
grasped the hope which his words held forth and 
were eager to follow them up. 

“ I’m going over there,” said David. 

Mr. Spicer hesitated. “ I think the clew is worth 
following, David,” he said, 44 but I’m not at all certain 
that you ought to be the one to go. You are needed 
at home, and it doesn’t seem just right to send you 
into danger when it’s my own son you’re seeking.” 

“ That’s all right,” replied David ; 44 but I’d like to 
know what Elijah did when Andrew was lost ? One 
good turn deserves another, and I’m very certain that 
I can be spared from home better than you can.” 

44 1 never thought,” said Mr. Spicer sadly, 44 that 
those sad experiences you had, and in which I sympa- 


THE “CORPORAL” CHANGES MASTERS 119 


thized with you and tried to do all I could, would 
ever come to me. I think I know now a little more 
how you must have felt ; but never mind,” he quickly 
added, trying to comfort his wife, who had been weep- 
ing all through the conversation, “ this word which 
you have brought very likely furnishes a solution, 
and we’ll hope for the best anyway. Perhaps it will 
be wisest in view of all the circumstances for you to 
go instead of me ; but you must take Henry with 
you.” 

44 That’s just what I’ve been waiting for you to 
say,” said Henry eagerly. 44 If I could help get 
Andrew out of the Brock ville jail, I’m sure I ought 
to help now when my own brother is missing.” 

44 Have you arranged for a boat, or do you know 
where you can get one ? ” asked Mr. Spicer. 

44 I think so,” replied David. “ I’m going to see 
Major Forsythe and find out if he can’t get the 4 Cor- 
poral ’ for me. I’m most certain he can, and that’ll be 
just the boat for us this time of the year and with 
such weather as we are having now.” 

An interview with Major Forsythe quickly brought 
the permission to use the 44 Corporal,” and he highly 
approved of the expedition of his young friends ; and 
while he was not so confident as they of its outcome, 
he nevertheless thought it was well worth the trial. 

44 The Americans haven’t tried to hold Toronto 
since we captured it, and the British have again taken 


120 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


possession of the place, and I understand that they 
have quite large forces there now, so that you will 
have to be very careful or you will be taken prisoner 
yourselves.” 

“We shall try,” said David; “ and it isn’t starting 
out as if we had not ever had any experience in such 
trials before.” 

“You’ll have to be very careful, boys,” said the 
Major ; “ but you’re so young I think you won’t have 
much trouble in getting into and out of Toronto 
without arousing much suspicion ; but do you know 
where to go when you get there ? Did you get the 
directions from the prisoner you told me about?” 

“No,” replied David; “ and that’s a great note too, 
isn’t it ? I never thought a word about asking where 
the place was, nor whose house Elijah was staying in. 
Well, I’ll go right over and see him now.” 

“ That won’t do any good,” said the major quietly, 
“for the prisoners have all been sent on. We hadn’t 
any provisions here for them, and so we sent away 
every one of them last night.” 

“ W ell, I’m going to start just the same,” said 
David, “ for Toronto. It isn’t a very large place, and 
I know I can find out where Elijah is, if he’s 
there.” 

The boys started early the next morning. It was 
a beautiful day, and the sun beat upon the water with 
a burning heat. Still a little breeze was stirring, just 


THE “CORPORAL” CHANGES MASTERS 121 


enough to sweep the 44 Corporal ” on at a very moderate 
speed. Abundance of provisions had been placed on 
board, and arrangements made for an absence of a 
number of days. Neither of the boys felt like talk- 
ing very much, and they quietly watched the shore as 
it became fainter behind them when once they had 
started for the open lake. 

They sailed directly across the lake, and the breeze 
freshening as they went brought them in the after- 
noon close to the Canadian shore. They had decided 
to keep close in shore rather than to trust to a more 
direct course on the open lake. Both their mothers 
had urged this, knowing well, as did all the people who 
dwelt near the lakes, the danger that came from the 
sudden squalls that would sweep over its surface 
without giving any warning of their coming. When 
night came they anchored their boat and slept on 
board, not caring to sail on in the darkness and incur 
the risks to which an unknown region might expose 
them. Another day and night passed, and early on the 
morning of the third day, when they had just set sail 
and were near the shore, they were hailed by a man 
in a row-boat. 

At first they paid no attention to him, but when he 
hailed them again and again they decided to wait for 
him and learn if he had any special word to give 
them. Accordingly David brought the 44 Corporal ” 
about, and steering in the direction of the stranger 


122 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


soon came alongside. Without waiting for any 
communication the stranger quickly stepped on board 
of the “ Corporal,” keeping the painter of his row-boat 
in his hand, and at once entered into conversation 
with them. 

“ Go right ahead, boys ; don’t wait for me, for I can 
talk with you aboard just the same as I could if ye 
were ashore.” 

David started the “ Corporal ” on again, and in a 
moment turned to the stranger, wondering what he 
had to say to them, and who he could be. 

“I’m going alongshore a piece myself,” said the 
stranger, at once making himself at home, “and I 
can talk with ye just the same. Whar ye from ? ” 

“ Oh, back here a piece,” said David, who was not 
at all inclined to answer questions on that subject, 
and who, now that the stranger was on board and he 
had a good opportunity of observing his countenance, 
was becoming more and more suspicious of him. 

“You aren’t one of the Yanks, I see,” said the 
man. “We’re going to get them into a box pretty 
quick, and just as soon as we do we’ll clap the cover 
down. We know pretty well what they’re up to all 
the time.” 

“ How do you know?” said David quietly. 

“ Oh, there’s a man named Smith what’s got a 
gang of fellows that keeps everybody over here 
posted. He’s a shrewd one, Smith is, and the funni- 


THE “CORPORAL” CHANGES MASTERS 123 

est part of all is that he makes the Yankees think 
that he’s the best friend they’ve got in the world. 
They keep paying him for such stuff as he tells them, 
and never dream that he’s giving the other side just 
what they want to know all the time.” 

The boys glanced at each other in a manner which 
the stranger noticed, and a grin passed over his face. 
They then became silent, wondering how they could 
rid themselves of this talkative stranger, who made him- 
self so much at home on board their boat, and whose 
presence was really a source of alarm to both of them. 
He held his gun on his leg all the time, and more and 
more impressed the boys as being a dangerous char- 
acter. 

“ Yes,” resumed the stranger, “ Smith is a cute 
one, he is, and he’s a petic’lar friend of mine. 
Why, do you know the last time I saw him he told 
me that there were two boys coming over here in a 
little cat-rigged boat what was named the 4 Corporal.’ 
You hain’t seen nothin’ of her, have you? ” he added 
with a leer. 

Henry had become very pale at his words, and 
David, though quiet, was thoroughly frightened, but 
without raising his voice, and trying to conceal his 
fear, he very quietly said, “ Yes, I know her. This is 
the boat, and we’re all in her.” 

“What you coming over here for?” asked the 


man. 


124 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


David was silent again, and made no reply. 

41 1 don’t know but what she’s a pretty good boat. 
I guess I’ll have to take her.” And the stranger 
brought his gun into a position where he could 
readily use it if they threatened to make any oppo- 
sition. 

44 Yes,” he said, 44 you was foxy, but you can’t fool 
me ; and I don’t want you to try any of your tricks 
either,” he added in a more savage tone. 44 You just 
step aboard that skiff of yours and cast off, and I’ll 
take the tiller myself. Come, don’t be slow about 
it,” he added, as he saw David hesitate a moment. 

What was there that the boys could do ? Any oppo- 
sition on their part would at once make the stranger 
use his gun, which he held in a threatening manner 
all the time, and which they knew he would not hesi- 
tate to use if the occasion seemed to require it. 
David quickly made up his mind that any resistance 
would be worse than useless, and nodded his head to 
his young companion. 

44 What are you going to do with us ? ” said 
Henry. 

44 I’m going to cut you adrift in that skiff of yours. 
You can make that point over there,” he said, 
pointing to a promontory not far away ; 44 and if this 
’ere boat was bound for Toronto, I think I can take 
her on without any help from you. Come, cast 
off,” he said in an angry voice ; and obeying his word, 


THE “CORPORAL” CHANGES MASTERS 125 


the boys soon found themselves left far behind the 
“ Corporal,” and David picked up his oars and began to 
row for the point which the stranger had indicated. 
He was sadly disappointed. He did not know where 
he was nor what he could do, and he was thinking over 
possible plans he could make use of all the way to the 
shore, where he soon arrived, and both boys stepped 
out upon the beach. 


126 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XIV 

JOHN SMART’S MISTAKE 

TT7HEN John Smart and Peter Navarre crawled 
' " into the tree they at once became silent. In- 
tense silence seemed to be all about them. Occa- 
sionally they could hear the sound of some man or 
party passing them, but that was all. Once a party 
stopped near the tree, and the sound of their voices 
could be heard in the conversation which followed, 
although none of the words could be distinguished. 
The darkness was intense, and only by an occasional 
stretching forth of his hand and touching his body did 
John know that his companion was with him. There 
was not room enough to enable them to sit down, 
and the standing position which they were compelled 
to assume soon became very wearisome. John gave 
himself up entirely to Peter’s direction, as he had no 
word or suggestion of his own to make. He was 
not certain of his own ability to find his way there, 
especially in the darkness, and he had long known 
that Peter was one of Harrison’s most trusted scouts. 
Just how it was that he still retained the confidence 


JOHN SMART’S MISTAKE 


127 


of the British, he could not understand, although 
he recalled the fact that he had heard that Peter 
had led one of the British expeditions along the 
Maumee, but he also remembered how this had been 
spoken of by the Americans as one of the most shrewd 
of all his movements. 

The long night at last passed without a word hav- 
ing been spoken or a movement made by either. 
The faint streaks of light came through the opening 
at the base of the tree, and showed the escaping 
prisoners that morning had at last come, but it 
brought little relief in itself. They had had nothing 
to eat or drink, and the position in which they had 
stood had made their muscles stiff and tired, and yet 
they waited on through the day. Occasionally they 
dozed a little and tried to stretch their limbs, but it 
was only a slight relief which came to them. There 
was nothing for them to do but to wait, and this 
they did till the darkness was again approaching. 

Peter then whispered to his companion that he 
was going out to investigate and see if they could 
not now make their escape. As soon as he had 
learned whether the pursuit was still kept up 
or not he would return. It seemed to John that 
Peter was gone a long time before he returned, and 
he could hardly credit the statement his friend made 
that he had been gone from the tree only a little more 
than an hour. John was so hungry and thirsty now, 


128 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


and so nearly worn out by the cramped position 
which he had been compelled to hold for almost 
twenty-four hours, that he hailed the assurance that 
it would be safe now for them to leave their hiding- 
place with delight. John was a tough and hardy 
backwoodsman, but his endurance was as nothing 
compared with that of Peter. 

Peter reported that he was certain the scouts were 
still out, and he also was certain that the search had 
not been abandoned entirely; but upon John’s assur- 
ance that he was willing to make the attempt they 
both of them started forth. It was difficult for John 
to move when they first started, but anything seemed 
to him to be better than to wait longer in his cramped 
position in that hollow tree. How good it seemed 
to be free again ! Stiff and sore as he was, and worn 
by his long fast, it yet was such a relief to be free 
again that it was in good spirits he followed his 
friend. 

The sun had set, but the darkness had not yet 
come, and he had little difficulty in following the 
swift and silent lead of Peter. They made their 
way directly to the river, and its muddy water 
seemed to John to taste better than any he ever had 
drunk before; and as they turned into the forest 
again Peter called his attention to a bird which he 
saw on a branch of a tree, and John watched him as 
he took his bow and arrow, which he always carried 


JOHN SMART’S MISTAKE 


129 


in addition to his gun, and fixing the arrow to the 
string, with hardly a sound that could be heard 
brought the bird to the ground. 

They did not dare kindle a fire to cook their prize, 
and so they ate it raw. Tough as it was, it seemed 
to them like a dainty morsel, so hungry had they 
become in their long- continued fast. They at once 
resumed their journey, and, stopping occasionally for 
a little rest, pushed steadily on through the night, 
although John was certain when the sun rose that 
they had not placed a very great distance between 
them and their hiding-place. 

In the morning, just before it was light, they had 
halted, and Peter had left his friend to try to find 
something for them to eat. He soon returned with 
a bird which he had killed with his arrow, and they 
ventured to kindle a fire now, as it was so dark they 
thought a little smoke might possibly escape the at- 
tention at that time of the keen-scented Indians. 
As soon as their breakfast had been cooked they put 
out the fire and resumed their journey. 

Peter had told John that General Harrison was at 
Fort Meigs, and that was the place they both were 
seeking. Suddenly Peter stopped and motioned to 
his friend to become silent. John, quick-witted as 
he was, had seen nothing to alarm them, and he 
was surprised at this action of Peter’s. His friend 
whispered to him that he had seen some signs ahead 


130 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


which he did not like, but bidding John remain 
where he was, he went on alone to investigate. It 
seemed to John after some time that his friend had 
been gone a long time, and he began to fear that 
he had fallen into some trouble. Perhaps he even 
had been made a prisoner, and it might be that he 
needed help at that very moment; but at last he 
heard a sound which made him look forth from his 
place of concealment and he saw a man approach- 
ing. Satisfied that Peter at last had returned, he 
stepped forth to meet him, but it was a strange sight 
upon which his eyes fell. The man whom he had 
seen was in advance of a party, and behind him were 
a half-dozen white men and as many Indians. 

John, startled as he was, could not at first tell 
whether they were friends or foes. The question 
was soon settled for him, however, as the men ap- 
proached, and he recognized in their leader the 
captain who had made a prisoner of him before. 
He knew that escape was now impossible for him, 
and, with the best grace he could assume, he stepped 
forward to meet the approaching men. 

“ Then you thought you’d come back, did you ? ” 
said the captain good-naturedly. 

“No,” replied John, “I wanted to get away, but 
it seems my friends couldn’t bear to part with me. 
There’s nothing like being popular.” 

“ That’s so,” replied the captain. “ And your 


JOHN SMART’S MISTAKE 


131 


friends back here are so attached to you that they 
won’t be able to endure the thought of parting 
again/’ 

“ Where was Peter all this time ? ” A thought 
flashed in John’s mind that after all his companion 
might have betrayed him. He did not stop to con- 
sider this very long, however, and the recollection of 
the feeling which was manifested towards an In- 
dian who had been a friend of the whites in the 
North-west before ever he had started on his journey 
to Sackett’s Harbor came into his mind. He remem- 
bered how it had been the settled policy of the Amer- 
icans not to engage the Indians and foreigners in the 
war, but there were occasions when exceptions to 
this rule were made. There was a chief in Ohio, the 
son of Tecumseh’s sister, who had been captured 
when he was a boy by Gen. John Logan, of Ken- 
tucky, and he had taken that offlcer’s name. He was 
a great friend of Major Hardin and had great influ- 
ence with his own tribe. He had been very active 
as a scout, and had been used by both Hull and 
Harrison in that capacity. Soon after Tupper 
returned from the Rapids, Logan with some of his 
followers had been sent towards that post to recon- 
noitre. He started with a few friends, but they met 
a strong party of the enemy, and to save themselves 
scattered in every direction. Logan, with two of 
his friends, made their way to Winchester’s camp, and 


132 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


there they were charged with being spies. Logan was 
greatly hurt at this charge, and he and his companions 
quickly decided to vindicate themselves. He started 
out with his two friends for the Rapids, and they made 
up their minds that they would bring in a prisoner or a 
scalp. They had gone only a short distance when all 
three of them were made prisoners by a Potawatomie 
chief named Winnemeg and his followers. Winnemeg, 
though formerly a friend of the Americans, had now 
become an ally of the British, and he was a bitter 
enemy of Logan’s. Of course he rejoiced greatly at 
the capture of his enemy, but Logan made up his 
mind that he would try to escape. He used some 
signs which his friends understood, and when he 
gave the signal they made an attack together on their 
captors. Logan shot Winnemeg dead, and although 
he was badly wounded himself, as was also one of his 
friends who was named Bright Horn, they jumped 
upon the backs of the horses which their captors had 
there and got away, and finally reached Winchester’s 
camp. Captain John, the other friend of Logan’s, 
was so badly wounded, however, that he died, but not 
until after his honesty had been proved. Afterwards 
it was learned that General Proctor had offered a 
hundred and fifty dollars for his scalp, but Logan had 
the honor of being buried with his head-piece intact. 
This little story had flashed through the mind of John 
Smart when he was first taken prisoner, and found 


JOHN SMART’S MISTAKE 


133 


that he became a little suspicious of his companion, 
Peter Navarre. 

If some of the Indians could be trusted, surely a 
French Canadian might much more. Ashamed to 
have entertained a thought against Peter’s honor, he 
quickly decided that he must give up to his captors 
with as good a grace as possible, for resistance or 
attempted flight would be useless, and probably would 
cost him his life. 

His hands were quickly bound behind him, and he 
was placed in the midst of the company. He did not 
like the savage glances which the Indians kept cast- 
ing upon him, but he thought that he was safe in the 
captain’s protection ; and in this manner the company 
started, and without knowing whither he was going, 
or what was before him, John Smart was led away, 
a second time a prisoner of the British. 


134 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XV 

INTO FORT MEIGS 

TOHN SMART’S mind was soon put at rest so far 
** as his destination was concerned, for the entire 
party rapidly made their way back to the camp from 
which he had made his escape with Peter two days 
before. Soon he came within sight of the familiar 
place, and was taken directly to the tent where Heman 
was still a prisoner and thrown in by his side. The 
surprise of Heman at the return of his friend was 
very marked, and he could not understand at first 
what it all meant ; but in the conversation which 
followed, John told his friend the story of his escape 
and of the capture which had followed. 

“Was Peter captured again too ? ” asked Heman. 

“ No,” replied John, “ that’s the strange part of it; 
I can’t just understand what’s become of him. He 
must have been close by when I was taken prisoner, 
for he’d just gone a little while before to look about 
him, as he said he’d seen some signs that he didn’t 
like ; but I don’t believe he’s very far away.” 

“ He seemed to be in the good graces of the British,” 
said Heman suspiciously. 


INTO FORT MEIGS 


135 


“Yes, he was,” replied John. “ The British have 
used him, but not as much as he’s used them. He’s 
true blue, and I’ll vouch for Peter, and if he’s with 
the British it’s because he’s fooling them. They 
don’t know enough to know a friend from a foe.” 

“ There’s a man out near Sackett’s Harbor,” said 
Heman, “ that’s something that way, only he’s in the 
good graces of both sides, because he’ll sell out to 
the side that’ll pay him most. Sometimes that’s the 
British and sometimes it’s the American.” 

“ Oh, well, that isn’t the kind of a man Peter 
Navarre is,” said John, who was trying now to make 
up by the confidence of his speech for the momentary 
suspicion which had come to him when he had first 
been made a prisoner. “ You may find Peter some- 
times in one camp and sometimes in the other, but 
Peter Navarre is a straight friend of the Americans 
every day in the week.” 

“ Where’s he from ? Ohio ? ” asked Heman. 

“ No,” replied John. “ He’s a grandson of Robert 
Navarre, a French officer who came over to America 
in 1T45. His father settled at Detroit, and there 
Peter was born, though they afterward moved to the 
country at the mouth of the Maumee. You know 
that’s where Kantuckeegun, Pontiac’s widow, was 
living with her son Otussa. He and his brothers 
have been scouts all through the war. He doesn’t 
speak very good English, — very few of the French 


136 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


Canadians do, — but he can talk Injun a streak, and 
when he dresses up like one, as he does a good many 
times, you can hardly tell him from a red-skin.” 

Later in the day, as the evening drew on, some- 
thing was brought in for them to eat by a man who 
stood silently in the tent and watched them through 
the meal. Both Heman and John were so hungry 
that they had little to say till their meal was finished, 
and as they then looked towards the man who had 
brought them their food, as he was about to leave 
them Heman uttered a startled exclamation as he 
said, “That’s Peter! Why, that’s Peter Navarre !” 

John looked up in surprise, but as Peter — for it 
indeed was he — simply raised his hand in warning, 
he became silent again, and Peter at once left the 
tent. 

They were greatly puzzled to account for Peter’s 
presence, and a suspicion again entered John’s mind 
as to his loyalty, and he found himself trying to 
account for the fact that so soon after his own recap- 
ture Peter should be in the camp again and appar- 
ently on as good terms as ever with their captors. 
The next day Peter came again, but said not a word 
in their presence, repressing with a quick glance of 
his any disposition they had to question him. They 
were more puzzled still, and the situation in which 
they found themselves became more and more per- 
plexing. 


INTO FORT MEIGS 


137 


They were, however, kept very closely, and their 
hands were released only when they were eating and 
in Peter’s presence. He rebound their hands when- 
ever they finished their meal, and he started to leave 
the tent. John ventured to question him a little the 
next day, but not a word would Peter say ; but on 
the day following, in low tones he entered into a 
conversation with them, and explained to them why 
it was he had been so silent since John had been 
retaken. 

The British were not suspicious of him as yet, and 
he had been making the most of his opportunities in 
the camp for learning what they had on hand. He 
had information now which he must take to General 
Harrison at once, and which, in all probability, would 
compel him to leave the camp in a manner that 
would convince the British that he was an enemy 
and not a friend. He had grave questions as to 
whether he ought to take with him either or both of 
the prisoners, as their presence with him would in- 
crease the danger, and the fact of their escape would 
immediately lead to a pursuit. It was more than 
probable that he would avoid both of these if he left 
them in the camp and started alone for Harrison’s 
quarters at Fort Meigs. At Heman’s earnest solici- 
tation it was finally decided that he should be left in 
the camp and wait for the rescue which he was very 
certain Peter would be able to effect. He urged 


138 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


Peter, however, to take John with him, and then they 
both could urge the Americans to attempt a rescue 
of himself and the other prisoners the sooner. 

Peter told them that he was to be on guard at their 
tent that night, and that if they should escape, the 
British at once would be convinced that he was no 
longer a friend. Since this was so, he thought that 
he might as well take John with him as to leave him 
behind, and it was decided that the two should go if 
the way opened, and leave Heman behind. As soon 
as Peter left the tent John began to remonstrate with 
Heman, and to declare that either Heman should go 
with them or that he himself would remain. 

“ Now that’s fool talk,” said Heman. u If I go I’ll 
only increase the danger, and I should have hard 
work to keep up with two scouts, anyway. I’m 
in no danger here, and I know that General Harri- 
son will be on the move very soon. He isn't the 
kind of a man Hull was, and there won’t many weeks 
pass before he’ll make a move of some kind. I’m 
comfortable enough here, and I can wait till the 
Americans release me ; but you ought to go, and you 
cannot only help Peter, but you’ve got some in- 
formation Harrison ought to have, and you’ll be 
another man that he can count on, too.” It was in 
accordance with this plan that early that night Peter, 
who had been stationed as guard at the tent, took 
John and quietly left the camp. Not a word was 


INTO FORT MEIGS 


139 


brought to Heman of what success had attended 
their efforts to escape, and not a reply could he gain 
to any of the questions he put to the new guard 
who was stationed at his tent. The days passed on 
and the camp remained much the same, at least so 
far as Heman could perceive. It would have cheered 
his heart if he could have known how rapidly and 
successfully Peter and John made their way through 
the British guards and escaped from the enemy’s 
regions. 

General Proctor had men who rallied many of the 
savages at his call, and, delighted at the response 
he had met, he became more boastful than ever. On 
the twenty-third of April, his army, consisting of 
about twenty-five hundred, of whom about fifteen 
hundred were Indians, was assembled, and on the 
twenty-sixth appeared at the mouth of the Maumee 
about twelve miles below Fort Meigs. On the 
twenty-eighth they established their camp on the 
left bank of the river, near old Fort Miami. From 
this place the General and Tecumseh were starting 
forth one day when they were seen by Peter and 
John, who were making their way to General Har- 
rison’s quarters. They had fallen in with Captain 
Hamilton and a few of his men whom General 
Harrison had sent out to see what was going on in 
the region round about. Hamilton sent the two 
men quickly to General Harrison to report that 


140 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


a large body of the British and Indians were ap- 
proaching and evidently. were about to attack Fort 
Meigs. General Harrison had only about eleven hun- 
dred men in the fort, but he had no thought of giving 
up even though the attacking party more than doubled 
his own numbers. He sent scouts in every direction 
to summon aid from the other American generals, 
and then made an address to his own soldiers. 

“ Can the breast of an American soldier,” said he, 
pointing across the river to the camp which the 
enemy had made, “ when he casts his eye to the 
opposite shore, the scene of his country’s triumphs 
over the same foe, be influenced by any other feeling 
than the hope of glory ? To your posts then, fellow- 
citizens, and remember that the eyes of your country 
are upon you.” 

The announcement which Peter had brought into 
Fort Meigs, that the British were approaching and 
were preparing to make an attack upon the little band 
that was there, produced the greatest excitement in 
the camp. Some were afraid, others were eager for 
an engagement, but all were determined to fight to 
the end. 

The British had been building two batteries that 
would enable them to fire right down into the camp, 
and General Harrison at once began the construction 
of a wall of earth on the most elevated ground 
through the middle of the camp. 


INTO FORT MEIGS 


141 


This was twelve feet high and about three hun- 
dred yards long, but he had deceived the enemy com- 
pletely, for during its construction he had had the 
tents placed in front of it, and they had concealed 
the men when they were at work. 

When the British opened fire on the morning of 
the thirtieth, General Harrison removed the tents, 
and the British engineer found that his labor had 
been for nothing. General Proctor had been boast- 
ing that he would smoke out the Yankees, hut all he 
gained there was their cheers and jeers at his 
weakness. But soon there came a report that the 
British had sent a large body of white men and 
Indians under the dreaded Tecumseh across the 
river, and were preparing to attack the fort from the 
rear. When night came the batteries were all silent ; 
but all the Americans were fearful of what might 
befall them before the morning came. 


142 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XYI 


GOOSE BAY 


NDREW FIELD was a busy man during all 



these days. The quickness with which he had 
grasped his instructions, and the ease with which he 
had learned all the details of the military life, brought 
him into high favor with the men who were in com- 
mand at Sackett’s Harbor. The willing spirit also 
which he manifested, and his desire to do everything 
that lay within his power, added to this kind feel- 
ing for him. 

He was given the duty of drilling the raw recruits, 
and several hours each day he spent in trying to 
initiate into the mysteries of military dicipline the 
men who were fresh from the plough, and who knew 
much more about wielding the axe than they did 
about carrying a gun. New recruits were received 
every day, and Andrew found but little time in which 
to visit his home or to relieve the monotony of the 
life of which many complained at the headquarters. 

The anxiety about Elijah’s disappearance had been 
increased by the continued absence of David and Henry. 


GOOSE BAY 


143 


As the days passed a feeling of gloom settled over 
both of the families. Had the two boys who had 
gone in search of their lost friend on such a slight 
clew as the words of a prisoner, himself a stranger 
to them all, been lost as well as Elijah? Again 
and again the question arose as to whether they had 
not been lost in the lake. Perhaps they had been 
taken prisoner by some fleet of the enemy, and it 
might be possible that they had been sent on to 
Montreal. 

They all had confidence in the judgment and cool- 
ness of David, and felt certain that he would in- 
cur no unnecessary risks ; and yet with the passing 
of the days a feeling of uncertainty took possession 
of those at home, in which feeling, however, Andrew 
did not fully share. 

He was so busy during the days in his duties of 
drilling the new men, and so strong was his confi- 
dence in his younger brother, that he was the one 
who was constantly called upon to cheer the others ; 
and yet as the time passed he could not conceal from 
himself that he was becoming more and more anxious 
about his young companions. 

Early in July, however, his attention was drawn 
from his troubles by a report which had come that 
a certain expedition was about to be fitted out 
from Kingston and was to make Sackett’s Harbor 
its destination, and the firing of the ship “Pike,” 


144 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


which was then upon the stocks unfinished, and 
the burning of the stores at Sackett’s Harbor its 
object. 

No one could tell just how or where this report 
originated, and yet there seemed to be a feeling of 
fear that something unexpected was about to happen. 
Perhaps the uncertainty of the leaders was in part 
the cause of this ; or the attack which had already 
been made upon Sackett’s Harbor, although it had 
done no great damage except to bring about the loss 
of their stores by fire, had made all afraid that another 
expedition also would be planned. 

It was because of this fear that Andrew had been 
called from his duties of drilling the men, and with 
three or four others was sent to cruise about Point 
Peninsula and be on the watch for any strange 
vessels. 

One morning when they started from Sackett’s 
Harbor to engage in their daily watch, as they neared 
the Point they saw a man signalling them from the 
shore. They obeyed the summons, and were surprised 
when they received the stranger on board to find 
that it was the omnipresent Smith. He had barely 
taken his seat before he urged Andrew to return to 
Sackett’s Harbor with all speed. 

“I have just come,” said he, “with an expedition 
which has been fitted out at Kingston and which 
means mischief for you people at Sackett’s Harbor. 


GOOSE BAY 


145 


They’re going to burn the ‘ Pike ’ and set fire to your 
stores. They’ve just landed here at Point Peninsula 
and have hidden their boats in the bushes. They’re 
waiting for just the right time and then they’re going 
to move on you.” 

Andrew needed no second bidding, and the little 
boat fairly flew over the waters of the lake, and soon 
the party were at headquarters and had told the story 
which Smith brought. 

The commanders were men of decision, and at once 
sent a force to cut off this detachment of the British, 
but they arrived at the Point only in time to see the 
last boat disappearing. Evidently the enemy had 
been frightened off by the desertion of Smith, and 
did not care to meet again the soldiers of Sackett’s 
Harbor, who had given them so warm a reception on 
their previous expedition. 

This threatened attack served to arouse the gar- 
rison, and new plans were at once formed for getting 
the better of the active enemy. 

Less than two weeks later a private armed boat 
named the “ Neptune ” was fitted out by Capt. 
Samuel Dixon, and was manned by twenty-four vol- 
unteers, among whom was Andrew Field. This boat 
mounted one six-pounder and one swivel. A com- 
panion boat under Captain Dimock was also fitted 
out, and manned with twenty-one men who were 
drawn from the twenty-first regular infantry, and 


146 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


both boats started for a cruise on the St. Lawrence. 
They touched at Cape Vincent and then sailed on 
down the river, and found a quiet little nook where 
they landed for muster and review. 

The morning was delightfully pleasant, and the 
men enjoyed themselves by taking a dip in the river 
and by putting in complete order their arms and 
ammunition. At nine o’clock that night they hauled 
out from the shore, and manning a guard-boat to pre- 
vent surprise, they sent a man down to Ogdensburg 
for information, but late in the afternoon of the next 
day a couple of men arrived with the very news they 
were seeking. 

They soon left Cranberry Creek, and at four o’clock 
the next morning they saw a brigade of British 
bateaux under the protection of a gunboat named 
44 Spit Fire ” just ready to sail from Simmond’s Land- 
ing for Kingston. 

They made a rush for the shore, and so completely 
surprised the British that they captured the entire 
fifteen bateaux and the gunboat, without a shot 
being fired on either side, and but very few of the 
enemy escaped. 

By nine o’clock that morning they were again at 
Cranberry Creek, and before noon had sent off the 
sixty-nine prisoners they had taken under a guard of 
fifteen men for Sackett’s Harbor. The 44 Spit Fire ” 
was armed with a twelve-pound carronade, and had a 


GOOSE BAY 


147 


large quantity of military stores on board. The 
bateaux had a number of barrels of pork and bags 
of pilot bread, and these were landed to prevent their 
spoiling, and a request was sent out among all the 
people who were living near by for help, and a few of 
these came in, but only remained for a few hours. 

At sunrise the next day they were surprised to 
find that two hundred and fifty of the British, with 
four gunboats and one or two transports, were in the 
creek. A detachment of thirty men attacked them 
while they were landing, and others were stationed 
at different places to prevent their approach. The 
cannonade was kept up for some time, and a couple 
of the British boats were so injured that their crews 
were compelled to leave them. It was not long 
before the British retired to their boats, and at the 
same time sent a flag demanding the surrender of the 
Americans, as they said, to “ save the effusion of blood.” 
This demand was at once refused, as it was supposed 
that all that was intended by it was to gain time, 
and the firing commenced again. The British soon 
retreated, carrying their dead and wounded with 
them. 

Andrew Field with others was at once set to work 
felling trees across the creek so as to prevent a new 
attack, and as re enforcements soon came, the stores 
which had been captured were placed on board the 
bateaux again, and were started for Sackett’s Harbor. 


148 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


Most of the soldiers started overland, but Andrew 
was left with a small detachment to follow later, 
and to observe and report as to the doings of the 
enemy. 

It was a great disappointment to the Americans 
when they afterwards learned that the little fleet on its 
way encountered the “ Earl of Moira,” and had been 
pursued and struck several times by her shot, and 
that the gunboat and several of the bateaux were 
sunk, and the most that had been gained by the ex- 
pedition was consequently lost. 

Andrew Field remained at Goose Bay, into which 
Cranberry Creek flowed, for a few days, and then 
hearing nothing of interest he started overland, with 
his men. He made the acquaintance while he was 
there of the man David and Elijah had met on their 
expedition which we have related in the “ Boy Sol- 
diers of 1812.” From him he learned something of the 
deeds of Smith and his men at their headquarters on 
their island in the river. 

He was more puzzled than ever to understand what 
this strange man was doing ; but he became convinced 
that while he appeared to be so friendly to the 
Americans’ cause, in reality he was not a true friend, 
but only served their side when it appeared to be to 
his advantage to do so, and that he was engaged in 
the war for such benefits as he could gain for him- 
self and his followers. 


GOOSE BAY 


149 


But Andrew had no time in which to make further 
investigations for himself, even if he had had a force 
sufficient to enable him to do so, and very soon he 
gathered his men together and they started on their 
march across the country towards Sackett’s Harbor. 


150 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XVII 

CAPTAIN HOOVER’S STORY 

rjIHE country bordering on the Indian River was 
early marked by the settlers as specially desira- 
ble. Large tracts of this land came into possession 
of a few individuals, and among the largest land- 
owners was a Frenchman named Le Ray. For forty- 
six thousand dollars he became possessor of two hun- 
dred and twenty thousand acres, and on his land 
many of the French had settled whom political and 
religious troubles had driven from their homes. 

Some of the settlers also came from New England 
and some from the South. They were a hardy body of 
men, upright, energetic, strong, and active, and yet 
at the time of our story this country was still almost 
a wilderness. As Andrew and his men marched 
through this region they came to a little place on the 
Indian River named High Falls, where Le Ray had 
built a saw-mill, and for two years before the war 
this mill had been running day and night, and had 
been sending down the St. Lawrence to Ogdensburg 
large quantities of lumber ; but the war had largely 


CAPTAIN HOOVER’S STORY 151 

checked this prosperity, and business had to be 
neglected for fighting. 

The country was an intensely patriotic one, and 
the few men who were there had abandoned the 
lumbering and farming for the battle-field. Near this 
mill the fertile soil was such natural grass-land that 
Le Ray had seeded the region, and had stationed 
Capt. John Hoover and a man named John Evans 
in charge of the clearing. 

The hazard of their vigil was equal only to its 
loneliness. Their nearest neighbors on one side were 
seven miles away, and the nearest family on the other 
side was almost nine miles distant. They cooked 
their own food, and each took his own turn in watch- 
ing. They lived an out-door life, and the constant 
danger from Indians and the British had made them 
always watchful. 

They had built a strong block-house of logs, in 
which they had stored all their wheat, and which 
they had rendered able to withstand a siege. When 
the summons from Goose Bay had been sent 
through all this country for men to come to the 
assistance of the Americans, Captain Hoover had 
heeded the call, and, leaving his solitary companion, 
had gathered a few men, and gone to take his part in 
that fight. The Captain had been one of the bravest 
of all the men in the engagement, and it was at his 
suggestion that the trees had been felled across the 


152 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


creek to intercept the British when they had been 
decoyed up its winding waters. 

The Captain, however, as soon as the engagement 
had been finished, had joined the men who were 
escorting the prisoners, and had returned to his 
guard at High Falls. The surprise of his man, 
John Evans, at his return, was only equal to his 
delight when he saw the column of British prisoners 
marched past his house. They resumed their vigil, 
and varied the monotony of the day by hunting, 
and at night each took his turn at watching. In 
this way several days had passed, and when Andrew 
Field, with his detachment, arrived at High Falls, 
he found the Captain busily at work, and rejoiced 
at his coming. 

“ There’re a good many reasons why I’m glad to 
see you, Corporal,” said Captain Hoover. 

“ I can’t stay very long, though, as I want to get 
my men through the woods as soon as I can,” replied 
Andrew. 

“Well, you can stay long enough to come out 
here and see what I’ve got to show you,” replied the 
Captain, and he led the way to a large corn-crib which 
stood in the centre of the clearing, and opening the 
door disclosed to the astonished Andrew five men 
within, each of whom had on the uniform of the 
British soldier. 

“Where in the world did these men come from?” 


CAPTAIN HOOVER’S STORY 153 

said Andrew in surprise. “What? Are they pris- 
oners?” 

“ That’s what they are,” replied the Captain with a 
laugh, “and I took them all alone. I took them 
with my little gun, as George Washington said he 
cut down the cherry-tree with his little hatchet. I’ll 
tell you about it,” he continued, as he saw how puz- 
zled Andrew was. “ It was in this way. Day before 
yesterday in the afternoon I’d taken my gun and gone 
out into the woods hoping I’d get a squirrel or two, or 
something that we could cook for supper. I’d had 
pretty good luck and had got about all I wanted, and 
had just started to come back to camp, when I thought 
I heard guns over in the forest. I didn’t much like 
the sound of it, but I thought I’d just wait a while 
and see what came up. I hung around the woods 
all the rest of the day, but nary a sound did I hear, 
and yet I was so skeery and I was so sure ’twas guns I’d 
heard that I kept on my guard all the time. Yesterday 
I didn’t go hunting, but I stayed round the clearing 
all day, and John and I looked to our defences, and 
made up our minds that if we were attacked we’d 
stand something of a siege. You see so many of 
the British have been all through this part of the 
country this summer that I didn’t know but they’d 
be making a drive at us. You see we’ve got four 
hundred and fifty sheep and sixty cattle and twenty 
horses here, and ’twould be worth their while to pick 


154 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


them up if they could ; but when the cows were 
driven into their pen last night I counted, and three 
of them were missing, so out into the woods I went, 
and started to look for the missing stock. 

“ I looked all around for an hour, but I couldn’t 
hear a sound of the bell which one of them wore 
round her neck, nor a trace of them could I find. 
Finally, just as it was beginning to get dark, I 
thought I saw ahead of me something that looked 
like cattle. At any rate, I saw something moving 
behind the bushes, so I pushed on to see what it 
was. I stepped as carefully as I could, for I weren’t 
sure whether it was two-legged cattle or not, and 
when I got pretty near and pushed the bushes aside, 
what do you suppose I saw ? 

“ Instead of my cattle, I saw five soldiers all 
dressed in the British uniform sitting together on the 
ground. I was so surprised that I almost spoke 
right out ; but I got my wits together pretty quick 
and stepped back a little, and as soon as I found, too, 
that I hadn’t been seen myself, I just made up my 
mind that I’d stay there and watch those fellows. 
I couldn’t catch all the words they said, for they 
talked in pretty low tones, but I heard enough 
pretty quick to show me that they’d been in that 
fight over at Goose Bay, and I made up my mind 
that they’d either run away from the battle and got 
lost in the woods, or else that they were prisoners 


CAPTAIN HOOVER’S STORY 


155 


that had broken away from the men that were taking 
them over to Sackett’s Harbor. 

“ Yon know I never thought that guard of fifteen 
men was quite large enough anyway. It didn’t 
make me feel any easier when I heard my own 
name mentioned several times, for that made me 
think that perhaps they’d come around here spying 
out my possessions and trying to sneak off with my 
stock. Somehow I forgot all about my cows that 
had wandered off, for I had something else to look 
out for then, especially when all of a sudden all 
five of them jumped to their feet and started, as it 
seemed to me, straight for my clearing. 

“ I didn’t know just what to do. I thought at first 
I’d try a shot at them. It might scare them off, if 
nothing else. It was something of a choice between 
their coming over and trying to shoot at John and 
me before we could get a try at them, or my shooting 
first and perhaps scaring them off. 

“ Half a dozen times I brought my gun to my 
shoulder as I followed them through the woods, but 
each time I gave up and just watched and followed 
them. It was almost dark when they came to the 
clearing, and then I tell you I just watched with all 
my eyes to see what would come next. They 
stopped a little while just beside the edge of the forest 
and talked for a spell. I couldn’t make out anything 
they said, but pretty quick I saw them begin to creep 


156 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


stealthily-like towards one of the barns, and then 
they opened the door and every one of them went in- 
side. It kept getting darker all the while, but I 
stayed right there all the time with my eyes on the 
door, just waiting to see what they intended to do. I 
guess I must have been there more than an hour, and 
then I made up my mind that those fellows were 
going to pass the night there. 

“ I didn’t think from their actions they were going 
to make any attack, for I didn’t believe from what I’d 
heard that they knew that there were only two of us 
here, so I went back to the house and found John 
asleep on the floor. I got hold of him, and I thought 
I’d never wake him up, but at last when I said to him, 

‘ John ! John ! The British soldiers are right here ! ’ 
I tell you then his eyes flew open like saucers. 

“‘What! What!’ said John. 

“‘Yes,’ said I, ‘I’ve been watching five of them 
out in the clearing since five o’clock.’ 

“ ‘ Where are they now?’ said John. 

“ ‘ Oh, they’re out in the sheep barn,’ said I. 

“ John was wide awake by this time, and he wanted 
to know what I thought they were after. I told him 
I didn’t know, though I was afraid they were after 
us. You know two men make a small guard for all the 
cattle and sheep we have got here, and if they should 
happen to know how weak we were they’d make short 
work of us and our stock too. We sat there a long 


CAPTAIN HOOVER’S STORY 


157 


time without saying much, and finally I jumped up 
struck all in a heap with an idea I’d had, and when I 
told John what my plan was for making prisoners of 
all five of those Britishers, he was as tickled as I 
was. 

44 4 That’ll do, that’ll do,’ he said, ‘ it’s worth try- 
ing, anyway ; ’ but he thought we’d better make 
our quarters in the block-house for the night, and I 
thought ’twas a pretty good suggestion too ; so we 
just went out there and spent the night, though I 
didn’t sleep any, and John declares he didn’t, but 
if he could have heard himself snore, as I heard him, 
I think he’d have thought he was asleep, or something 
very much like it. 

44 1 didn’t stay in the house all night, but went out 
and hid behind the trees and kept my eyes on the 
sheep barn. I was back and forth, and when it got 
to be about an hour before sunrise, I went back to 
the block-house and told John it was time for him to 
come out too. I had a uniform, which I put on him, 
and gave him a gun, and put him out in the clearing 
in plain sight, and had him begin to march up and 
down the clearing. They could see him from the barn 
the first thing if they should look out. 

44 You see he was a-marching there just as if he was 
a sentry on duty, and he hadn’t been there more 
than ten minutes before, in the light that was becom- 
ing stronger every minute, he saw the five men come 


158 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


out of the barn and stand there together talking. 
Just the minute he’d seen ’em he’d stepped back 
out of sight and told me about it, for I was there 
waiting, too, on the other side. 

“ I knew my time had come now, but I couldn’t tell, 
of course, whether the plan would work or not. 
’Twas a sort of life and death matter, you see ; but I 
didn’t stop long to think about that, and just as the 
soldiers turned the corner of the barn I stepped right 
out in sight of them, and they stopped stock-still. I 
raised my gun to my shoulder and called out, just as 
if I was a picket, 4 Who goes there ? ’ They didn’t 
know how my knees were shaking. You know my 
life and John’s, as well as the possessions of Le Ray, 
was just staked on their answer ; but just then one of 
them called out that they were friends. 

‘“Well, advance, friends, and give the counter- 
sign,’ I said; and then they all waited a minute, 
and I didn’t know whether they were going to make 
a break of it or start for me. 

“ But the minute I saw them hesitate a little, I 
said, 4 Hold up your arms.’ A part of my trick was to 
have some guns pointed through the bushes — you 
see we had a dozen or more of them — and John had 
fixed them in the bushes in such a way that looking 
at them from the barn any one couldn’t tell but that 
there was a man kneeling behind every one of them. 
I kindly called their attention to the guns as I called 



“ Advance, friends, and give the countersign ” Page. 158. 




CAPTAIN HOOVER’S STORY 


159 


out to them to advance and lay down their arms. 
They did it pretty quick too, T tell you, and one 
of them said, ‘ Can’t you protect us ? ’ 

“ 4 1 guess so,’ I said, as I shouted to John, who 
was behind the hushes, not to let any of his men fire 
if they came along peaceably, but if they didn’t, to let 
them have it. Then I turned to the Britishers and 
drove them on before me, after they laid down their 
guns, and told them how they’d have to be pretty 
careful, as some friends of the three men who got 
shot at Goose Bay had -vowed they’d shoot the first 
British soldier they saw. 4 Still, I think I can pro- 
tect you,’ I said, as I drove them straight to the corn- 
crib, and after they’d once got inside, I fastened the 
door ; then I heaved a big sigh of relief, and John 
was just tickled to pieces. 

44 ‘ I tell you you’re the man to make a plan, Cap- 
tain,’ said he ; and I did feel pretty good after the 
way things had turned out, too.” 

44 Well, you have good reason to,” said Andrew, 
who had been an interested listener to the story 
which Captain Hoover had told him. 44 But what 
are you going to do with them now? ” 

44 1 want to send them over to Sackett’s,” replied 
the Captain. 44 That’s where you’re going, isn’t it ? ” 
44 Yes, and I’m going to start right away,” said 
Andrew. 

“Then I’ll put them in your charge,” said the 


160 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


Captain, and in a little while Andrew’s detach- 
ment, with the five prisoners in charge, resumed 
their march towards Sackett’s Harbor. When they 
told the prisoners of the manner in which they had 
been captured, at first they were very much cha- 
grined, but soon they decided to make the best of 
it, and joined in praising the Yankee’s shrewdness, 
which had so neatly made prisoners of all five of 
them. 


FRIENDS IN NEED 


161 


CHAPTER XVIII 

FRIENDS IN NEED 

TT7HEN David and Henry found themselves landed 
" * upon the Canadian shore and saw the u Corporal ” 
sailing away in the distance they were sadly per- 
plexed and they knew not what to do. The “ Corporal ” 
was rapidly disappearing before the strong breeze 
which was blowing, and as if to mock them the man 
that had taken it from them turned towards them and 
waved his hand and shouted a mocking farewell. 

They said nothing until the little boat had become 
a mere speck in the distance, and then David roused 
himself to comfort his friend and to decide what was 
best for them to do. As they looked up the road 
which ran by the side of the lake shore they saw a 
man approaching in the distance, and they decided to 
wait for him. When he drew near he stopped his horse 
at David’s call and listened to the questions which 
they put to him. 

“ How far is it to Toronto?” asked David. 

“ Toronto ? ” replied the stranger. “ Why, that’s a 
good fifty miles from here.” 


162 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ Is there a good road all the way ? ” asked David. 

“Well, I can’t just say,” replied the man. “I 
always go by boat when I go. What are you 
youngsters doing here?” 

“ Oh, we’re just waiting now,” replied David as he 
thanked the man for the information he had given them. 
He at once whipped up his horse and soon disap- 
peared from sight. The boys then sat down by the 
roadside to talk over their plans. What was it they 
could do ? They had no boat, and the journey to 
Toronto by land would be filled with danger, and yet 
to return home seemed at present to be an utter im- 
possibility. David felt the full responsibility which 
rested upon him. He first of all tried to cheer Henry, 
who was very much discouraged at the misfortune 
which had overtaken them. 

“ Never mind, Henry,” said David, trying to speak 
cheerfully, “we’ll find our way out of this trouble. 
There never’s a way into trouble without there being 
a way out too.” 

“Well, we’ve found the way in,” replied Henry, 
“ but I don’t see any way out.” 

“ That’s what we’ve got to find,” said David, “ and 
we’ll find it pretty soon too.” 

“ I wish we could use that boat,” said Henry, point- 
ing to a little sloop, only a little larger than the 
“ Corporal,” which was anchored not far from the 
shore. 


FRIENDS IN NEED 


163 


“Well, we can’t,” replied David; “ and the thing 
we’ve got to settle now first of all is whether we’ll 
go on to Toronto, or try to make our way back home 
some way. I should say, go on to Toronto by all means, 
if I felt perfectly sure that Elijah was there. You see 
we’ve nothing but the story that prisoner told us, and 
’twas worth making a trial of when we had a boat, 
but now that we haven’t any boat it may be only 
running into unnecessary danger to follow up an un- 
certainty like this.” 

“ Well, I don’t want to give up now,” said Henry, 
whose courage had been returning while David had 
been speaking. “ I got along at Brockville all right, 
and I think we’d better go on now. We can make it 
in three days on foot, and if there’s anything about 
Elijah to be learned I want to know it. You mustn’t 
give up now, Dave. You know I didn’t when Andrew 
got into a scrape.” 

“ That’s what you didn’t,” replied David, half 
ashamed of himself for the thought of giving up the 
search, “ and I shan’t desert you now either. We’ll 
push on and see what we can find out, anyway.” 

“ There come two men down to the shore,” said 
Henry, “ and they act as if they were coming right 
here too. Now, you do all the talking, and maybe 
we can learn some things from them.” 

The two men to whom Henry had called David’s 
attention were walking, and evidently had been run- 


164 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


ning ; their faces were flushed and wet with perspi- 
ration. 

“ Have either of you young fellows seen anything 
of a man around here ? ” called out one of them as 
soon as he saw the boys. 

“ What kind of a man ? ” replied David. “ We’ve 
seen two.” 

44 Why, the man we mean had a scar on his left 
cheek, and was a great, big, burly fellow.” 

44 Yes, we’ve seen him,” said David eagerly — “seen 
him to our sorrow.” 

44 What do you mean ? ” said the man. 

44 Why, he’s taken our boat away from us,” replied 
David. 44 He drove us out of our boat at the point 
of a gun and sailed away with it for Toronto. That’s 
where we were going, but he’ll get there before we do 
now, and I’m afraid we’ll never see our boat again.” 

84 Then he’s been playing the same trick on you 
that he did on us,” replied the man. 44 He’s a great 
traitor, that fellow is, and a thief, besides. We 
thought we’d got him penned, but he slipped away 
from us, and it looks a little now as if he’d get away 
from us altogether. You can’t hold him any more 
than you can hold a greased pole.” 

44 Let’s take our boat and start for Toronto,” said 
the other man ; 44 he probably will get there before we 
can, but we may be able to run across him there, and 
if we once do, we’ll make things lively for him.” 


FRIENDS IN NEED 


165 


“ Will you take us with you ? ” said David eagerly. 
“ That’s where we started for when he took our boat 
away from us.” 

The men hesitated a moment, but one of them 
soon said, “Well, we might as well take the young- 
sters ; they’ll add to our load, but we can throw out 
some of the ballast; we’ll have to get the boat ready 
right away. I’ll do that,” continued the speaker, “ and 
you go up to your house and get something for us 
to eat on the way, and we’ll be ready to start by 
the time you get back. The boys will help me, I 
know.” 

“ Yes, and be glad to,” said David, throwing off his 
coat, an example which Henry quickly followed, be- 
ginning to work at once. 

In a short time the boat was ready for sailing, and 
the man had returned with provisions that would be 
sufficient for the party for two days. The boat was 
headed for the open lake, and soon the spirits of the 
boys revived under the hope of making their jour- 
ney’s end after all. 

“ We’re beginning to find our way out of as well as 
our way into trouble, you see,” said David to Henry. 

“That’s so,” replied Henry; “and I hope we’ll 
have better luck now, all the way through.” 

The men were cordial and soon entered into con- 
versation with their young companions. They told 
of some of the doings of this man they were seeking, 


166 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


and from what they said David soon concluded 
that he must be a friend of Smith’s ; and when he 
turned the conversation upon him, he found that he 
was well known all along the Canadian border, and 
held in much the same regard there as he was on the 
American shore. 

“ This fellow is everything that’s bad,” said one of 
the men ; “ and the only reason he isn’t as dangerous 
as Smith is because he isn’t smart enough to fool the 
Yankees as well as he can. But what are you boys 
going to Toronto for ? ” he suddenly asked. 

David hesitated a minute as he caught Henry’s 
troubled expression, and then said, “ We’re going 
there to see a friend.” This seemed to satisfy the 
men, although David could not have told, if they had 
been asked, what they would do if once they were 
fortunate enough to arrive at the place they were 
seeking. 

The men were pleasant companions and seemed to 
have no suspicion that the boys were not Canadians. 
The chief topic of conversation was the war, and the 
boys learned many things from their words about the 
condition of affairs on the Canadian side. They had 
some difficulty in concealing their joy when they 
learned of the failure of the expedition which had 
started from Kingston, soon after they themselves 
had left home, with the object of burning the ship 
and stores at Sackett’s Harbor. 


FRIENDS IN NEED 


167 


44 If they’d asked us where we were from,” said 
Henry in a low tone of voice to David, 44 they’d have 
had us sure.” 

David laughed and said, 44 1 think they’re satisfied 
with us, and we’ll surely go on to Toronto all 
right.” 

The men shared their meal with the boys, and the 
spirits of the entire party were high. By the middle 
of the afternoon one of them said, 44 We can’t be very 
far from Toronto now, but we haven’t seen anything 
of our good friend we’re following.” 

44 That’s because he’s in a boat that can outsail 
yours,” said David ; 44 and besides, he had a good start 
over you ; but if he’s at Toronto we may be able to 
catch him yet.” 

44 That’s what we will,” said the man ; 44 though I’m 
not so sure about that boat outsailing this. If it can, 
it must be a good one.” 

44 It is,” said David ; 44 and if we once get it I’ll 
have a race with you, and then we’ll very soon see 
which is the better boat ; ” but the conversation soon 
flagged, as the thoughts of all were upon the experi- 
ences that were before them. The men were more 
than anxious to seize the prisoner, and the boys were 
desirous of regaining the lost boat. 

As they sailed into the harbor at Toronto Henry 
suddenly called out, 44 There’s our boat. That’s the 
4 Corporal ’ right over there ; I know it is. That one 


168 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


that’s sailing out of the harbor,” and he pointed 
towards a boat not far away. 

All the part}? - looked in the direction which Henry 
indicated, and David said, “ That is the ‘ Corporal,’ 
Henry is right,” and the course was immediately 
changed so as to intercept her on her outward tack. 
As they approached, the men said, “ The boys are 
right. That’s our bird, and we’ll get him in our net 
yet,” and they shouted for him to come about and 
wait for them to approach. 

The man evidently heard the call of his pursuers, 
and although at first he had been inclined to heed their 
summons, as soon as he recognized them he brought 
the “ Corporal ” up into the wind and started for the 
open lake. 

“We’ll have to chase him,” said the man who held 
the tiller, as he started after the fleet-sailing “ Cor- 
poral.” 

“ I’m afraid you won’t be able to catch him with this 
boat,” said David. 

“Yes,” said Henry, “she’s the swiftest boat at 
Sackett’s Harbor.” 

“ Sackett’s Harbor ? ” said one of the men in sur- 
prise. “ Are you from there ? ” 

David had looked at Henry a good deal startled 
when he heard him tell where they were from. The 
boys made no reply, and the man said, “ That’s a great 
go. Then you’re Yanks, are you? There’s some- 


FRIENDS IN NEED 


169 


thing funny about all this, but you’re two birds in the 
hand and so we’ll try to get the one in the bush too.” 
And he headed his boat in the direction the “ Cor- 
poral ” had taken and began to pursue the stranger 
who was sailing her. 


170 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XIX 

THE PATIENT AT DONALD McGANN’S 
HATEVER interest was aroused by the state- 



" " ment that the boys had come from Sackett’s 
Harbor was lost for the time in the eagerness of the 
pursuit. The “ Corporal ” flew on in advance of them, 
and yet fleet as she was the pursuers evidently were 
gaining upon her. 

“ That fellow doesn’t know how to sail the ‘ Cor- 
poral,’ ” said David. “ If she was managed right 
she’d draw away from this boat in short order.” 

The man at the tiller laughed at David’s words 
and said, “ That may be so, but she isn’t outsailing 
us now, for we’re gaining on her every minute.” 

“ If we were in her,” said Henry, “ we’d soon leave 
you behind ; but as it is I’m glad that we’re gaining 
on her.” 

The conversation soon ceased, for the attention of 
all was centred upon the “Corporal.” The wind 
was high and yet not steady. The man they were 
pursuing apparently was very reckless in his manage- 
ment, and seemed to think of only one thing, and that 
was to escape from his pursuers if possible. Behind 


THE PATIENT AT DONALD McGANN’S 171 


them the Canadian shore soon became dimmer as they 
ran farther out into the waters of the lake, and the 
boats were tossing over the waves that now had be- 
come quite high. In this way the pursuit went on 
for a half-hour, and although the boat in which the 
boys were clearly was gaining, yet the distance be- 
tween the two boats was not lessened rapidly. 

“He’s making for the shore again,” said David 
excitedly as he watched the movements of the 
“ Corporal*” 

“That’s so,” said the man at the tiller. And it 
certainly was evident that there was a change in the 
course of the “ Corporal ; ” but with his change there 
had come a consequent gain by the pursuers. Indeed, 
they were much the better sailors, and they were 
quick to take advantage of any change that promised 
to benefit them, and it became certain that they were 
gaining rapidly now. 

“ What a fool he is not to keep with the wind,” 
said one of the men. “ If he’d run before the wind 
he’d have distanced us in short order, but this dodg- 
ing and tacking of his gives us the advantage every 
time, and it won’t be long before we shall overhaul 
him bag and baggage.” 

With every tack of the “ Corporal ” the pursuers 
gained. They were not more than three hundred 
yards apart now, and it was only a matter of time 
before they would overhaul the fugitive. 


17 2 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ What’s he doing ? What’s he doing ? ” said 
Henry, excitedly, and the attention of every one was 
called by his words to the movements the man in the 
“ Corporal ” was making. It certainly appeared as il 
he were about to abandon the boat. He had run in 
comparatively near shore, and, letting go of his tiller, 
was hauling the little skiff which he had in tow close 
up to him. 

“ It can’t be he’s going to leave the boat,” said one 
of the men. 

“Yes, it can be,” replied David, “because that’s 
just what he is doing.” 

“ That’s so,” replied the other as they saw the 
man they were pursuing step from the “ Corporal ” 
into the little skiff, and abandoning the larger boat 
take his oars and pull with all his strength towards 
the shore. There was confusion at once among 
the pursuers. Should they abandon the “ Corporal ” 
and pursue the man, or run him down and leave the 
boat to take its chances on the water ? 

“ We’d better take the boat first,” said one of the 
men. “ I think we can get that and pick him up 
too, and if we can’t, he isn’t going to get very far 
away from us on shore.” 

“That’s just what he was figuring on,” said the other. 
“ If it came to a choice on our part between him and 
the boat, probably he thought we’d take after the 
boat and that would give him a chance to get away.” 


THE PATIENT AT DONALD McGANN’S 173 


“ Well, it’s too good a boat for us to leave,” said his 
companion, “ for in such a breeze as this she’d get 
capsized pretty soon, and we’ll take our chances of 
getting him.” 

Accordingly the boat was headed towards the “ Cor- 
poral,” which seemed to be fairly flying over the sur- 
face of the lake. With every gust she swerved from 
her course, however, and at times it seemed as if she 
must capsize. 

44 Strange antics a boat like that will go through,” 
said one of the men. 44 It’s almost uncanny. It 
sometimes seems to me as if some hand we couldn’t 
see was holding the tiller, and particular delight was 
taken in making an empty boat behave as this one 
is doing.” 

But the pursuers kept steadily on, and soon gain- 
ing upon the 44 Corporal,” they came alongside, and 
one of them stepped on board with the boys. Im- 
mediately they brought her to, and headed her for 
the shore. 

“This is your boat, boys, and we thought we’d 
help you get her ; but I want to understand a little 
more, if I can, about this Sackett’s Harbor business. 
You’re too young to be very dangerous, and yet I 
should like to know what it means.” 

The boys glanced at each other quickly, and then 
David said, 44 Well, I’ll make a clean breast of it, 
and tell you everything just as it is, and then if 


174 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


you want to do anything with us you can ; ” and he 
proceeded to tell the story of Elijah’s strange dis- 
appearance, and the report which had come to him 
through one of the prisoners at Sackett’s Harbor. 
He did not tell of the part which they had taken in 
the war, but he did tell these strangers something of 
the sadness there was in the home of Mr. Spicer, and 
of the suffering of his father and mother. 

“ I don’t waste any affection on the Yanks,” said 
the man at last ; “ and that is the worst about you, and 
although you’re young Yankees, if nothing happens 
you’il soon grow up to be old ones, and there’s no 
knowing what you’ll do then. A snake’s egg is 
bound to furnish a snake every time. However, I’m 
in favor of giving you boys a chance to find out 
whether this is your friend or not, and if it is, I shan’t 
stand in the way of your taking your boat and going 
home.” 

“ Don’t you want us to help you catch this man 
we’ve been chasing ? ” said David. “ We feel under 
obligations to you for your help, for you certainly 
have been very kind to us.” 

“No, we don’t want any of your help,” said the 
man gruffly, and yet as David thought not at all dis- 
pleased at his offer. “ No, you take your boat, and 
we’ll get after the man and take him. Here comes 
my pardner,” he added, as the “ Corporal ” was 
brought to the dock, and the other boat soon came 


THE PATIENT AT DONALD McG ANN’S 175 

alongside. A hurried conversation between the two 
men explained the position of the boys, and they both 
agreed to leave them where they were, and they 
started to search for the man who had escaped them. 

A great change had come over Toronto since the 
previous visit of the boys, and they were interested 
observers of all that was transpiring about them. At 
first they were afraid they would be accosted by some 
of the soldiers they saw, or by some of the men they 
met upon the street ; but they soon were satisfied 
that no one was giving them any special attention, 
and in a brief time they left the dock and started 
towards the town. 

“ What are you going to do now, David ? ” asked 
Henry. u I haven’t an idea of what’s the best thing 
to do, at all.” 

“ I have been thinking of that very thing,” said 
David, “ and I have made up my mind what I’ll do, 
and the first thing is, to speak to this man coming 
down the street,” and they crossed over to meet him. 

“ Do you know where the minister lives ? ” said 
David to the stranger. 

“ What minister do you mean? ” said the stranger, 
as he stopped to talk to the boys. 

“ Any one ; I don’t care.” 

“ There’s one living right up the street here in the 
last house, right next to the church.” 

“ That’s all right. Thank you,” replied David, 


176 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ we’ll go to see him,” and both boys started in the 
direction which the man had indicated. 

When they were admitted to the house it was by 
the man whom the boys at once concluded must be 
the minister himself. He spoke with a broad Scotch 
accent, and his full round face beamed kindly upon 
the boys as they came in. David at once told him 
their story, at least enough of it to let him know 
what their purpose in coming was. He did not 
tell him where they were from nor the part they 
had taken in the war, but he did tell about the 
loss of Elijah, and the report which they had had 
of a young man lying ill and wounded in one of the 
homes at Toronto, and that they were not without 
hope that he might be their missing friend. 

“ Poor bairns ! poor bairns ! ” the good man kept ut- 
tering during their recital, and when they had fin- 
ished he had many sharp words to say about the cruel 
war which was then being waged. 

David was not especially interested in what he 
had to say about the war, but he was very much 
pleased when the old man took his hat and cane and 
promised to go with them on their search. He knew 
several places where men who had been wounded in 
the fight were being cared for, and he knew of no 
better way than to begin to search for the missing 
boy by visiting these houses in order. 

The first place they entered they found sheltered 


THE PATIENT AT DONALD McGANN’S* 177 


a man who had been badly wounded in the battle, 
but when the boys looked upon him they saw that 
he was old and gray, and bore no resemblance to the 
missing Elijah. 

Again they met with a similar experience, and 
Henry began to be very much discouraged. 

“We never shall find him after all our trouble,” 
he exclaimed bitterly ; “I know we never shall.” 

“Don’t get discouraged, Henry,” said David. 
“ You’re a little bit like Lige, after all, and you’re 
too quick to let go, just as sometimes I think he’s 
been too quick to take hold.” 

The old minister added his encouraging words, 
and tried to cheer the desponding boy; but when 
they had made several more visits which did nothing 
except to add to their disappointment, even David 
himself began to fear that their search would be a 
useless one, and that after all they had been some- 
what rash in following an idle report of a prisoner 
who was an entire stranger to them all. 

“ We’ll try Donald McGann’s now,” said the 
minister. “ One of the girls told me that they had 
been nursing a wounded soldier ever since the battle. 
It may be that’s the very one we’re looking for.” 

He spoke cheerfully, and the boys, acting upon his 
suggestion, started towards the residence of Donald 
McGann; but as they went on their spirits fell 
again, and Henry said, “ There’s no use. He won’t 


178 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


be there ; I know he won’t. We might just as well go 
down and take the ‘Corporal’ and start for home 
again ; ” but the old minister had already used the 
knocker on the door, and in response to his summons 
a young girl stood before them, and was listening 
with some surprise to the words the old man had to 
say. 

The conversation evidently interested others, for 
presently two more young girls came and stood by 
their sister’s side, and cast curious looks at the boys. 

Eager as they were to learn anything that might 
throw any light upon their search, they yet were very 
conscious of the bright eyes and curious glances of 
the young girls before them. 

“ I’ll call mother,” said one of them as the party 
entered and seated themselves. 

The mother, a gentle, sweet-faced woman, soon 
came in, and in some surprise listened to the story 
which the clergyman told her. She said but little 
until he had finished, and then she quietly re- 
marked, “ You soon can tell whether he’s the one you’re 
looking for or not ; he’s been here ever since the day 
after the battle. He’s never made any trouble for us, 
poor boy. About all he has done has been to moan 
and toss till lately, but since we’ve got him fixed in a 
chair so that he can sit up part of the time he’s a 
good deal more quiet, though he follows me with 
those eyes of his wherever I go. He’d like to say 



BuwfcfiKk pH. 


They recognized the face of their lost friend ” Page 179 , 




THE PATIENT AT DONALD McGANN’S 179 


something, I think, but he doesn’t seem quite himself 
yet, and whatever he has had in his mind he’s kept 
it to himself. But come with me and you can soon 
tell for yourselves,” and she led the way into another 
room. 

As the boys entered they saw that some one was 
sitting in a chair by the window, bolstered up by 
pillows, but they could not tell who it was, as his face 
was turned from them. The patient heard them 
when they entered, however, and slowly turned his 
thin, worn face to see who it was that had come to 
him. Evidently he was looking for no one but the 
family which had cared for him so long. 

The startled boys at first said nothing, for it was 
with difficulty that they recognized the face of their 
lost friend, Elijah Spicer. But the object of their 
voyage had been gained, and they stood before then 
long-lost friend. 


180 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XX 

HEMAN’S NEW BOY FRIEND 

TTEMAN JEDUTHAN CHUBB, when he had been 
left a prisoner in the British camp by his friends 
who made their escape without much difficulty, soon 
became a changed man ; that is, he was changed back 
into the man he was when our friends first met him. 
Ever since he had been shot in the attack on Queen- 
ston Heights he had been much more quiet than he 
had been before. The songs which before he had 
been so fond of singing were seldom heard from him 
after that time, and not even the praise and persistent 
begging of the boys could often make him sing ; but 
after he had been left for a time in the British camp, 
a gradual change came over him. Frequently he 
would raise his voice in song, and was more ready to 
boast of his deeds, and declare what great things he 
would do, than ever before. 

His tall, gaunt form, with its long arms and thick, 
bushy, red hair, came to be something of a joke among 
the soldiers. He was regarded by many of them as 
not just right in his mind. This, however, was 


HEMAN’S NEW BOY FRIEND 


181 


hardly true, for, with all his peculiarities, he had a 
certain shrewdness that enabled him often to gain 
his point, when a man apparently much brighter 
might have lost it. 

As the days passed, Heman began to sing again, 
and his songs caused much amusement and diversion 
in the camp. One night, at the request of the guard, 
he had been singing a song which was a familiar one 
in the war, and one part of which was as follows : 

“ ‘ Where are you from? * bold Rodgers cried, 

Which made the British wonder ; 

Then with a gun they quick replied, 

Which made a noise like thunder. 

“ Like lightning we returned the joke, 

Our matches were so handy *, 

The Yankee bulldogs nobly spoke 
The tune of ‘ Doodle Dandy.’ ” 

“ Is that the reason Yankees can fight so well, 
because they have such good songs and singers 
amongst them?” laughed the guard. 

“ No,” replied Heman soberly, without any ap- 
preciation of the quiet sarcasm in the soldier’s 
words. “ I think the reason the men can fight as 
they do comes from another song, which is called 
c The Impressed Seamen’s Appeal.’ That’s a great 
song.” 

“ Can you sing that as well as you did the other ? ” 
said the soldier banteringly. 


182 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ Oh, yes ! ” replied Heman, unconscious of every- 
thing but an audience that appreciated his singing. 
“ I’ll sing you one verse of that, if you like.” 

“ Do so,” replied the soldier, “ by all means ; ” and 
Heman began, his voice raised to its highest pitch, 
his eyes closed, and his head and arms keeping time, 
and sang, 

“ Shall that arm which haughty Britain 
In its gristle found too strong, 

That by which her foes were smitten, 

Shall that arm be palsied long? 

“ See our sons of ocean kneeling 
To a tyrant’s stripes and chains ! 

Partisan ! hast thou no feeling 
When the hardy tar complains ? 

“ See the British press-gang seize him, 

Victim of relentless power ! 

Stout his heart is, hut must fail him 
In this evil, trying hour.” 


By this time quite a number of soldiers had gath- 
ered about him, and their liberal applause spurred 
Heman on to further endeavors. 

“ I know another one,” said he, “ which is called 
‘Embargo and Peace.’ It isn’t quite as good as the 
others, but it’ll do very well,” and Heman began 
again to sing. 

“ Let traitors who feel not the patriot’s flame 

Talk of yielding our honor to Englishmen’s sway ! 


HEMAN’S NEW BOY FRIEND 183 

No such blemish shall sully our country’s fair fame ; 

We’ve no claims to surrender nor tribute to pay. 

Then, though foes gather round, 

We’re on Liberty’s ground, 

Both too wise to be trapped, and too strong to be bound.” 

As the days passed, Heman’s songs came into 
great demand. He was entirely unconscious of any- 
thing like ridicule, and never seemed to appreciate 
that the soldiers had any other motive than the mere 
enjoyment of his singing, whenever they requested 
him to give them any music. 

Many of the soldiers had been withdrawn from the 
camp by this time, but it had never seemed worth 
while to do anything in particular with Heman, as 
they all looked upon him as a little lacking mentally, 
and as a consequence he was not always closely con- 
fined. 

Frequently he was sent on errands for the officers, 
and was allowed more liberty than a prisoner of war 
often knows. Indeed, Heman hardly regarded him- 
self in the light of a prisoner, or, at least, his actions 
never seemed to imply that he was under guard, and 
he moved about the camp as freely as almost any of 
the soldiers. He came to be known as the “ Angle- 
worm,” his gaunt appearance and reddish complexion 
perhaps suggesting the epithet to some of the soldiers. 
At any rate, the name was soon caught up, and it 
was the title by which he was familiarly summoned. 


184 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

Yet Heman constantly rebelled against the name, 
and usually refused to answer to it, and whenever 
any one applied it to him he would reply, “ Nay, 
nay, Heman is my name, — the name my mother gave 
me from the Scripture, First Chronicles six, thirty- 
three ; of the sons of the Kohathites ; Heman a singer, 
the son of Joel, the son of Shemuel.” But his quo- 
tations had little effect, and the name clung to him 
persistently in spite of his opposition. The freedom 
which he enjoyed allowed him to wander almost at 
will about the camp, and it happened one day that he 
wanderd so far beyond the borders that he did not 
return at all. No special search was made for him, 
for no one seemed to care very much whether he re- 
mained in the camp or not. 

Heman hid himself the most of the time for a 
few days, and became quite indignant that he was 
not pursued. He was not familiar with the country 
from which he was escaping, and yet he found but 
little difficulty in gaining something to eat and a 
place in which he could sleep. In that way he kept 
on for many days, and at last, although he hardly 
could have told how, he found himself at the end of 
his journey on the American side, near the eastern 
end of Lake Erie. 

Of his good qualities, endurance was among the 
first. He could eat more than others when the op- 
portunity presented itself, and then again could 


IIEMAN’S NEW BOY FRIEND 


185 


thrive on what apparently would starve any other 
man. He had made friends during his journey, and 
had not hesitated to make use of whatever they could 
offer him. 

His singing, he thought, had been greatly en- 
joyed, and it certainly had been in great demand, and 
the eagerness with which he responded to any request 
for a song had been from apparently having decided 
to make up for the time of his long silence. 

After many weeks it came to pass that he arrived 
at the quarters of Commodore Perry, and at once 
making himself at home in the camp, had fallen in 
with Perry’s younger brother, Alexander, and had 
become a warm friend of his. Although Alexander 
was but thirteen years old, he seemed nearly as 
mature as Heman, and they spent much of the time 
together. From him he learned how his brother, 
Commodore Oliver H. Perry, had been a naval officer 
and in command of a flotilla of gun-boats at Newport, 
Rhode Island. He had been very desirous of serving 
on the lakes or the ocean, and had offered his services 
in the previous autumn, and Commodore Chauncey 
had written him a very cordial letter, and placed 
him in command of the naval force on Lake Erie. 

Captain Perry, as he then was, was delighted, and 
he sent the best of his men from Narragansett Bay to 
the lake. He himself had started from Rhode Island 
with his little brother, Alexander, and had journeyed 


186 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

through the wilderness and arrived at Sackett’s 
Harbor on the third of March. 

It was a great delight to Heman when he found 
that young Perry had been with his brother at Sackett’s 
Harbor, and he had many stories to tell him of the 
young friends he himself had made whose home was 
near there. He was somewhat interested in the 
preparations which were being rapidly pushed for 
equipping a fleet to engage the British on Lake Erie. 

On the report that the British were coming, he and 
Alexander became highly excited, and when at last 
they started forth, it was after many false moves 
of the enemy and repeated refusals to enter into 
an engagement. Heman and Alexander were both 
on the flag-ship when Captain Perry’s fleet came to 
anchor in Put-in Bay. Captain Perry was but twenty- 
seven years old at the time, and young as he was had 
the warmest affections and respect of all his men. 
Every one knew that when he led his men into an en- 
gagement he would not give up so long as there was 
any chance of fighting. 

Heman and Alexander were in his cabin one day 
when he showed them a large, square battle-flag which 
he had had his purser previously prepare at Erie. 
It was a blue flag, and had in the centre simply the 
words, “ Don’t give up the ship.” He explained to 
them how they were the last words of Captain 
Lawrence when he had been fatally wounded in the 


HEMAN’S NEW BOY FKIEND 


187 


fight of the “ Chesapeake ” and the 44 Shannon,” which 
was the great naval loss of the Americans that year ; 
but the British had been so chagrined at the un- 
expected success of the American navy in the pre- 
vious year, that they had sent over all their available 
boats, and as a consequence had blockaded nearly all 
the American ports. 

The Americans had fitted out many little gun- 
boats, and were constantly engaged in privateer- 
ing, and a great many small engagements had been 
had. In June, Captain Lawrence, who had been in 
command of the “Hornet,” had been promoted to the 
command of a larger ship, the 44 Chesapeake,” and 
sailed out of Boston Harbor to engage the 44 Shannon ; ” 
and although she was of about the same size and 
force as his own ship, her men were much better 
disciplined, and discipline won the day. 

The British were as highly delighted at the success 
of the 44 Shannon ” as the Americans had been at their 
successes in the preceding year, but the dying words 
of Captain Lawrence, 44 Don’t give up the ship,” had 
become the watchword among all the American 
sailors ; and when Captain Perry put those words on 
the. battle-flag which he showed to Alexander and 
He man, he knew that it would appeal to the sailors 
in the stirring events which were to follow as no other 
words could. And stirring events did follow, and 
sooner than many expected them to come. 


188 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


.CHAPTER XXI 

THE DEFENCE OF FORT MEIGS 

TT is time for us to return to General Harrison 
and his men, whom we left defending Fort Meigs 
against a large body of British and Indians who had 
surrounded it. General Harrison, or “ Tippecanoe,” as 
his soldiers familiarly had called him since the battle 
of that name, was greatly beloved of all his followers, 
and was obeyed as few of the men in those times 
were. 

The traverse which had been made was almost a 
complete protection against the balls of the enemy, 
and while the lack of ammunition and the presence 
of only one six-pound gun prevented them from 
making a very vigorous return of their shots, the 
men were strong in their defence, and enthusiastic 
in their determination to hold on to Fort Meigs at 
all hazards. 

John Smart was especially happy, and became almost 
reckless in his excitement, and frequently climbed up 
on top of the earthworks, and waved his arms and 
jeered at the besiegers. Encouraged by his example, 


THE DEFENCE OF FORT MEIGS 


189 


other soldiers followed him, and together shouted 
defiance at Proctor and his men. 

General Harrison, however, soon put a stop to this 
reckless bravado, although he recognized how con- 
tagious enthusiasm was among his men ; but hejiid 
not care to have any men fall simply from reckless 
daring, and so soon forbade any one to expose him- 
self without express orders. 

But a change had come over the enemy, and find- 
ing how useless their work was, they had quietly 
and stealthily altered their plans, thinking to outwit 
the Americans, and to gain a place where they could 
fire on the body of soldiers from behind the earth- 
works. But General Harrison had suspected this 
very design, and traverses accordingly had been made 
to meet this very movement, and as a consequence 
almost every shot of the enemy was rendered useless. 

Occasionally the fire was returned from the fort, 
but the ammunition was so scanty that this was done 
more for its general effect than for any hope of doing 
any damage to the besiegers. Plenty of food and 
water was in the fort, and it was confidently expected 
that a long siege could be withstood. Shot and shell 
was hurled more thickly upon the fort now than 
before, but the next day the fire soon slackened 
somewhat, as it seemed to be almost without effect, 
and the besiegers apparently were becoming dis- 
couraged. 


190 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


The British commander here sent a major with a 
demand for the surrender of the post. 

“ You tell General Proctor,” General Harrison sent 
back word, “ that if he shall take this fort, it will be 
under circumstances that will do him more honor 
than a thousand surrenders.” 

“ If we only had plenty of ammunition,” said one 
of the captains, after the messenger had gone, “ we 
could blow John Bull from the Miami.” 

Again the soldiers began to show their confidence 
by mounting the ramparts, and swinging their hats, 
and waving their arms, and shouting to their besiegers, 
but General Harrison, in spite of his bold words, 
was very anxious. He well knew how Generals Hull 
and Winchester had both failed, and what sufferings 
had come upon their men. He also knew how strong 
the British were, and how wily were their Indian 
allies. He was every hour looking up the river for 
the help which he hoped would come. 

Ever since the departure of Peter Navarre and 
Captain Oliver, not a word had come to him from the 
outside world; but about midnight Captain Oliver, 
with fifteen officers who had made their way down 
the river in a boat, succeeded in entering the fort, 
bringing word that General Clay was only eighteen 
miles away, and had eleven hundred Kentucky sol- 
diers with him, and would probably arrive at Fort 
Meigs before morning. 


THE DEFENCE OF FORT MEIGS 


191 


General Harrison no sooner received the message 
than he immediately thought of a plan of working 
with General Clay outside the fort, and so he quickly 
sent a couple of men in a canoe to tell him that he 
was to detach about eight hundred of his men, and 
land them about a mile and a half above Fort Meigs, 
and the rest of the men were to land on the fort side 
of the river, and fight their way through the Indians 
to the fort. 

Accordingly, about sunrise Clay started with his 
men. He ordered Colonel Dudley to start for the 
British batteries, while he himself would do the part 
which had been assigned him. Colonel Dudley was 
a very brave man, and he led liis forces through the 
woods in such a way that in the form of a crescent 
his men faced the enemy at last, and it looked as if 
the whole force would be captured ; but he had failed 
to hell some of his officers of the plan which had been 
formed, and the mistake proved to be almost fatal. 

Suddenly Dudley and his men raised a horrible 
yell, and rushed forward and captured the heavy guns, 
spiking eleven of them without losing a man. The 
riflemen who had been attacked by the Indians 
thought it was their duty to stay there and fight in- 
stead of falling back to the main body, which was the 
great mistake of the day. Although the batteries 
were not destroyed, what General Harrison had 
planned had in the main been accomplished, and 


192 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


when the British flag was pulled down loud cheers 
went up from the men in the fort, who had been 
breathless observers of what was going on. 

General Harrison could not understand why the 
men who had accomplished just what he wanted done, 
still stayed there and fought when it was against his 
express orders. He at once sent a lieutenant to 
Colonel Dudley to tell him to withdraw ; but when 
he arrived the victory which had been won was al- 
ready changed into a defeat, for at the very moment 
when the batteries were taken the Indians had fallen 
upon the riflemen. 

Colonel Dudley had ordered them to be reenforced, 
and soon the greater part of his men, who had almost 
no discipline, rushed through the woods to their com- 
panions’ aid, and soon put the Indians to flight; 
but they were so filled with enthusiasm by their 
success that they forgot everything else but the 
pursuit of the Indians almost to the British camp. 
This meanwhile had been largely reenforced, and 
they took a great many of our soldiers prisoners, and 
drove others toward their boats. Colonel Dudley's 
men were in great confusion now, and would not 
listen to a word of command. They fought for three 
hours, and before the struggle was finished Dudley 
himself had been tomahawked, and of the eight hun- 
dred who had come with him, only*one hundred and 
seventy escaped to Fort Meigs. 


THE DEFENCE OF FORT MEIGS 


193 


General Clay, after some exciting encounters mean- 
while, had arrived at the fort without suffering very 
serious loss. A party was at once formed, and marched 
forth from the fort and began to drive the Indians 
before them. They were almost as reckless as 
Colonel Dudley’s men had been, and were facing 
almost as great a danger in the very successes which 
at first had come to them, for they were pursuing the 
Indians towards the very place where all the British 
strength was gathered; hut General Harrison was 
watching them, and he sent three hundred and fifty 
men from the fort against the batteries, who charged 
with such bravery that they drove the enemy — al- 
though there were eight hundred and fifty of them — 
from their batteries, and spiked their guns and 
brought forty-three prisoners back to the fort. 

The lack of success on the part of the British was 
very disheartening to them. The Indians, who were 
always fickle, were now threatening to desert them- 
Tecumseh in the event of success was to have the 
whole of the Michigan territory for his reward, and 
also the body of General Harrison, whom he had hated 
with an intensity that was almost fiendish ever since 
the battle of Tippecanoe ; but the Indians were leav- 
ing now in disgust at the failure of the British in the 
engagement, and General Proctor saw that there was 
nothing left for him but to leave also, for if he 
remained without his Indian helpers, his soldiers 


194 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


would surely be taken prisoners. He did not wish 
General Harrison to know this, however, and think- 
ing that he could conceal his real purpose, he again 
sent an officer to the fort demanding its surrender. 

General Harrison simply sent back word that “ he 
hoped that request would not be repeated,” and that 
was the last friendly communication that was had. 

General Proctor tried to bear away some of his 
cannon which had not been spiked, but a few shots 
from the fort soon showed him that he had better not 
remain even for that, and he soon withdrew with the 
remains of his little army to Amherstburg. He took 
with him the prisoners and marched them down to 
Fort Miami, and yet under his very eye the Indians 
were plundering and murdering many of them, and 
more than twenty of them had been scalped, when 
Tecumseh, more pitiful than the British General, by 
his own words put an end to such treachery. 

There was great rejoicing in the little band of 
American soldiers that so successfully had withstood 
the attack of the British and Indians, but as soon as 
General Harrison had become certain that Proctor 
had given up his plans of trying to get possession of the 
Maumee Valley, and at last had returned to Malden, 
he left General Clay in command of the fort, and 
started for the Erie frontier to strengthen the 
defences there, and to see what could be done for 
making an attack against the British, for it was the 


THE DEFENCE OF FORT MEIGS 


195 


ambition of all to regain that which General Hull 
had surrendered in such a cowardly manner. He 
was greatly encouraged by the warm responses which 
came to him, and was certain that very soon a forward 
movement could be made. 

The report soon came that Fort Stephenson had also 
been successfully held against an attack of the British 
by Major George Croghan, who was in command 
over the one hundred and sixty men that formed 
the garrison there. Major Croghan was himself but 
twenty-one years of age, and might well be called 
another boy officer of 1812. 

General Harrison, who knew how weak the place 
was, had sent word that if they were attacked by any 
considerable body of British that they should with- 
draw, but the written word which Major Croghan 
sent back was this : 

July 30, 1813. 

Sir : I have just received yours of yesterday, ten 
o’clock P.M., ordering me to destroy this place and make 
good my retreat, which was received too late to be carried 
into execution. We have determined to maintain this 
place, and, by heavens ! we can. 

In spite of the pleadings of the British officers, who 
feared that they could not restrain the Indians if the 
Americans should fall into their power after the fight, 
the fort was held, and with the loss of only one man 


196 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


killed and seven wounded inflicted a loss upon the 
enemy of a hundred and twenty, and compelled them 
to steal away down the Sandusky, leaving behind a 
vessel filled with clothing and military stores. From 
every side praise and congratulation showered upon 
the boy officer, and Congress voted him the thanks of 
the nation. 

Meanwhile General Harrison was stirring up the 
people, and meeting with such a warm response that 
his cherished plan for invading Canada promised soon 
to be carried out ; and not the least of the assistance 
upon which he relied was Perry and his fleet, with 
which, as we already know, for some time Heman had 
been. 


ELIJAH’S VISITORS 


197 


CHAPTER XXII 


ELIJAH’S VISITORS 


NDREW FIELD had returned to Sackett’s Har- 



bor and found that his duties were increasing 
every day ; for with the oversight of his home, the 
drilling of the soldiers, and such other duties as fell 
to him, he found little time for anything but his own 
work. Meanwhile the days passed on, and not a word 
had been received from David and Henry. The loss 
of Elijah was made worse by the long absence of the 
other boys, and while their friends tried to wait 
patiently for news from them their anxiety increased 
with every passing day. 

One day Andrew received a summons from Major 
Forsythe, and when he had reported at his quarters, 
he found the Major as anxious as he about the dis- 
appearance of his young friends, who were to him 
almost like his own sons. 

“ I hope they’ll report very soon, for I’ve something 
which will interest them, I know,” said the Major. 

“ I only wish the} r were here,” said Andrew ; “ their 
mothers are almost worn out with waiting.” 


198 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ If I only knew where to get word to them,” said 
the Major, “ I think I’d send them something that 
would bring them home sooner. It’s something in 
which you’re interested too.” 

Andrew made no reply, although his face plainly 
showed his interest as he waited for the Major to 
explain his words. 

Major Forsythe smiled as he continued, “ You’ve 
made a very good corporal, Andrew, and I’ve just 
got a commission to make a sergeant of you.” 

Andrew’s face beamed, and he showed something 
of the pride and pleasure he felt as he thanked his 
friend for his promotion. 

“But that’s not all,” said the Major. “These 
young boys, David and Elijah, have shown them- 
selves to be such sturdy youngsters, and so trusty and 
reliable, that for all that they’re only seventeen years 
old, I’ve got a corporal’s commission for each of them. 

Andrew was as pleased at the prospect held out 
for the younger boys as he was at his own advance- 
ment, and said, “ I only wish they were here to re- 
ceive it, Major, and to thank you for your kindness ; 
but sometimes I’m almost afraid something very seri- 
ous has happened to them, and that we may never see 
them again.” 

“ They can take care of themselves,” said the 
Major, “ and if they knew that now it is Sergeant 
Andrew and Corporal David and Corporal Elijah, I 


ELIJAH’S VISITORS 


199 


think they’d want to return pretty soon, and show 
what the boy officers of 1812 can do and be.” 

“ I only wish they were here,” replied Andrew 
quietly as he left the Major’s presence, and went 
home to report his own good fortune as well as that 
of the boys to the people there. 

But the anxiety deepened as the time went on and 
no word came from the boys. 

u It’s the fortune of war,” said Mr. Spicer, “ and I 
suppose we must take what comes, and take it as it 
comes ; only the suspense is pretty hard, though I feel 
quite certain that the boys will turn up all right after 
a little while. I’ve hoped to learn something from 
this man Smith, who’s a go-between for the General, 
but neither the Major nor the General have heard 
anything of him or from him lately. Perhaps he’s 
sold out to the other side now, and if they did find 
him they’d be more apt to shut him up than anything 
else. He’s got a stronghold down the St. Lawrence 
somewhere. You know the boys told us about being 
there and what a strong place his cave was, and how 
well fitted to stand a siege. Major Forsythe says 
he’s sometimes tempted to send an expedition down 
there and clean it out, but they have so few men at 
Sackett’s Harbor that they could hardly spare enough 
for that, and so they pass it by. But something 
must be done,” he added, “ though I don’t know just 
what it is yet.” 


200 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


The uncertainty increased, and the question as to 
what should be done was discussed almost every day 
in one home or the other. 

After several days more had passed Mr. Spicer on 
his return from Sackett’s Harbor stopped at Andrew’s 
home, where Mrs. Spicer was spending the day, and 
said, “ I’ve about made up my mind that I shall try 
to get a letter from the Major or the General that will 
admit me into Toronto and let me out again, and 
go over there and see what I can learn. I shall have 
to trust to luck somewhat, but I can’t stand this un- 
certainty much longer.” 

“ I wish you would go,” said the hermit. “ It 
isn’t very much of a trip, although there’s some dan- 
ger in it, but that isn’t so bad as this waiting is ; it’s 
just wearing out all these women, and I confess I 
don’t feel very happy about it myself.” 

“ I think I’ll wait a day or two longer,” replied Mr. 
Spicer, “ and then if nothing is heard I shall get the 
letter and go over there.” 

In spite of Mr. Spicer’s waiting no word came 
from the missing boys, and it was soon decided that 
he should go to Toronto. As soon as the hermit 
learned of his decision he said quietly, “I’m going 
with you.” 

Mr. Spicer hesitated. “ I don’t know as there’s 
any use in that,” he said. “ You maybe needed here, 
and I don’t know that you could be of any use to me.” 


ELIJAH’S VISITORS 


201 


“ But I’m going,” replied the hermit decidedly. 
“ The cook can look after things here.” 

“ I know, I know all about it,” murmured the 
cook. 

As the result of this conversation, the next day a 
boat was obtained, and the men made their prepara- 
tions for starting. It was with heavy hearts that 
they did this, and heavy hearts were also left behind 
them, for they all knew that dangers were before 
them, and that the loss of the boys might be in- 
creased by that of Mr. Spicer and the hermit. The 
two men set sail bright and early one morning, and 
started as David and Henry had done before them 
directly across the lake. They did not stop at night, 
but sailed steadily on, and soon put a good distance 
between them and their home. 

In the afternoon of the second day, the hermit, who 
was the better sailor and who held the tiller most of 
the time, said, “ I don’t like the looks of things. It’s 
going to blow, and blow hard too. I never saw the 
sky look like that without it’s meaning some wind at 
hand.” 

Almost before he had said the words a gale struck 
them. They did not know it, but they were near the 
very place where the boys had been, and where they 
had lost the “ Corporal.” As the wind swept down 
upon them they saw two men standing on the shore 
gesticulating wildly and shouting to them, as the her- 


202 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


mit thought, though he could not hear a word they 
said. 

“ I’ll weather it, I’ll weather it, I think,” said the 
hermit, but before he had fairly spoken the words a 
harder gust than had yet been felt struck them, and 
before they knew it the boat was over on her side and 
filling. The mast had snapped, and the sails were al- 
most entirely under water. Before they had fully rec- 
ognized what had happened to them, both men were 
in the water, the hermit clinging to the boat, and Mr. 
Spicer struggling to keep his head above water and 
to make his Avay to the boat, which was wildly tossing 
now on the waves, which had become very boisterous. 

The hermit called to him, but the sound of his 
voice could not be heard above the storm, and it was 
doubtful whether Mr. Spicer could have done any- 
thing more than he was doing if he had heard it. The 
hermit noticed as he came up on the crest of a wave 
that the two men who had been standing on the 
shore had put forth in a row-boat, and had started 
towards them. He was dimly conscious that they 
could not live in such a storm, and yet he was glad 
in his heart that help was coming, or at least that the 
men were making an effort to rescue them. 

He called out to his struggling companion that 
help was coming, but he could not make his voice 
heard. But the boat from the shore was coming 
nearer now, and he could see that the men were 



“ lie was becoming weaker every moment ’ Page 203. 








ELIJAH’S VISITORS 


203 


struggling and working with all their strength. 
Steadily the boat gained, although at times it was 
lost to sight between the waves, which every moment 
were becoming higher. He caught sight of his com- 
panion struggling in the water a little nearer the 
boat, and yet it was evident that he was becoming 
weaker every moment. The hermit turned his atten- 
tion from the boat which was coming to his companion, 
and tried to do some thing to aid him, but nothing 
was within his reach that he could throw him, and 
in his anxiety to assist him he found that his own 
hold was almost torn away. 

Just as Mr. Spicer’s strength seemed almost gone 
and he apparently was about to give up, the hermit 
gave a shout as he saw the little boat draw near, and 
as his friend came up on the crest of a wave one man 
reached forth and grasped him, and after a brief 
struggle lifted him into the boat. 

It was less difficult to release the hermit from his 
perilous situation, and when he had been taken on 
board his fears changed, and he was afraid the heavy 
load would swamp the frail craft, but it already 
had started to return, and he watched the men as 
they both pulled hard at the oars, and steadily made 
slow headway, and gradually approached the shore. 
They were almost swamped several times, but 
the little boat righted herself and at last brought 
them to the land. Mr. Spicer soon regained a little 


204 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


strength, and the entire party, almost exhausted, stood 
upon the shore, and watched the sail-boat as it was 
tossed by the waves. The wind was blowing 
towards them, and they waited until she had reached 
the point where, if she were left, she would surely 
be broken in pieces. Then the men once more took 
the row-boat and started forth in the storm, and were 
successful in making a rope fast to the drifting sail- 
boat and reached land again. 

They drew the boat along the shore till it was in 
the lee of the high bank, and then they began to 
make an examination of her. The broken mast and 
the torn sails were something of a source of dis- 
couragement, and yet the men rejoiced that they 
themselves had escaped from the perilous situation 
in which they were a little time before. They were 
glad to accept the kind invitation of their new 
friends, and went with them to their home to spend 
the night. 

The rest which they had, and the bright clear sun 
of the next morning, brought them new hope, and 
they turned to the work of repairing their boat, 
which was accomplished much sooner than they had 
thought it could be. At the breakfast table that 
morning it came out in the course of the conversa- 
tion that the two strangers had started for Toronto. 

“We were there a few weeks ago,” said one of the 


men. 


ELIJAH’S VISITORS 


205 


“ Do you go there often ? ” asked Mr. Spicer. 

“Not very,” replied the man. “It’s a good fifty 
mile from here. We had a great time on our last 
trip, but not so great as a couple of youngsters who 
stopped here on their way.” 

Mr. Spicer looked up quickly as he said, “ Two 
youngsters ? Do you know who they were, or what 
they were ? ” 

“ Yes, replied the man,” they were two boys from 
over near Sackett’s Harbor. They’d started for 
Toronto to see if they could learn anything about a 
friend of theirs who had been lost ever since the 
attack on the town.” 

Mr. Spicer had heard enough. He at once told 
the purpose of their own voyage, and the adventures 
of David and Henry came out in the course of the 
conversation. 

“Did they get their boat again?” asked the 
hermit. 

“ Oh, yes, they got their boat all right,” replied the 
host, “ but our bird got away from us. He was only 
a little way ahead of us when he reached shore, but 
we never could find out what had become of him.” 

“ Did you find out anything more about the boys, 
or where they are, and where they went? ” asked Mr. 
Spicer. 

“Yes, they went up to the house of a friend of 
ours named Donald McGann, and the best of it all 


206 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


was that they found there their friend for whom they 
were searching.” 

“Was he well? Was he all right?” asked Mr. 
Spicer eagerly. 

“ He’d been shot in the fight, I believe. He acted 
as if he’d been hit on the head with something, but 1 
he was getting well, and they were a happy parcel of 
youngsters.” 

Both Mr. Spicer and the hermit were eager now to 
resume their voyage, and as soon as their boat was 
ready they bade their friends good-by and started on 
again. They arrived at Toronto without any further 
adventure, and at once took a letter they had to the 
commander, who very quickly endorsed it, and prom- 
ised them his protection as long as they remained 
there. 

“ The Yankees were very decent to us after the 
fight,” he said, “ and never destroyed any private 
property. I’ll do what I can in the way of returning 
the favor, so I’ll gladly give you a chance to look up 
your boys.” 

The men quickly left his presence and started at 
once for the home of Donald McGann, which they 
had no difficulty in finding. As they drew near they 
stopped a moment as they heard the sound of laugh- 
ter from within. 

“ That’s my boy,” said Mr. Spicer excitedly; “ that’s 
Elijah, I’d know his laugh anywhere,” and he rapped 


ELIJAH’S VISITORS 


207 


eagerly upon the door, and entered abruptly as soon 
as it was opened. 

“ I’m Elijah Spicer’s father. I’ve been looking for 
him a long time,” said Mr. Spicer hurriedly to the 
motherly Mrs. McGann, who had opened the door, and 
who had hardly had time to say a word; but she 
knew what he wanted, and led him quickly into 
Elijah’s presence. 

Who can describe the joy of that meeting ? The 
sick boy sat pale and weak from his suffering, not ex- 
pecting any such sight as that of his own father. At 
first he was almost overcome, but in a little while he 
became calm enough to say, “ I thought you’d come, 
and I thought it was about time for you to come, 
too. You don’t know how I’ve suffered, but I knew 
David and Henry would send you as soon as they got 
home, so I’ve been looking for you.” 

“ David and Henry ? ” said Mr. Spicer. “ Are 
they not here too ? ” 

“ No ! ” said Elijah in surprise. “ They’ve been 
here, but I thought you must have come because 
they sent you.” 

“ When did they go from here ? ” said Mr. Spicer 
quietly. 

“ They left here nearly three weeks ago,” said Mr. 
McGann, who had just entered the room. “ Haven’t 
they been home?” 

“ Not a word have we heard from them,” said Mr. 


208 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


Spicer, “ and I came to learn about them almost as 
much as I did about Elijah.” 

Mr. Spicer’s joy was dampened in a moment. He 
had found one boy, but the mystery which surrounded 
the others had only deepened. 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


209 


CHAPTER XXIII 

A MEETING ON THE LAKE 

TT was true that the boys had gone from Toronto 
nearly three weeks before. They had remained 
long enough to see that Elijah was well on the 
road to recovery, but they had not cared to add 
to the burden of the family who had already been 
so kind to their friend. Elijah, though feeble, was 
certainly gaining, and as they were very desirous 
that the people at home should be informed of the 
good fortune which had attended their efforts in 
their search for their missing friend, they were more 
than eager to return with their news, so they had 
remained with Donald McGann only a day or two, 
and full of hope had set sail, as Elijah had told his 
father, nearly three weeks before. 

Mr. Spicer and the hermit were shocked at first, 
for it seemed like a double disappointment to have 
the good fortune which attended their voyage 
clouded by the announcement of the disappear- 
ance of David and Henfy. 

“ Oh, it’s more than likely,” said Mrs. McGann, 


210 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“that they’ve arrived at home long before this. 
Did you come directly from Sackett’s Harbor 
here?” 

“ No, we were delayed somewhat on the way,” 
said Mr. Spicer, as he told of the misfortune which 
had overtaken them in the squall which had 
struck them, and their escape from the waters of 
the lake ; but he added, “ the boys would have 
been at home long before we set sail if they had 
not met with some accident. However, we’ll hope 
for the best, and try to believe that we shall find 
them there when we get home. But I’ve some- 
thing good to tell you, Elijah,” he said, “ and that is 
that you and David each have received a corporal’s 
commission.” 

Elijah’s face flushed with pleasure as he said, 
“ I’m afraid it will be some time before I can take 
it, but how did it come ? ” 

“Oh, Major Forsythe, of course, was at the 
bottom of it. He got a sergeant’s commission for 
Andrew, and has made a corporal of you and 
David, so you’ll have to hurry up and come home 
and get it ; he says he’s very proud of his boy offi- 
cers, and I think he’s some reason to feel that 
way.” 

But the problem which immediately faced Mr. 
Spicer was what he should do with Elijah. It 
was certain that he was getting well rapidly, but 


A MEETING ON TIIE LAKE 


211 


could he return home with them? When he put 
the question, Mrs. McGann said, “I’m doubtful, 
but Mary has been his chief nurse, and I’ll ask her. 
What do you think about it ? ” she said, turning 
to her daughter. 

“I want him to do what is for the best,” said 
Mary, “ but I don’t think he’s strong enough yet 
to go,” and as she spoke a flush crept over her 
cheek, and in confusion she looked out of the 
window. Strange as it may seem, Elijah was blush- 
ing too, and the paleness which was constantly on 
his cheeks since his sickness served to make the 
blush all the more marked now. 

“ I’d like to see the people at home. I’d rather 
see my mother than any one else in the world,” 
he said, “but I don’t know whether I’m strong 
enough to stand the voyage yet or not.” 

“ I am afraid you’ve had too good a nurse,” 
said Mr. Spicer with a laugh. 

“ Oh, yes, she’s been nurse and cook too,” said 
the complaisant Mrs. McGann, all unconscious of 
the uneasiness of the younger people. “Mary 
hasn’t done much but just look after her patient.” 

“ Oh, well,” said the hermit, “ it almost pays to 
be sick sometimes, just for the fun of getting well, 
doesn’t it, Elijah ? ” 

“We should be glad to have you stay right 
here,” said Mr. McGann, “ till your boy gets well, 


212 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


and you can take him home with you. We had 
a boy once ourselves, but our nursing him didn’t 
turn out as well as it has with this young man,” 
and he laid his hand affectionately on Elijah’s 
shoulder. “Now our boys are all girls, and 
while I wouldn’t have one of them any different 
from what she is, I think somehow we’ve all of 
us had in mind the Percy whom we lost, while we 
have been taking care of Corporal Elijah.” 

“We should have done it anyway, and been 
glad to,” said Mrs. McGann, wiping her eyes, “and 
I never saw Mary so happy in her life. She’s 
just delighted in sitting with Elijah, and in caring 
for him most of the time,” a statement which in- 
creased the confusion of both of the young people 
referred to, and which made Mary McGann rise 
and leave the room as if she had suddenly thought 
of something that required her attention in another 
part of the home. 

Mr. Spicer hesitated. He was anxious about the 
other boys also, and now that he had solved the 
problem of Elijah’s whereabouts he felt as if he 
must at once begin the search for the others. 

“ I don’t like to leave him for strangers to 
nurse,” he said, after a moment’s thought. 

“You can make your heart light on that score,” 
said Mrs. McGann. “ He doesn’t require any nurs- 
ing much now, and Mary will just be delighted to 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


213 


care for him till he’s strong enough to come out to 
his meals.” 

“ I think I know just how Mr. Spicer feels,” said 
Mr. McGann, “ and yet I will promise him that we 
will look after his boy. I’ll see to it myself that 
he comes to Sackett’s Harbor ; that is, if you’ll promise 
not to shut me up in case I bring him myself,” he 
added, with a laugh. 

Mr. Spicer said, “ I can promise you that. That will 
be arranged all right and when the hermit added 
his word expressive of his own anxiety about David 
and Henry, it was decided that they should start for 
home on the next morning. 

Meanwhile Mr. Spicer sat by the side of his boy 
and told him of all that had occurred at home in 
which he thought he might he interested. He told 
him of Andrew’s expedition to Goose Bay, and 
of the strange way in which Captain Hoover had 
taken the prisoners which he sent to Sackett’s Har- 
bor by Corporal Andrew. He also told of the deeds 
of the soldiers and of the failure of the expedition 
from Kingston, and of all that was going on in his 
home. 

Elijah became brighter, and decided that he was 
almost strong enough to return with them, but when 
to prove the truth of his words he rose from his chair 
and tried to walk across the room, he fell upon the 
floor, and was unable to rise again, and then lie laughed 


214 


THE BOY OFFICEKS OF 1812 


good-naturedly, and said he thought he’d better wait 
for a time. 

44 Well, I’m sure you’ll have good nursing,” said 
Mr. Spicer with a quizzical expression upon his face, 
whereupon Elijah for some strange reason blushed 
again, and could think of no words with which to 
reply. 

Mr. Spicer was more than pleased with the family 
in which he found his son. The father and mother 
were Scotch, and often spoke with a brogue. They 
felt about the war much as did Mr. Spicer himself, 
and were only half-hearted in their defence of their 
country for the measures she was employing. 

But the time soon came for the departure of Mr. 
Spicer and the hermit, and the good-byes had been 
spoken, and the little boat started off on the lake and 
soon appeared like a mere speck upon the water to 
Mr. McGann, who had gone down to the dock to 
help them on their way. 

44 Elijah’s just as safe as if he was at home,” said 
the hermit to his companion. 44 You couldn’t ask for 
a better place for him to be, if he has to be away from 
his mother.” 

44 Yes,” said Mr. Spicer with a smile , 44 Elijah seemed 
strangely contented. I think that little blue-eyed 
nurse, Mary McGann, has something to do with it.” 

44 Very likely,” said the hermit. 44 It would be 
strange if she didn’t. Such a little, round, plump face 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


215 


as she’s got, and such sweet ways, that it would make 
any one, even if he was as old and rusty as I am, will- 
ing to be sick for a while if she was by him, and I’m 
sure she’s a good girl, and the whole family are good 
people.” 

“Yes, I’m certain of that,” said Mr. Spicer; “and 
while I don’t like to leave my boy behind me, if I 
have to do it I’m glad it’s among such good people. 
Just now I’m a great deal more worried about the 
other boys than I am about Elijah.” 

“ But he’s getting well,” said the hermit, “ and 
that’s a good deal, and it wont be long before he’ll be 
at home again.” 

They sailed on until they came to the place where 
they had met with their accident, and stopped for a 
few minutes to report their success to the people who 
had been so kind to them. They soon left them, how- 
ever, and as they sailed on were very watchful, as 
they feared that they might fall into the hands 
of some parties who would not be so well disposed as 
the Canadian friends they had just left had been ; but 
they met with no adventure, and at last had arrived 
at the place from which they were to sail directly 
across the lake for home. 

“ There’s a boat behind us,” said Mr. Spicer as 
they drew out into the open lake. “ It seems to be 
coming in this direction too. It’s gaining on us,” he 
said, after a time. “ I can almost see who’s aboard 


216 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


now. It’s just about the size of this boat, and 
there’s one man on board. I wonder if he’s starting 
for Sackett’s Harbor too.” 

The little boat which was behind them did gain 
rapidly, as it was well handled and carried more sail 
than the one in which they were, and as it ap- 
proached within hailing distance they were sur- 
prised as the only occupant of the boat stood up and 
the hermit recognized him as Smith. 

The surprise and disgust of Smith as he in turn 
recognized the men before him were marked. He 
would hardly talk with them, and his replies were 
given in a gruff voice that was anything but 
friendly. 

“ I’m about done with you Yankees,” said Smith in a 
surly manner. “ You promise all sorts of things, but 
it’s a good deal easier for you to promise than it is to 
do what you say.” 

“ Why, what have we promised that we haven’t 
done ? ” said Mr. Spicer in surprise. 

“ Oh, I don’t mean you, exactly,” said Smith, “ but 
those fellows in command at Sackett’s Harbor. They 
agreed to do well by me, but they’ve lied to me, that’s 
just all there is about it. They’ve lied, but they won’t 
lie to me many times. I maybe a little slippery some- 
times, but whatever else I am, I’m not a fool. I’m 
going to look out for number one after this.” 

“ I’m very sorry they’ve done not well by you,” 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


217 


said Mr. Spicer ; “ I knew Commodore Chauncey 
was a good friend to you.” 

“ Oh, Chauncey ’s all right,” replied Smith, a little 
mollified ; “ Dearborne was all right, too, but this 
duffer in command there now is no good, and I’m 
going to take advantage of the Yankees every chance 
I get ” 

u You haven’t seen or heard anything of our boys, 
have you ? ” called out Mr. Spicer to Smith, who was 
now some distance ahead of them ; but Smith either 
did not hear or heed their question, and when Mr. 
Spicer repeated it he received no reply. 

Smith was rapidly drawing away from them, and 
he soon changed his course and made as if he were 
starting for the St. Lawrence. He scowled upon the 
party behind him, and his dark looks somehow threw 
a damper over both men. Each in his heart had a 
fear which he did not dare to express, and their conver- 
sation ceased while they watched the boat of Smith 
sailing away in the distance, and soon disappearing 
from sight. 


218 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XXIY 

THE HERMIT TELLS A STORY 

TITR. SPICER and the hermit watched Smith, as he 
sailed away, with many misgivings. The hermit 
was pronounced in his opinion that foul play had 
been used somewhere, and expressed his fear that 
something had happened to the boys, and that they 
were even then in danger somewhere. Mr. Spicer, 
almost as much troubled as his companion, did not 
say very much, however, except to declare that he 
would borrow no trouble, and did not propose to cross 
any bridges before he came to them. He asked his 
companion why he thought Smith had changed his 
course and had apparently started for the river. 

“ I don’t know,” replied the hermit, “ unless he’s 
going to his headquarters. He hasn’t been near 
Sackett’s Harbor lately, and that doesn’t promise any 
good for us.” 

“I know it,” replied Mr. Spicer; “and I’m certain 
that something is wrong somewhere, but just what it 
is I can’t say. 

Their forebodings increased as they sailed on, and 
there was not very much inclination for conversation 


THE HERMIT TELLS A STORY 


219 


on the part of either, but both men were prone to 
look upon the bright side of things, and it was not 
long before a little more hopefully the hermit said, 
“Well, things don’t look very bright, that’s a fact^ 
and yet I’ve been in lots of close quarters myself, and 
I was just this minute thinking of some friends of 
mine who live up on the Indian River. You know 
where that is, don’t you ? ” 

“ Oh, yes,” replied Mr. Spicer ; “ but what about 
these friends of yours ? ” 

“ Why, I was thinking of a young man named J oel 
Mix. Not long after I came to the St. Lawrence, 
he’d been living in the western part of Connecticut, 
and had built him a house there, and had seen his 
family begin to grow up about him, but he wanted 
to get out of that old State, as he called it, and he 
always had a liking for new scenes and stirring advent- 
ures. He was a surveyor, and when the farms had 
been pretty well laid out where he lived, he struck 
out for the wilderness. 

“I remember it was in 1798 that he was up near 
here surveying for General Champion, who owned a 
lot of land in this country. One day, when they were 
coming back to camp together, the General urged him 
to move up into this part of the country ; but J oel told 
him he didn’t have any money, although he could see 
there was going to be a great chance for a surveyor, 
for the people were moving in quite fast then. 


220 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ General Champion promised to fix that all right 
for him, and to give him a good tract of land if he’d 
come and do the surveying and make his home in that 
country. Finally, after thinking it over, in the winter 
of 1T99 Joel Mix moved his family from Connecticut 
to High Falls upon the Black River. He made the 
journey through the snow, and I’ve often heard him 
tell about the adventures he met on that trip. He 
brought his wife and four children and his wife’s 
sister, and two men whom he had hired to work for 
him. It must have made the hearts of the little com- 
pany beat pretty fast when they heard the wolves 
howling around their camp at night, or the cry of the 
panther out in the forest. 

“When they arrived at High Falls the river was 
all covered over with thick ice, and even then the cry of 
‘ farther on ’ was heard among the pioneers, and Joel 
Mix was induced to go a little beyond the spot he’d 
chosen, in the hope of doing still better ; but he couldn’t 
take his family with him then, for it was in the dead 
of March and the cold was intense, so he left his 
children and his wife’s sister at the settlement, and 
started on with his wife as his only companion, in a 
one-horse pung, for West Long Falls. 

“His two workmen, with another man he’d got, had 
gone ahead and built a shanty in the woods right 
near to the river. Joel could see that the place was 
a good one, and so he made up his mind that that 


THE HERMIT TELLS A STORY 


221 


should be his home. The men all worked on till about 
the middle of April. The river was all covered with 
ice then, and no signs of the spring freshets had yet 
come. He made up his mind to leave his wife there 
in the new home, while he started for his family to 
bring them down the river. 

“He had to go forty-two miles on foot, and had his 
gun slung over his shoulder, and yet he made it in a 
day. His wife was afraid to have him start out then, 
for the wolves had got their appetites up pretty well 
by that time, for they probably hadn’t been living 
very high all winter. Joel only laughed at her fears 
and tapped his gun significantly, though he promised 
her he’d be very careful, and the next day found him 
with his children getting everything ready for their 
return with him. 

“ They were just wild to see their mother by this 
time, but Joel was a good deal afraid. The rains had 
now come on, and the swollen river was high over its 
banks ; but after talking with the men at the settle- 
ment he got the loan of an old scow, and in it he 
placed all his goods, and made everything ready to 
start the next day. He hired two men to go with 
him, and he rigged up the scow with an old sail ; but 
he found soon after he started that the sail was of no 
benefit, and that the current of the river, all swollen 
as it was with the melting snow, ran as swiftly as he 
cared to have his cargo carried. 


222 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ They started early in the morning, and the few 
people that were there in the settlement gathered by 
the bank to see them off. Joel was a good deal more 
anxious than he cared to show, but as they went on 
and he saw how happy the children were, and as 
nothing as yet had happened to harm them, he began 
to feel a little easier, but late in the afternoon, some- 
how the old scow began to act very strangely. The 
speed increased a great deal, and when Joel tried to 
steady the cumbrous old craft he found he had lost 
all control of it, and it began to whirl as it moved on 
faster down the stream. 

“ The children were frightened now, and when Joel 
found that he couldn’t steer the scow at all, he knew 
he was in a bad way. When he spoke to the two 
men that were with him he found they were as 
frightened as the children, and would be of no use at 
all to him. That was just the time, though, for Joel 
to show himself. He thought of his wife and the 
new home which he was building, and then he said 
he had a vision of the old home among the Connecti- 
cut hills, and he made up his mind he wouldn’t give 
up without a struggle, though the boat kept going 
on faster and faster all the time, and whirling as 
it went. 

“ It went from one side of the river to the other 
wherever the channel swept, and he knew the falls 
were not far away. He decided that if he was going 


THE HERMIT TELLS A STORY 


223 


to do anything at all to help himself the time had 
come, for even then the sound of the falls reached their 
ears, and the rest of the party became more frightened 
than ever. The scow heeded her rudder no more than 
if it had been a straw, but just then in his despair he 
saw ahead of them, on the bank of the river, a tree, 
with its branches spread out over the water like an 
arm. Joel didn’t know whether the arm was held 
forth to mock them or to help. 

“ The sound of the falls grew louder and louder, and 
Joel didn’t know but in spite of all he could do that 
they’d all be carried over them. Just then there 
came a change in the course of the channel. It 
seemed to him that the boat was making for that 
shore where the tree was. Soon this became more 
and more evident, for the scow certainly was being 
carried in towards the bank. He didn’t know whether 
it would come in close enough for him to get hold 
of the branches or not, but it was the only hope 
he had. 

“ He kept his eye on the place, and I don’t suppose 
any one knows how he felt, but all the time just like 
a race-horse the scow was making for the bank. 
Nearer and nearer the current carried them, and the 
branches of the tree were now not more than twenty 
feet away. Suddenly Joel saw a chain which was 
fast to the scow lying right near him, and he jumped 
and grasped one end of it, and stood all ready for the 


224 


THE BO Y OFFICERS OF 1812 


spring for the branches of the tree. Everybody on 
board stood still watching him, for they’d even 
stopped crying now in their excitement. 

“ Almost before there was time for thought, the old 
tub shot in nearer the tree, and with one shout he 
leaped from the boat, holding the chain in his left 
hand, and with his right he grasped the friendly 
branch. I don’t suppose any one could describe the 
strain that came upon him. The scow was heavily 
loaded, and with all the force of the swollen current 
added, it seemed as if it would tear him apart, or 
break his hold. The strain was so fearful that not 
even a cry came forth from his lips, and yet when he 
was telling me about it he said he thought of a pict- 
ure he used to see, when he was a boy, in 4 Fox’s 
Book of Martyrs,’ of a man being torn apart by wild 
horses. 

“For a moment the little party was speechless, and 
yet as Joel, suspended in the air, with his feet hardly 
touching the water, held to his grip upon the branch, 
the scow came to a stop. Then Hannah Merrill, his 
wife’s sister, I told you about, did what almost any 
woman would have done, and began to scream, loud 
and long ; with an almost hopeless agony she just 
screamed and screamed, and yet it was her instinctive 
cry for help. 

“ But the boat was nearer to the little shanty which 
he called his home than any of them knew, for right 


THE HERMIT TELLS A STORY 


225 


near the spot where the scow was so strangely fast- 
ened was his home, with his wife and his men in it. 
The cry reached them, and the startled party quickly 
ran to the bank. The boat and all its contents were 
hidden from their sight, and yet that agonizing 
scream continued, and they could hear it all the 
time. 

“ Of course all this had happened in less time than 
it takes to tell about it, and every second Joel Mix 
was afraid he would have to let go his hold. There 
was a roaring in his ears louder than the sound of 
the falls below them, but he held on like death, for 
he knew that the lives of those he loved depended 
upon him. 

“ Up and down the bank his startled wife and men 
ran, not knowing just where the cry came from, and 
unable to see what the meaning of it was at all. 
Eager as they were to do something, they were as 
helpless as those who were in the awful danger in 
the river. 

“ But on the other side of the river there were two 
humble French families living. Hannah Merrill’s 
screaming had startled them, as well as those who 
dwelt on the other side, and in a moment both 
families rushed down to the bank and were watch- 
ing the struggle of the father to hold his boat and 
save his children. They could see it all as plain as 
daylight. 


226 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ The wife of one man urged him to cross over to 
Joel’s aid, but he only shook his head and muttered 
that no boat could live in such a current as that and 
so near the falls, and he sullenly went back to the 
house. But his wife, whose name was Joanna Ward, 
with one of the men named Peter Belmont, who was 
ashamed even to hesitate in following a woman’s call, 
stepped quickly into a little canoe and crossed over 
the stream safely, and after a struggle that seemed 
beyond human power they rescued Joel just as con- 
sciousness was leaving him, and they finally got the 
scow safely ashore too. 

“It was about nine o’clock in the evening when 
they succeeded in making the landing, but in the 
light of the following morning they saw that they 
had been within fifteen rods of the head of the falls. 
Whenever I think of J oel’s grit, and the way he hung 
on, I never feel like giving up anything myself, how- 
ever dark it seems.” 

Mr. Spicer had listened quietly to the story which 
the hermit was telling him, and smiled with a new 
hope in his heart as he saw the determination the old 
man showed not to give up his endeavors to find his 
young friends. 

“ There’s something ahead there floating,” said Mr. 
Spicer. “ I can’t just make out what it is. Suppose 
you run in alongside and pick it up.” 

“ It’s an oar,” said the hermit, as he changed the 


THE HERMIT TELLS A STORY 


227 


course of the boat and so picked up the floating object 
which had attracted Mr. Spicer’s attention. 

44 Yes, it is an oar,” said Mr. Spicer as he drew it 
on board ; 44 but that isn’t all there is of it, for it was 
once on board the 4 Corporal,’ and it is one of the oars 
that Henry took from my house when they started 
for Toronto.” 

44 That doesn’t promise very well,” said the hermit. 
44 1 wonder what’s the meaning of it. There’s some- 
thing wrong here, I’m sure.” 

44 So am I,” replied Mr. Spicer, and they both became 
watchful and silent. 

About dark they arrived at Sackett’s Harbor, but 
without stopping they sailed around to their own 
dock, to which they made their boat fast, and 
quickly started up the road towards home. Lights 
were seen here and there in the farm-houses, but 
as they came nearer to David’s home no sounds 
were heard. 

44 I’m afraid they aren’t here,” said the hermit, 
44 for whenever they’re at home there isn’t much 
trouble for anybody who passes along the road to 
know that the boys are inside.” 

But they at once went up to the door and without 
rapping stepped quickly inside. 

44 Have the boys come back?” said Mr. Spicer, 
without waiting for anything to be said to him. 

44 No,” said Mrs. Field, who had risen when they 


228 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


came in and laid aside her knitting, “haven’t you 
seen them ? ” 

“ No,” replied Mr. Spicer, as he proceeded to give 
her an account of all they had heard and seen. “ No, 
they left Toronto,” he added, “ more than three 
weeks ago, but we won’t give up all hope yet of find- 
ing them again, for if the hermit will go home with 
me we’ll talk it over and see what we can do.” 


CAPTURED 


229 


CHAPTER XXY 

CAPTURED 

TT was indeed true that David and Henry had disap- 
peared. If the earth had opened and swallowed 
them they could not have been more completely 
lost, so far as their friends at Sackett’s Harbor were 
concerned; and yet the earth had not opened and 
swallowed them, and the boys were in a place where 
no immediate harm was likely to befall them. 

When they had entered the room and recognized 
the pale face of Elijah as he sat propped up in the chair 
by pillows, and so weak as barely to be able to lift 
his hand to grasp theirs, Henry had given a cry and 
fallen upon Elijah’s shoulder. In spite of the great 
change which had come over him they recognized the 
boy for whom they were searching, and the smile 
which was on their friend’s face made his appearance 
doubly pathetic. 

Elijah’s nurse, Mary McGann, at once came into 
the room and sharply began to scold the intruders, 
as she termed them, declaring that the excitement 


230 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


would be too much for Elijah, and they must leave 
the room at once ; hut her mother entering just then, 
at once declared that the boys should remain and sit 
with their friend for a time, although she cautioned 
them that they must be very quiet. She herself told 
the boys how it was that Elijah came to be in her 
home, and of the strange events of the past few weeks. 
She was frequently interrupted by the daughter, who 
had taken upon herself the especial duty of nursing 
Elijah, and who added many words of her own. 

“I know,” said Mrs. McGann, “that Elijah wants 
to hear from his home, and so if he will be very quiet 
about it you may tell him all you know, though you 
mustn’t be very long about it.” 

So David told his friend all that had transpired at 
Sackett’s Harbor during his absence, and of what their 
plans for the future were. Elijah was an interested 
listener, and declared that the visit of the boys had 
done him great good ; but they soon followed Mrs. 
McGann out of the room, after they had helped 
Elijah to return to the bed, and listened to the details 
of the way in which he had been found upon the 
battle-field, which she had not felt like giving fully in 
his presence. The boys were greatly pleased with 
her, and her motherly ways and sympathetic words 
led David to say, “ I’m sure Elijah has been very 
fortunate to have fallen into such good hands. He’d 
have died after the battle if he’d been left there.” 


CAPTURED 


231 


“ Mary has done most of the work,” said Mrs. 
McGann. “ She seems to have taken quite a fancy 
to the young soldier,” and she glanced at the blushing 
cheeks of her daughter. 

“ But what can we do now ? ” said David. “ Elijah 
isn’t fit to be moved yet.” 

“ Oh, no,” said Mary quickly, “ you can’t move 
him yet for a good while.” 

“ You can stay here till he gets better,” said Mrs. 
McGann, “ or you can go home and return for him in 
about a month. This war is a terrible thing, but 
you are fortunate in having him able to go home 
at all.” 

It was soon decided that the boys should return to 
Sackett’s Harbor the next day, and then that some 
one should return in a few weeks for the patient, 
who, they all thought, by that time would be able to 
take the voyage with them. Much of the time the 
boys spent with Elijah talking with him and planning 
to return for him in a few weeks. Somehow Elijah 
did not seem to be so disappointed when he learned 
that he must remain at Donald McGann’s for another 
month, as David had thought he would be. He won- 
dered whether Mary had anything to do with Elijah’s 
being reconciled to the delay, and the more he saw of 
her the more he became convinced that she was not 
the least of the causes in making him so willing to 
stay where he was. 


232 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


After the good-byes had been said, the next day, the 
boys went down to the dock, and as they approached 
it they saw the two men who had brought them to 
Toronto and had rescued the “ Corporal ” for them. 

“ Did you get your man ? ” said Henry. 

“No, he was too quick for us,” replied one of them. 
“ We’ve been looking everywhere for him since we’ve 
been here, and we can’t get any trace of him at all, 
so we’ve decided to go back home and let him go, for 
the present at least.” 

“ We’re going too,” said David, “ and we will show 
you whether this boat can’t leave you behind a good 
deal more successfully than it did yesterday. Not 
that we want to part company,” he added, “ but that 
we don’t want the 4 Corporal ’ to be looked upon as 
any such boat as that fellow made her out to be the 
other day.” 

The boasting of the boys was not without some 
foundation, for they steadily drew away from their 
friends under the strong breeze which favored them, 
and not many hours had passed before the other boat 
had disappeared from view. 

The boys were highly elated at the success which 
had attended their efforts. They had found Elijah, 
and while they were sorry to find him an invalid, 
shut in the house for many weeks, yet they were glad 
that there was now a prospect of his soon joining 
them again. They talked of the war, and of the girls 


CAPTURED 


233 


in the McGann home, and of their own plans for the 
immediate future, as they sailed on. 

The next day they saw a little house on a point 
which projected into the lake, and decided to stop 
and try to get some fresh milk and eggs there. They 
made their boat fast on the shore, and thoughtlessly 
both left her to go up to the house. It was a small 
house, and as they approached they were surprised to 
see the door open and a band of a dozen or more 
children rush forth to met them. 

“ I wonder if they all live there,” said Henry. 

41 I guess so,” replied David ; 44 there’s no other 
house anywhere near that they could live in if they 
wanted to.” 

The appearance of the place was not particularly 
reassuring, and yet the boys enjoyed the relief from 
the cramped quarters of the 44 Corporal ” so much that 
they remained for a longer time than they expected, 
playing with the children and talking with the 
family; as a consequence, nearly two hours had 
elapsed before they started to return to their boat, 
and as they walked slowly on, they were talking and 
thinking of nothing but the experiences through 
which they had recently passed. 

But as they came near to the shore they saw 
another boat about the size of their own just landing, 
and two men on board evidently making free with the 
44 Corporal.” The boys started to run, an undefined 


234 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


fear in the heart of each, and as they approached they 
found their fears more than fulfilled. 

With a startled exclamation, Henry said, “Why, 
that’s the man that stole our boat ; that’s the very 
fellow that got away from us at Toronto.” 

“Yes, and that’s not the worst of it,” replied 
David, “for that curse of the lake, Smith, who is 
always everywhere, is with him too, and I don’t be- 
lieve it promises any good for us either.” 

“ Shall we go on or stop here ? ” said Henry. 

David hesitated a moment, and then, ashamed to 
give up without the appearance of a struggle, he 
called to his companion to come on, and both boys 
started on the run for the boat. A laugh from the 
men greeted them as they approached, and Smith’s 
companion said, “You will steal a boat, will you? 
You will try to take this craft away from me and run 
me ashore, will you ? Perhaps you’ll take it again. 
Oh, yes ! perhaps you’ll take it again, and then per- 
haps you won’t,” and he gave a loud laugh, as he saw 
how troubled the boys were. 

At last David said, “ Then you are going to take 
away our boat from us, are you ? ” 

“ Yes,” said the man, “ that’s just it, and we’re 
going to take something besides that.” 

“ What’s that ? ” said David. 

“We’re going to take you,” replied the man, “so 
step aboard both of you, and be lively about it.” 


CAPTURED 


235 


“I’m not so sure it’s a good thing to take the 
boys,” said Smith, in a low tone to his companion. 
“We could leave them here, and they wouldn’t make 
much trouble for us.” 

“ No,” said his companion, “ that wouldn’t do ; 
they’ve got to go with us. They’d be sure to find 
some way out of this, and make lots of trouble for us, 
to say nothing about their wanting this boat again.” 

“All right,” replied Smith, who seemed to give 
way to his companion somewhat reluctantly, “ you 
can take them with you,” and he ordered both the 
boys to step on board the “Corporal.” 

Smith, however, took the other boat, leaving his 
companion to manage the “ Corporal,” and both set 
sail at once. The boys had no idea where they were 
to be carried. The sun already was getting low, 
and as they saw the long beams of light thrown over 
the lake, it seemed to them as if darkness was creep- 
ing over their hopes also. But Smith soon disap- 
peared from sight, and the boys tried to engage their 
captor in conversation and learn what their destina- 
tion was to be, but the man refused to tell them this, 
although he would talk with them on other subjects. 

“ Oh, the Yanks are no good,” he said, “ and 
Smith and I are more for the other side now, though 
we are for ourselves a great deal more than we are 
for either. Who wants to be ordered around by a 
lot of men when he can have his own way, and make 


236 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


what he wants for himself out of both sides, who are 
made up mostly of fools ? ” 

As the darkness deepened the man did not stop in 
his course, and David became more and more con- 
vinced that he was making for the St. Lawrence. 

“ I think he’s bound for Smith’s headquarters,” 
said David in a low tone to Henry. 

“ Perhaps they’ll take us farther down the river,” 
said Henry. “ There are plenty of the British farther 
down the river, you know.” 

“Well, we shall not have to wait very long to see,” 
said David. “We can’t tell, but it seems like a hard 
ending for our trip, after we’ve gone clear over to 
Toronto, and found out just what we wanted, to get 
scooped up by this villain when we’re almost in sight 
of home.” But the “ Corporal ” kept steadily on during 
the night, their captor evidently knowing his way 
thoroughly, and early the next day they found that 
they were among the islands of the St. Lawrence. 

“ That’s what he’s going to do,” said David to 
Henry. “ He’s going to take us to Smith’s island, 
and there’s no knowing what’ll happen to us there.” 

David was correct in his surmise, and soon the “ Cor- 
poral ” was fast at the dock at which they had landed 
under far different circumstances not many months 
before. They were greatly surprised to see that 
Smith himself was one of the first men that came 
down to meet them. He gave the boys a grin as he 


CAPTURED 


237 


proached which was not at all reassuring, and at 
once took them in charge. 

“We’re going to keep you youngsters here,” hie 
said, “for a while, and you’ll be our prisoners. If 
you behave yourselves, you won’t get into any trouble. 
W e shall give you the liberty of the island part of the 
time when the men are around, but if you make any 
attempt to get away, they’ve all got orders to shoot 
you at the first sign. There won’t be any use in your 
trying it, and if you want to breathe, you’d better 
guard your breathing apparatus pretty careful like.” 

The boys apparently gave in to their captors and 
kept about the cave all that day. At night they 
were to sleep among the men, and a blanket was 
given each, and for all that the day was so warm 
they found their coverings a source of comfort in the 
cool night. The other men paid but little attention 
to the boys, although David felt certain that they 
were watchful, and that any attempt to get away 
from the island would bring a shot from them. 

Henry was soon asleep, but it was long before 
David closed his eyes. The heavy breathing of the 
men asleep on the floor, the thought of his own 
home, his chagrin at his capture, and the uncertainty 
as to what lay before them, kept him wide awake for 
a long time ; but at last, worn out by his efforts and 
his thoughts, he rolled himself in his blanket and 
soon was as soundly asleep as the others. 


238 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XXVI 

THE DWARF USES WINGS 

rflHE men were called to breakfast long before sun- 
rise, and tbe boys rose with the others, although 
David felt but little refreshed by the few hours of 
sleep which he had had. He watched the man who 
was preparing breakfast for the company and was im- 
pressed by his peculiar appearance. He was almost 
a dwarf, although his body was as long as that of 
ordinary men. PI is legs and arms seemed to be only 
appendages, and were so short that David found him- 
self wondering how he was able to do his work. 

“ If I met him on a dark night,” said David to 
Henry, “ I should give him all the road, for in spite of 
his being so short he looks strong enough to bend an 
iron crowbar with his hands, and I half believe he 
could, too.” He seemed to be aware that the boys 
were watching him with interest, and frequently 
went out of his way to come near them ; and when- 
ever he approached he gave them a long, slow wink 
with one eye, which would have made the boys laugh 
heartily if they had not been prisoners of Smith in his 


THE DWARF USES WINGS 


239 


cave. The very thought of where they were made 
them glance about their surroundings curiously. All 
around the large cave were chests that looked as 
if they might contain something of value, while guns 
and swords were to be seen on every side. They 
heard Smith say that he was going away for the day, 
and his mood apparently was one that promised no 
good to the boys. 

“ Let them have the run of the island,” said Smith 
to a man whom he left in charge, as with about a 
dozen of his men he sailed away. 

“They can’t get off, there isn’t a boat they can 
get,” he called out as he stepped on board. The boys 
watched the party as they set sail, and then on the 
American shore in the distance they could see some 
men who were chopping. They stopped to watch 
them, heartily wishing that they were of their num- 
ber. 

“I should think they’d drive Smith out of this 
place,” said Henry to David as they walked slowly 
about the island. “Why, just see all those men over 
there on the farther shore chopping. There must be 
a dozen of them, and Smith hasn’t over twenty-five 
men here. Now, I should think they’d come over and 
drive him out some dark night. Well, it’s a good 
deal easier to talk about than it is to do it, though. 
It would take a pretty large force to drive a gang out 
of this cave, and they got it stocked up so they could 


240 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


stand a long siege ; besides, there are not men enough 
on the river to spare for an expedition down here so 
long as Smith doesn’t do any damage. If he did, I 
presume they’d get after him in short order.” 

But the boys found the time dragging on their 
hands. There was nothing for them to do, and the 
only one who would talk with them was this dwarf 
they had noticed, and his conversation was almost as 
strange as his body. “Wings ” was his great theme. 
“ Wings, wings ! Just wait till you see ’em grow,” he 
would say, and then he would wave his short arms 
after the manner of a cock stretching his neck when 
he crows. 

“‘Wings’? What do you mean?” said Henry; 
but the only reply the dwarf would make would be 
to wink after his labored manner, and to repeat his 
strange words, “ Wings, wings is the things, wings ! 
You just wait till you see ’em grow,” and then he 
would laugh and slap his sides, and repeat the strange 
wink which seemed to afford him so much delight. 

Many times the boys met him during the day, and 
every time the dwarf would stop them with his 
strange hail, “ Wings, wings is the things ! Just 
wait till you see ’em grow,” and then repeat the 
strange wink which evidently he thought would give 
the boys as much pleasure as it did him. 

David could form no conjecture as to what Smith’s 
plans concerning them were. Whether he intended 


THE DWARF USES WINGS 


241 


to keep them there for a long time or not, or to send 
them to some other place, he could not determine. 
He knew that his captors were dangerous men, and 
would have no scruples that would prevent them 
from dealing violently with their prisoners, if such 
action were demanded, and yet David had little 
fear for his own personal safety, and was chiefly 
troubled to know what Smith’s ultimate plan was 
to be. 

It was late at night before the leader returned, 
and all the men except the two who were on guard 
were fast asleep when he entered the cave. The 
next day he was evidently preparing for another 
' departure, and the boys once more followed the men 
down to the shore as they made their boat ready to 
sail away ; but this morning Smith seemed to be 
waiting for something or for some one, and David 
soon saw what it was, for in her little canoe he soon 
caught sight of Smith’s daughter, as she swept over 
the river almost as swift as an arrow. 

She did not approach the dock where they were, 
but beached her canoe in a little cove on one side 
of the island, and then withdrew with her father 
among the trees, where they occasionally could be 
seen, evidently engaged in a very earnest conversar 
tion. 

For several mornings this same course of action 
was followed, the daughter coming over early to 


242 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


the island in her little canoe, which she each time 
left in the same little cove. The dwarf had more 
and more to say of “ wings,” and each day cautioned 
the boys to be on their guard so that they “ could see 
’em grow.” 

“ Wings, wings is the things ! Just wait till you 
see ’em grow.” This seemed to exhaust the fund of 
his active conversation, although every time he fol- 
lowed this strange statement with a wink and leer 
that to the boys seemed more and more marked each 
* day. One morning, after several days had passed, 
the boys stood by the dock and were watching 
Smith’s daughter, as, according to her custom, she 
came over the river in her little canoe, which she 
landed with the skill that called forth the praises of 
all who saw her, and had gone among the trees with 
her father, as her custom was. David became satis- 
fied that reports from different parts of the country 
were brought to her each day, and that she came 
over to the island to inform her father of what she 
had heard, so that he could make his plans accord- 
ingly. 

As the boys stood by the dock this morning, the 
dwarf passed them, and when he was a few steps 
beyond them he turned about and gave them his 
usual salutation, “ Wings, wings is the things ! Just 
watch ’em till you see ’em grow ; ” but the manner 
in which he spoke was so different from that which 


THE DWARF USES WINGS 


243 


he usually used that the boys were interested at 
once, and David said to Henry, “ I believe he’s 
got something on hand this morning. He’s up to 
some game. I wonder what it is,” and they slowly 
followed him as he walked along the shore. 

Suddenly, when he had passed out of their sight, they 
saw a great commotion in the midst of the men behind 
them at the dock. They shouted, and one shout was 
quickly followed by another, which brought Smith 
and his daughter at once from the woods. The 
boys looked about, but could see no cause for the 
excitement, although the attention of all seemed 
directed towards something that was not far from 
them. They turned about, and off on the river they 
saw the dwarf in the canoe in which Smith’s daughter 
had crossed, evidently making for the farther shore. 
His short arms plied the paddle in a marvellous way, 
and the little canoe, made of birch bark, hardly 
seemed to touch the water. 

44 That explains his 4 wings.’ He’s been planning to 
fly away,” said David to Henry. 44 Now we’ll watch 
’em till we see ’em grow.” 

“ He’s headed straight for that place where those 
men are chopping,” said Henry, 44 and I hope he’ll 
make it.” 

44 He’ll have to travel,” said David, 44 or they’ll get 
him,” for two of Smith’s companions had quickly 
jumped into a row-boat and were pursuing the dwarf, 


244 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


exerting all the strength they had. Swift as the 
canoe was, the boat which was pursuing it was 
swifter, but the distance between them, while steadily 
becoming less, was still great enough to prevent the 
men from using their guns to advantage. 

The eyes of all on the island were upon the two 
little boats on the river. They could also see that 
the men on the farther shore had stopped their chop- 
ping and were as much interested in the race as were 
the boys. The dwarf did not slacken his speed, and 
before his pursuers could overtake him he had landed 
on the farther shore, and the boys saw him as he 
waddled up into the midst of the choppers. But the 
men who were pursuing him did not stop, and quickly 
arrived at the place where the choppers were. The 
boys could see that an angry controversy then took 
place, although none of the words could be heard. 
Evidently the choppers did not intend to allow the 
pursuers to take the dwarf back with them, and at 
last the two men returned to the island. Curses and 
shouts greeted them on their return, Smith apparently 
being the most angry of them all. 

“ There’s no use,” said he at last, 44 in going after 
them with such men as I have here, for it will only 
make trouble. The soldiers at Clayton wouldn’t be 
very likely to come for us if we did, I think,” and a 
smile crept over his face ; 44 but there isn’t any use in 
our going for them either, so we’ll just let well 


THE DWARF USES WINGS 


245 


enough alone. Besides, I’ve got some other plans I 
want to carry out, but I’d rather have given a thou- 
sand dollars than have that little imp of Satan get 
away from us. He’ll make more trouble than all the 
men at Sackett’s Harbor could, — at least all the 
officers.” 

But his daughter meanwhile had taken the boat 
which the men had used and had started on her 
return. The boys admired her bravery and the cool- 
ness with which she pulled for the shore. 

“ There must be some good reason,” David thought, 
“ why those men don’t trouble Smith’s family. I 
can’t make much out of it at all.” But Smith was 
in a bad humor. He evidently was not pleased 
at the escape of the dwarf, whose wings had now 
grown, and whose strange words the boys now 
understood. 

The boys walked at a respectful distance, trying 
to escape the notice of Smith, but as he turned about 
quickly his eye fell on the young captives. 

“The very thing,” he said to himself. “ The very 
thing; why didn’t I think of it before ? Come here, 
you ! ” he called out to the boys. “I’ve something in 
mind for you,” he added savagely. The boys were 
silent, afraid to venture any reply, and yet fearful of 
what was coming. 

“ Can’t you talk when I speak to you ? ” said 
Smith again, savagely. 


246 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“We can if we know what to say,” said David 
quietly. 

“Well, I’ve something for you to say, because I’ve 
something to say to you that will interest you 
mightily,” and he gave an ugly laugh as he spoke the 
words. “ Come on you, both of you,” and the boys, 
wondering what there was before them, left the 
shore and followed the leader as he led the way 
back to the cave. 


PERRY’S VICTORY 


247 


CHAPTER XXVII 


perry’s victory 


TTEMAN JEDUTHAN CHUBB on the deck of 
the “Lawrence ” talking with young Alexander 
Perry was a far different man from the Heman we 
have seen as a prisoner of the British. Jnst how he 
came to be where he was, he himself could hardly 
have explained, other than by knowing that his rov- 
ing habit had allowed him to rest but a little time in 
any place, and had brought him on until somehow 
he became a member of Perry’s force. Not as a reg- 
ular seaman, for Heman knew but few of the nautical 
terms and had almost no experience on the water, 
but as an acquaintance and friend of his young 
brother, Perry had allowed him to remain, and gradu- 
ally he had come to be considered as at home on the 
“ Lawrence.” 

“ My brother is sick,” said Alexander, “ and I half 
believe it’s just waiting for a sight of the British fleet 
that has made him so.” 

“ I’m very well satisfied as it is,” replied Heman. 
“I’m contented, and I don’t see just where the 


248 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


fun comes in when two boats fire hot shots into each 
other.” 

Young Alexander laughed as he said, “ But we 
didn’t come all the way from Newport just to have 
a picnic on Lake Erie, we came for business,” and 
the young boy’s eyes snapped as he spoke, as if the 
weight of the enterprise rested upon him. 

The fleet meanwhile passed out from behind the 
island into the open lake, and now were within five 
or six miles of the enemy. It was a beautiful Sep- 
tember day. Heman noticed, as he looked up into the 
sky, that not a cloud could be seen. The air was soft 
and mellow, and not even a mist appeared upon the 
waters. The wind was light and variable. Sud- 
denly a cry of “ Sail ho ! ” was heard, which Lieuten- 
ant Forrest at once repeated to Perry. Ill as he was, 
the Rhode Islander roused himself and gave the order 
to Taylor, his sailing-master, “ Run to leeward of the 
island.” 

“ Then you will have to engage the enemy to 
leeward,” replied Taylor, remonstrating. 

“ I don’t care,” replied Perry. “ To windward or 
to leeward, they shall fight to-day.” 

Accordingly the signal to “ wear ship ” followed 
immediately, and as the light wind shifted a little 
the squadron cleared the island and called the 
weather gauge. The British hove to and in close 
order awaited the attack. 


PERRY’S VICTORY 


249 


“ They look fine, don’t they ? ” said Alexander to 
Heman. “ They are all painted up new and have 
got their colors flying, and they think they’re going to 
do something. That ship is the 4 Detroit,’ ” the young 
sailor added, pointing toward one of the distant fleet. 
44 I know the names of every one of them off there, too. 
That other ship is the ‘ Queen Charlotte,’ and that 
schooner is the 4 Lady Prevost,’ while the brig is the 
4 Hunter,’ and the sloop is the 4 Little Belt,’ and that 
other schooner the ‘Chippewa.’” 

44 You’re posted, my friend, aren’t you ? ” said 
Heman, as he looked over the lake in the direction 
of the British, wondering at the enthusiasm of his 
young friend and not at all surprised at his own lack 
of it. 

44 Just look around you at our fleet, will you ? ” re- 
plied Alexander enthusiastically. 44 Here’s this brig 
the 4 Lawrence,’ and that other brig is the 4 Niagara.’ 
She’s got twenty guns, the same as we have. That 
smaller brig is the 4 Caledonia,’ and just look at 
those schooners,” he added quickly, 44 the 4 Ariel,’ 
4 Scorpion,’ 4 Tigress,’ and 4 Porcupine ; ’ they haven’t 
got many guns, but they’ll use what they’ve got. 
Then there’s the sloop ‘Trippe,’ she’s got one gun, 
too. It’s too bad the 4 Ohio ’ has gone to Erie for 
supplies, but we’ll manage to get along somehow 
without her.” 

Perrjr knew that at long range he would be no 


250 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

match for the enemy, so he resolved to close np. A 
little after ten o’clock Perry’s line was formed, with the 
“ Niagara ” in the van. The “ Lawrence ” was cleared 
for action, and Perry ordered the battle-flag, which we 
have already described, and having the words upon it, 
“ Don’t give up the ship,” to be run up. This flag 
was between eight and nine feet square, and as the 
letters were about a foot in length the motto could 
he seen by the entire squadron. Just before it was 
run up to the main royal masthead of the flag-ship 
the Commodore had turned to his men and addressed 
them, saying, “ My brave lads, this flag contains 
the last words of Captain Lawrence. Shall I 
hoist it ? ” 

“Ay, ay, sir,” they shouted, and cheer after 
cheer arose from the whole squadron. 

The Commodore knew that the men would be 
hungry before the action was over, and so he ordered 
refreshments to be distributed then. The deck was 
sprinkled with wet sand so that the feet of the men 
would not slip when blood began to flow, a proceed- 
ing which Heman watched with a good deal of un- 
easiness. Every man was ordered to his position, 
the course was slightly changed, and the squadron 
moved forward. 

It was just fifteen minutes before twelve o’clock 
when the bugle sounded on the “ Detroit,” and the 
British bands struck up “ Rule Britannia,” and the 


KERRY’S VICTORY 


251 


twenty-four pound shot was sent over the water 
towards the “ Lawrence,” but it fell short, as the 
Americans were still a mile and a half away. About 
five minutes later, however, a shot from the “ Detroit ” 
went crashing through the bulwarks of the “ Law- 
rence.” 

“ Steady, boys, steady ! ” called out the Commodore, 
while Heman noticed how his dark eye flashed as he 
spoke. Slowly the American vessels, with what wind 
there was abeam, moved onward, and Heman, recall- 
ing something of his experience as a schrol -master, 
said to his young friend, “ Your line forms an angle 
with the British of about fifteen degrees. Acute 
angle, fifteen degrees. An acute angle is ” — 

But just then the signal was given for the Ameri- 
cans to begin, and the first shot was fired by the 
“ Scorpion.” The “ Lawrence,” which was now suf- 
fering a good deal from the enemy’s shot, opened fire 
upon the “ Detroit ” with her long bow-gun, and in 
a moment the action became general. 

The American flag-ship became the centre of the 
enemy’s attention, as they planned to destroy her and 
then cut up the others one by one. Perry perceived 
that he was still too far away to damage the enemy 
materially, so he sent word from vessel to vessel, by 
trumpet, for all to bear down upon the “ Detroit ” for 
close combat, but for some reason the “ Niagara ” 
kept at a distance. 


252 


THE BOY OFFICERS OB 1812 


For two hours the “ Lawrence ” bore the brunt of 
battle with a force of twice her size, and only slightly 
aided by the other boats. Her rigging soon was 
nearly all shot away, her sails torn, her spars splin- 
tered, and her guns dismounted. Heman marked 
young Alexander Perry when a splinter struck him 
down, but he soon saw him rise again. 

He wondered how he could be so brave when he 
himself was frightened almost out of his senses. Two 
musket-balls had previously gone through Alexander’s 
hat, but he still remained in his place. Twenty-two 
of the crew had been killed and six wounded. They 
all were looking for the 44 Niagara,” wondering why 
' she did not come up. At last, when the guns of the 
“ Lawrence ” became silent, and no signals were dis- 
played by her, the 44 Niagara,” with the others, bore 
down to her relief. At first she bore away towards 
the head of the enemy’s squadron, and Captain 
Elliott sent a boat over to bring some shot ; but that 
was about all he did then. 

Commodore Perry had fired the last heavy gun 
himself, his purser and chaplain helping him. Al- 
most any other man would have given up now, with 
only fourteen persons on deck unhurt, and only 
nine of those seamen ; but 44 Don’t give up the ship ” 
was more than a motto, and turning to Yarnall the 
Commander said to him, 44 1 leave the 4 Lawrence ’ in 
your charge. You may hold it or surrender, as your 
judgment shall dictate.” 


PERRY’S VICTORY 


253 


Meanwhile he had ordered his boat to be lowered 
and his banner taken down, although he left the 
Stars and Stripes floating over the battered “Law- 
rence,” and taking his broad pennant with him, and 
leading his little brother by the hand, with four seamen, 
he stepped into the little boat and started for the 
“ Niagara.” Commodore Perry stood erect during the 
passage. His men begged him to sit down and not 
expose himself unnecessarily to danger — and great 
danger there indeed was. The British commodore, 
whose flag-ship was almost dismantled now, and who 
was himself badly wounded, as he saw what Perry 
was trying to do, quickly decided that if the American 
commodore should reach the “Niagara” unharmed, 
it certainly would go hard with his own fleet, so he 
ordered all the guns to be brought to bear upon the 
little boat carrying the six souls from the “ Lawrence ” 
to the “Niagara.” Their oars were splintered, the 
bullets pierced the sides of the boat, the men were 
covered with the water thrown up by the grape-shot 
that fell near them, but still they kept on, and in 
a few minutes they all climbed up on the deck of the 
“ Niagara ” unharmed, and a shout that could have 
been heard for miles went up from the American 
seamen. 

The gun-boats were ordered up, the blue banner 
was at once displayed, and the signal for close action 
was given, and cheers rose from the entire squadron 


254 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


as the Americans bore down upon the British line 
only half a mile away. 

Meanwhile, for the sake of the few men that were 
left on the “ Lawrence,” the flag was lowered by the 
brave Yarn all. As it trailed, a shout went up from 
the British which stirred once more the wounded 
men on board, and they called out, “ Sink the ship ! 
Sink the ship ! Let us all sink together ! ” But they 
were saved from this sad fate, for in less than a half- 
hour afterwards the men wept and shouted, and sang 
and prayed, as Commodore Perry stepped again upon 
her deck. 

Eight minutes after Perry had made his way 
through the British line the “ Detroit ” struck her 
colors, and all the others, except the “ Little Belt ” 
and “Chippewa,” which tried to escape and were 
soon captured, followed her example. It was now 
three o’clock in the afternoon. The noise of the 
cannon ceased, and stillness once more came over 
the lake. 

The “Lawrence,” although she had struck her 
colors, had not been taken possession of, and once 
more, with a feeble shout, her crew flung out her 
Stars and Stripes from the masthead. The victory 
was complete, and Commodore Perry at once 
wrote his letters. To General Harrison he wrote 
the brief word which is so often quoted to this 


PERRY’S VICTORY 


255 


We have met the enemy, and they are ours : two ships, 
two brigs, one schooner, and one sloop. 

Yours with great respect and esteem, 

0. H. Perry. 

And to the Secretary of the Navy he wrote as fol- 
lows : 

U. S. Brig u |Niagara,” off the Western Sister, 
Head of Lake Erie, September 10, 1813, 4 P.M. 

Sir : It has pleased the Almighty to give to the arms 
of the United States a signal victory over their enemies 
on this lake. The British squadron, consisting of two 
ships, two brigs, one schooner, and one sloop, have this 
moment surrendered to the force under my command 
after a sharp conflict. 

I have the honor to be, Sir, 

Very respectfully, your obedient servant, 

0. H. Perry. 

Hon. William Jones, Secretary of the Navy. 

Who can tell what the effect of this victory was ? 
The British force had consisted of a little more than 
five hundred men, and while the American com- 
modore had nominally four hundred and ninety men, 
one hundred and sixteen of these were sick at the 
time, and one-fourth of them were raw volunteers, 
and another fourth were negroes. 

Heman, who was among those who were saved on 
the “ Lawrence,” remained, while Perry, on her deck, 


256 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


all covered with blood as it was, and with the bodies 
of dead men, received the enemy on board. 

Commodore Perry solemnly yet kindly received 
one British officer from each of the captured vessels. 
As one man said of him afterwards, “ He was a 
Christian gentleman.” He allowed the British to re- 
tain their weapons, and inquired kindly about Com- 
modore Barclay and the other wounded men. At 
twilight the bodies of all the dead except the officers 
were wrapped in shrouds, each containing a cannon- 
ball, and, after the burial service had been read, were 
lowered to the waters of the lake. 

In after years He man used to sing from two war 
songs which became very popular the following 
stanzas : 

“ O’er the mountains the sun of our fame was declining, 

And on Thetis’ billowy breast 

The cold orb had reposed, all his splendor resigning, 
Bedimmed by the mists of the West. 

The prospect that rose to the patriot’s sight 
Was cheerless, and hopeless, and dreary; 

But a bolt burst the cloud, and illumined the night 
That enveloped the waters of Erie.” 

“ Bold Barclay one day to Proctor did say, 

‘ I’m tired of Jamaica and cherry; 

So let us go down to that new floating town, 

And get some American Perry.’ 

Oh, cheap American Perry ! 

Most Pleasant American Perry ! 

We need only all bear down, knock and call, 

And we’ll have the American Perry.” 


A STRANGE VISITOR 


257 


CHAPTER XXVIII 

A STRANGE VISITOR 

ANCE more there was a gathering at the home of 
^ the Fields. All the friends whom we have 
mentioned as accustomed to meet there were present 
except the missing boys. Mr. Spicer had brought the 
word from Toronto of Elijah’s recovery and the 
promise that in a short time he would once more 
be with them. The rejoicing which the message 
had produced had been dimmed somewhat by the 
continued absence of David and Henry, — an absence 
which the passing days did not explain. It would 
soon be time now for Elijah to return, and they were 
not without hopes that the other boys, also, somehow 
would come home at the same time. 

It may seem somewhat strange that Elijah should 
have been left by his father in a place so distant as 
Toronto, and that strangers should have been per- 
mitted to serve as his nurses, but the times were 
somewhat rougher than those in which we live, and 
war leaves but little opportunity for sentiment ; and 
when Mr. Spicer had satisfied himself that his boy 


258 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


was being well cared for, and he had the promise 
that he would be returned soon, he had to rest con- 
tent. He had but little fear that Elijah would be 
prevented from coming, and the troublous times 
demanded his own presence at home. 

The conversation had turned at last upon the 
missing David and Henry. The oar which Mr. 
Spicer had picked up in the lake, and which he rec- 
ognized as his own and the one the boys had taken 
with them when they sailed away in the “ Corporal,” 
had been the only clew that had been found, unless 
the interview with Smith should be also considered 
as one. This, however, had been so unsatisfactory, 
and had thrown so little light upon the mystery, that 
they felt they had no further knowledge than they 
had had before. There was a possibility that they 
might have been lost in the lake, and the oar which 
they had found perhaps did point to some such 
event ; but whatever the fears they had, they all pro- 
fessed, to believe the boys would soon appear and ex- 
plain their absence. If they had been drowned, 
something besides the oar would have been found 
before this. 

The evening wore on, and still they talked. The 
hermit was the most positive of all that the boys 
would soon come home. Just why he believed it, or 
what were the grounds of his hope, he could not ex- 
plain, unless it was his general confidence in David’s 


A STRANGE VISITOR 


259 


ability to take care of himself. The two mothers 
were the most fearful, and it was to reassure them 
that the most of them were talking. 

44 It’s very dark out of doors,” said the hermit, 44 and 
raining some. I think a storm is coming, and it’s get- 
ting time for the September rains, anyway.” 

“ Poor Henry ! ” sighed Mrs. Spicer. 

“ Poor David ! ” joined in Mrs. Field. 

The Spicers were urged to remain overnight, as 
they had often done before, and when Mr. Spicer 
had gone to the door to look at the weather he con- 
sented, and the conversation was again resumed. 

44 I should start right out for them, and begin a 
search for them, as they did for me,” said Andrew, 
44 only I haven’t had the slightest idea where to look, 
nor where to begin. I’ve waited every day, hoping 
some word would come, and I hope it will yet.” 

44 1 know, I know all about it,” joined in the cook, 
anxious to take his part in the conversation and 
express the interest which he at all times felt in his 
young friends. 

44 It’s raining harder than ever,” said Andrew, as a 
heavier dash of rain came against the window. 44 It’s 
too early for the September gale, isn’t it ? ” 

44 Yes,” replied the hermit. 44 We shan’t have any 
trouble in knowing that when it comes. I’ve seen 
that tear up great trees by the roots.” 

44 What’s that ? ” said the cook quickly. 44 There’s 


260 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


some one at the door, I think. It sounds like some 
one rapping.” 

“ I don’t think so, I didn’t hear anybody,” said 
Andrew, as he went to the door, and after glancing 
about he returned with the word that nothing was to 
be seen. 

In a few moments the door suddenly flew open, 
startling the entire company, and as Andrew rose 
to close it, with a startled exclamation he stepped 
outside into the storm, and the sound of his voice 
could occasionally be heard as if he was engaged in 
conversation with some one. Mr. Spicer had just 
started to go to the door himself, when it was once 
more opened, and Andrew reentered accompanied by 
a very strange-looking being. His body seemed as 
long as that of an ordinary man, but his legs and arms 
were so short that they gave him a very ludicrous ap- 
pearance. The company arose as the dwarf — for it 
was our old acquaintance whom we met on Smith’s 
island — entered. Surprised as they were they re- 
mained silent, waiting for him to explain his visit. 

For some time he continued silent also, and then, 
looking about him with a quizzical expression, and 
satisfied that he was in the presence of friends, he 
said, “ Wings, wings is the things ! If you’d just 
watched ’em you could have seen ’em grow.” 

His words did not seem to throw any light on his 
strange coming, and the silence and surprise con- 



u 


Andrew reentered accompanied by a very strange-looking being ” Page 260, 

















A STRANGE VISITOR 


261 


tinued. Again the little man began, “ Wings, wings 
is the things ! I’ve had ’em, and I’ve used ’em, too,” 
and he gave a chuckle that startled them all. 

“ When did you have wings ? ” said Andrew, at 
last. 

“ Oh, a good many times,” replied the dwarf. 
“ Wings is the things ! I’ve had ’em and I’ve used ’em.” 

But with all the questions which Andrew put 
to him he could gain but little information. David’s 
mother meanwhile had quietly left the room, and 
soon returned with some food which she placed upon 
the table and urged the strange visitor to eat. 

The dwarf said nothing, but the look which he 
gave Mrs. Field was one of gratitude, and he at once 
approached the table, and standing with his head not 
much above its edge began to eat as only a hungry 
or a starving man can. 

While this was going on the company was silent, 
save for an occasional whisper from one to another, and 
watched the strange being as he devoured the food 
which had been placed before him. At last, when 
his hunger appeared to have been satisfied, he pushed 
back the plate, and turning his face once more towards 
the company said, “ See my wings ? I’ve beat ’em. 
I had ’em, and I used ’em. Oh, wings, wings is the 
tilings ! ” and as the company seemed as confused 
as before he gave a chuckle and lapsed into silence. 

When, however, Mrs. Field turned to him and said, 


262 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ How did you happen to be out in such a storm as 
this ? W ere you looking for our house, or only seeking 
shelter? You are welcome to it in either case,” the 
dwarf looked at her steadily for a moment, and said : 

“ They’re alike ; they’re as like as two wings. Oh, 
wings is the things ! ” and once more he chuckled as 
he caught sight of the puzzled look upon Andrew’s 
face ; but the look of sorrow so plainly manifest upon 
the face of Mrs. Field evidently touched his heart, 
and in broken sentences, strangely interrupted by the 
expression, of which he seemed to be so fond, that 
“wings were the things,” and with an occasional sob 
and intervals of silence thrown in, which intensified 
the interest of his listeners, they learned the outlines 
of his story. 

He had been born in England ; he did not know just 
when nor where. His father had been a sailor, and 
the earliest recollections he had were of seeing him 
return from his drunken sprees and abuse his mother. 
In one of these times, when, as a little lad, he had 
ventured to interfere, his father had hurled him down 
the stairs. His mother had died soon after, and he 
had gone to work, and lived with a sister, who had 
since disappeared and been lost to him forever. 

Meanwhile the years had been passing over him, 
but, for some strange reason, his body had not grown, 
or, rather, had been growing into the strange form 
which they saw before them. At first he had worked 


A STRANGE VISITOR 


263 


in a theatre, and had been laughed at for the ludi- 
crous sight he presented, or been cursed and kicked, 
as the mood seized his companions. At last one of 
the men who was a frequenter of the theatre, out of 
pity for him, or from some other motive, had rescued 
him from his surroundings. 

The friendship which the dwarf felt for his rescuer 
had been very strong at first, and he had put up with 
the abuse which had been heaped upon him almost as 
abundantly as in the theatre, out of gratitude for what 
at first had seemed a release from his sufferings. 

His master, for such, in fact, he was, at length had 
left England and come to Canada, and the dwarf had 
followed him, and clung to him in spite of the abuse 
which daily increased, and the evil habits of his 
master, which, all the time, became worse. Together 
they had wandered from place to place, occasionally 
doing a little work, or the dwarf picking up a few 
pence by his droll antics upon the street. At times 
he had thought he would leave his master, but the 
fear with which he had regarded him, and his igno- 
rance as to what he could do, or where he could go, 
kept him by his side. 

At last the war had been declared, and his vaga- 
bond master had decided to enter it, “ not in the reg- 
ular way,” said the dwarf; “he had wings too. 
Wings is the things ! He could just fly from one side 
to the other, and away from both sides if he wanted 


264 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


to, too. He joined a man named Smith, who lives 
down on the river, and fights either side part of the 
time, and both sides all the time.” 

At the word “Smith” the company, which had 
been listening intently, became much more interested, 
and Charity, Andrew’s wife, in her eagerness, at once 
broke out, “ Oh, if you know Smith, then you know 
something about our boys. Tell us where they are, 
if you do. Have you seen them ? Do you know any- 
thing about them ? ” 

But the drawf became silent, and would reply 
almost nothing to the questions which were put to 
him from every side. At length, when Mrs. Field, 
her eyes filled with tears, had turned to him and 
said, “ If you do know anything about our boys, I wish 
you would tell us where they are,” he had seemed 
to be moved. He arose from the floor, on which he 
had been sitting with his back to the fireplace, where 
a great log was burning, and went to the door. 

Andrew at first thought he meant to leave them, 
and had started to follow him, half inclined to lay 
hands upon him in case he attempted to go, and com- 
pel him to tell what he knew ; but the dwarf, when 
he had opened the door and looked in every direction 
out into the storm which now was beating fiercely 
against the house, soon closed it and resumed his 
place upon the floor in front of the fireplace, and 
facing his listeners, who now stood in a semicircle 


A STRANGE VISITOR 


265 


about him looking down into his face with an interest 
and an anxiety they could poorly conceal. 

“Yes,” said the dwarf slowly ; “yes, ‘Smith’s got 
’em. Wings is the things ! I wish they had ’em, 
but they haven’t;” and gradually they drew from 
him the story of the boys’ situation on Smith’s 
island, and the confinement to which they were sub- 
jected there. 

The conversation lasted far into the night. The 
dwarf at times would become silent, and then again 
would talk freely, and they soon found the only way 
they could learn what they wished from him was to 
allow him to have his own way. He would reply to 
Mrs. Field’s questions when he was silent at all 
others, for he seemed to appreciate in a manner her 
affliction and to be touched by her sorrow. 

“ We’ll have to arrange our plans in the morning,” 
said Andrew ; “ we’ve talked and talked without ac- 
complishing much to-night. We’ll talk with this 
stranger again in the morning, and if mother will 
fix him a place to sleep in to-night, we’ll all go to 
bed.” 

But in the morning an obstacle was found in the 
way of their further planning, for when they went 
to the room which had been assigned the dwarf, they 
discovered that he was gone. They searched all about 
the place, but not a trace of him could be found. 
The strange messenger who had brought the strange 


266 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


message, which they scarcely knew whether to be- 
lieve or not, was certainly gone, and they were left 
to follow out their own conjectures, and to decide 
whether the information which he had given was 
reliable or not. 


THE DWARF AGAIN USES WINGS 


267 


CHAPTER XXIX 

THE DWARF AGAIN USES WINGS 

TT7HEN Andrew Field rode back the next morn- 
’ * ing to Sackett’s Harbor, after making a vain 
search for the visitor who had come into his home 
as if dropped by the storm, and whose strange 
presence had made his words seem almost like those 
of a dream, nearly the first person he saw as he 
entered the village was the dwarf. He was covered 
with mud, and was facing several boys who were 
standing near him and with great good-nature were 
trying to get him to enter into conversation with 
them. The dwarf, however, appeared to dislike their 
questions, and was beginning to show some signs of 
anger when, glancing up, he saw Andrew riding 
towards him. At the sight he started on the run to 
meet him, but the run was so much like that of a 
duck when he starts for the water that the boys 
about him were filled with delight and called after 
him all manner of encouraging words. 

As the dwarf drew close to Andrew he -said, 
“ Wings is the things ! I wish I had ’em now and 
I’d get rid of all boys.” 


268 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ Never mind, they won’t bother you now,” said 
Andrew, “ for I’ll protect you. Jump up here in front 
of me,” and reaching down he grasped the dwarf’s 
arm and lifted him up on the horse, seating him in 
front. “Now tell me why you left our house last 
night as you did,” said Andrew as he started his 
horse on a walk. 

“ I was afraid,” said the dwarf in a low tone, — “I 
was afraid Jim or Smith would get me. Jim’s the 
man I live with, — Jim Nairne is his full name.” 

“Well, you had friends about you,” said Andrew. 
“ I don’t think they’d have let you slip away from 
them without a struggle.” 

“ I know it,” said the dwarf ; “ but you don’t know 
those men. Wings is the only things that can keep 
a man out of their way.” 

“What niade you come to our house, anyway?” 
asked Andrew. 

The dwarf looked up and down the street, and 
then drawing Andrew’s head down he whispered, 
“ I wanted to help those boys out of Smith’s 
place. I knew they were from Sackett’s Harbor, 
for they told me so, but I didn’t know just where 
they lived. You see I’ve been laughed at and made 
a clown of by people one moment and kicked by 
them the next, until I felt as if I wasn’t of any use 
in the world, and I don’t think I have been of any 
use, at least not of much; but when I saw those 


THE DWARF AGAIN USES WINGS 


269 


poor fellows down there, while I didn’t know what 
was before them, I knew it couldn’t be anything very 
good that Jim or Smith would give ’em, so I made 
up my mind I’d leave, and help ’em out if I could. 

I thought I’d see how it’d be to do a good turn once 
in my life,” and as Andrew looked down into his 
face he saw traces of tears in the eyes of his strange 
little companion, and he noticed how the expression 
of his face had changed for the better. 

“ You won’t be sorry, I’m sure,” said Andrew as 
he listened while the dwarf told him how he had 
learned where the boys lived, and had sought out their 
home in the driving storm of the previous night. 

Suddenly the little man uttered an exclamation of 
fear and drew closer to his companion. Andrew, 
surprised at the movement, followed the direction of 
the dwarf’s gaze, and saw a man coming down the 
street of whom his little friend evidently seemed in 
great fear. 

The man suddenly stopped as he saw the dwarf, 
evidently recognizing him, and at once crossed over 
the street and approached them. Andrew could feel 
the dwarf tremble, and tried to assure him that no 
harm would be done him. The man evidently was 
very angry, and although the words he uttered were 
in a low tone, Andrew felt certain that if he were 
not present the dwarf would have a hard time of it 
with this stranger, for Andrew, looking carefully at 


270 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


him, was satisfied that he had never seen the man 
before. 

The stranger tried to induce the dwarf to come 
with him. He promised and threatened and coaxed, 
but the dwarf made no reply except to shake his 
head and look to Andrew for help. At last the man 
left them and went on his way towards the dock. 
Andrew turned his horse about and determined to 
follow him at a distance, and slowly went in the direc- 
tion the man had taken, meanwhile listening to the 
words of his companion. 

“ That’s Jim, that’s the very man I was telling you 
about,” whispered the dwarf. “ He’s next boss to 
Smith, but he hasn’t been over here much. He’s 
kept pretty close in the quarters down the river; but 
Smith hasn’t been over here very much lately either, 
so I suppose Jim has begun to have his wings grow ; ” 
and, frightened as he was, he brought a smile to 
Andrew’s face as he repeated his favorite expression, 
“ Wings, wings is the things ! ” 

When Andrew learned that the stranger was a 
companion of Smith’s he put his horse into a run and 
started after him, but when he came to the dock he 
was already in his boat, which was under full sail, and 
at least a hundred yards from the shore. As they 
turned and went back up the street, the dwarf still 
on horseback, Andrew encouraged him to come 
with him to the quarters of Major Forsythe and tell 


THE DWARF AGAIN USES WINGS 


271 


all that he had learned about the boys and the 
condition of affairs on the St. Lawrence. 

“Don’t be afraid,” said Andrew; “this man has 
gone and there’s no one here’ll hurt you, and it’ll be 
all the better for you to make good friends with the 
men in command at this place.” 

“ Do you think Jim’s really gone ? ” said the dwarf. 

“Why, yes, I know he has,” replied Andrew; 
“ didn’t you see him on the lake in his boat ? ” 

“Yes,” said the dwarf; “but he may come back 
again, you know; Jim’s got wings too, and he didn’t 
have to wait for ’em to grow.” 

“Well, we can find out from the Major whether 
he’s coming back again or not, and that’ll be all the 
better for you and us all,” replied Andrew. 

“ I’ll go,” said the dwarf quickly. “ Only I haven’t 
had any breakfast.” 

“ I’ll get you some right away,” said Andrew, and 
he went with his new friend to a place he knew, as 
he was unwilling to have him out of his sight, and 
afterwards led him to the quarters of the Major. 

Andrew had been putting out his horse, and when 
he came back to the place where he had left the 
dwarf he said, “ Why, you have been crying. You 
mustn’t cry ; you must be as old as I am.” 

“ I’m a man in age, but I’m not a man grown,” said 
the dwarf, as he smiled and wiped his eyes. “ I’ve 
been treated like a child all my life, only I should be 


272 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


very sorry for any child who had to take as many 
blows as I have had. I s’pose I act like a child 
because I have been treated so much like one.” 

“ Never mind,” Andrew said gently, “ we shan’t 
forget you over here, especially if we succeed in 
getting the boys out of the clutches of those pirates, 
for that’s just what they are.” 

“ But I’m not sure that the hoys are there now,” 
said the dwarf at last ; “ I heard some talk just before 
I left, three days ago, that they might be taken some- 
where else.” 

“I wonder what Smith wants of them, anyway,” 
said Andrew. “ If he wanted to pay off old scores he’d 
have made short work of it. It’s something else he’s 
got in mind, and I wonder what it is. That’s the 
first place we’ll have to make for, anyway, if we try 
to get them away ; but I don’t know,” said Andrew, 
slowly, to himself, “ what can be done just now.” 

For Andrew had been thinking all night what 
plan could be followed in trying to rescue the boys, 
when the first intimation had come that Smith had 
them concealed somewhere, and as we know there had 
been suspicions for some time that Smith could explain, 
if he chose, where David and Henry were. 

Andrew had sought out Major Forsythe, and had 
requested to have enough men detailed to make a raid 
upon the stronghold this man had on the river ; but 
the Major had explained to him how impossible it was 


THE DWARF AGAIN USES WINGS 


273 


for him to spare any men from the force at Sackett’s 
Harbor, which even then was too small to guard the 
stores which were there. The Major felt the more 
sorry for this because of his own partiality for his 
young friends, who had been of such assistance to him 
at Ogdensburg and Brockville ; but the claims of 
war cannot often be influenced by mere personal 
regard, and the number of men who would be re- 
quired to take the stronghold of Smith, which could 
easily be defended by a smaller body familiar with 
its strong points, he had not dared to send. 

Accordingly, Andrew, when he entered the Major’s 
quarters, had little hope of aid, and in his heart he 
knew the Major was just, for the force at Sackett’s 
Harbor was indeed inadequate for its defence at the 
time. 

They were at once ushered into the presence of the 
Major, and Andrew quickly explained to him the 
message which the dwarf had brought. The Major 
carefully questioned the dwarf, who willingly re- 
sponded to his words, and drew from him all that 
he knew about the plans of Smith, and whether the 
boys were safe or not. 

“ They’re safe, you see,” he said to Andrew, “ and 
Smith can’t want to hold them long. He can’t be 
planning any mischief for them, or he wouldn’t have 
waited so long for that. I have a dim suspicion that 
I know what he wants, and what he’s planned to 


274 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


do,” he added with a smile, “for we aren’t in 
entire ignorance here of what’s going on among the 
islands.” 

“ My friend says that Smith’s right-hand man 
just left here. I couldn’t understand, if he w T as cor- 
rect, how it was that such a man could have entered 
Sackett’s Harbor so easily, and have gone away again 
without a word having been spoken to him. I’m 
afraid he means mischief,” said Andrew. 

The Major smiled as he said, “ I think he does, 
though not of the kind you have in mind. There is 
some mischief afloat, but I don’t think it’s so mnch 
the mischief we shall suffer as the mischief we shall 
inflict. But that’s all I can say to you now,” he 
added, as he saw the question in Andrew’s eyes 
which he would like to ask. “ It’s out of the question 
detailing any men for an expedition against Smith’s 
place down there just now. I’d gladly do it if I 
could ; but it’s a very strong position he has there, and 
with the guns, and desperate characters he has with 
him, it would take a large force to dislodge them. 
I’d do it more quickly for the boys than for almost 
anyone I know. It’s not because I’m not their friend, 
but because of other things which come in to pre- 
vent.” 

“It seems to me,” said Andrew, somewhat dis- 
couraged, “ that we’ve had nothing but bad luck ever 
since the war began — I mean in our family. Some 


THE DWARF AGAIN USES WINGS 


275 


one or other of us is in trouble all the time, and I’ve 
had a good share of it myself,” he added grimly. “ I’m 
not whining, but at the same time it does seem pretty 
hard to know your brother is in trouble and that you 
can’t do anything to help him out. 

44 But you can, Sergeant,” replied the Major, 
44 and you’re going to. But you can’t do it just yet. 
I can’t explain to you now, and you’ll have to rest 
upon my word that something will be done, and that 
before long.” 

44 How long ? ” asked Andrew. 44 A week ? ” 

44 Possibly,” replied the Major ; 44 and it may be two 
or three weeks, but the boys will have to be as con- 
tented as they can where they are. I’m sure I want 
them here almost as much as they want to be here 
themselves, for I need all my Boy Officers of 
1812.” 

Andrew smiled, somewhat cheered by the positive 
way in which the Major spoke, and said, 44 I’m only 
afraid the boys will get into some scrape by trying to 
get away before your plan is carried out. David 
isn’t a boy to sit down quietly in the clutches of a 
man like Smith, who’d make short work of him if he 
really wanted to. I think it’s a good thing Dave 
doesn’t know you’ve made a corporal of him, or he’d 
be for leaving there at once. If I could only get 
word to him somehow that he was to hold on and 
wait for a time, it would be better.” 


276 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ I know,” interrupted the dwarf quickly, “ wings 
is the things ! Just get ’em and use ’em. I’ll get 
word to them myself.” 

“ That’s the plan,” said the Major to Andrew, who 
hesitated a moment. “ That’s the very thing.” 

In accordance with this suggestion the dwarf was 
taken home by Andrew, and the next day given a 
horse which he was to ride to Clayton. Once there 
he wished to be left to himself to follow his own 
devices. It was a strange picture the dwarf pre- 
sented when he was mounted upon the horse. His 
short legs were not long enough to enable him to 
cling to the horse’s back, and so he grasped the mane 
with his hands. Andrew watched him as he started 
and soon disappeared in the midst of the woods. He 
sighed heavily, and as he turned to start for Sackett’s 
Harbor he said to himself, “Well, I only hope some- 
thing will come of it.” 


A STRANGE LETTER 


277 


CHAPTER XXX 

A STRANGE LETTER 

TT7HEN Smith led David and Henry to the interior 
* * of the cave, promising to show them what he 
had for them to do, they had followed with a curi- 
osity mingled with fear. The knowledge which they 
had of their leader, and the reputation in which he 
was held by all who knew him, made them fear that 
the task which he would assign them would be one 
in which they could not engage. David resolved in 
his heart that no matter what Smith asked him to 
do, nor what the consequence might be, if it should 
prove to be anything which his conscience would 
not permit him to engage in, he would refuse. 

When they were inside the cave Smith turned and 
said to them, “ You’ve had a good deal of experience 
among the islands, haven’t you, boys ? ” 

“We’ve been here before,” said David quietly. 

“ Yes, I know,” replied Smith. “ I have good cause 
to remember one of your trips,” and he scowled and 
gave a little laugh which was not at all reassuring 
to his young companions. 


278 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


« David was silent, as he knew that anything he 
might say might irritate their captor, and he did not 
care to increase his anger. 

“ How did yon live when you were down here ? ” 
continued Smith. “ Did you have a cook along with 
you?” 

“No,” replied David. “We each of us took 
his turn at cooking, and we managed to get along 
all right.” 

“ I suppose you knew this little fellow who’s 
been here cooking for us, didn’t you?” continued 
Smith. 

“You mean the dwarf?” said David. 

“ Yes,” replied Smith. “ He’s a funny little fellow. 
He’s had rather a hard time of it through life, and 
was quite a friend of my right-hand man. We never 
thought of his pulling out and leaving us, as we’ve 
always treated him well, and had no thought of his 
being dissatisfied ; but there’s no knowing what these 
funny folks will do, and now he’s gone and left us in 
a box.” 

The boys said nothing, although David thought 
he began to see the point which Smith was trying 
to make. 

“Now, I’ll tell you what,” said their captor. “It 
isn’t the very best kind of a job, and it isn’t what I 
intended to have you do, but if you’ll turn in a little 
spell and do this work which the dwarf was doing, 


A STRANGE LETTER 


279 


you won’t be the losers. There won’t be very many 
here, and your work won’t be very hard either, and if 
you’ll turn to and help us out, I’ll see that you don’t 
lose anything by it.” 

David readily assented to the proposal, as almost 
anything was better than the enforced idleness which 
they had had since their capture, and, besides, there 
was something in Smith’s request which did not 
appear on the surface, or, at least, so David thought. 
It was not a very elevating occupation for the boy 
officer to serve as cook for a band of guerillas, but 
there was one consolation, and that was that he then 
had no suspicion that he was an officer in the Ameri- 
can army. 

The boys at once began their duties. David was 
somewhat depressed, but he was brave enough to 
make the best of the situation. He knew that it 
would be impossible for them to swim to the shore 
of the mainland, and no boat was ever left where 
they could get it. He also knew that they were 
carefully watched, not so much openly as quietly, and 
that some one among their captors knew every move 
which they were making. 

“Never mind, Henry,” he said to his young com- 
panion, “we’ll just make the best of it, and per- 
haps if we do our work pretty well we may throw 
them off their guard or else put their suspicions to 
rest.” 


280 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


But the days passed, and the monotony of cooking 
for the men became almost as great as that which 
they had had when they were doing nothing. At 
all times of the day and night men were coming and 
going, and they required something to eat, as it 
seemed to David, almost every hour. The boys were 
allowed to fish near the shore, but as they were always 
watched, and never were given but one oar, the 
longed-for opportunity of escaping did not come. 
They had almost given up hope of being able to leave 
the island, and yet they continued to be watchful all 
the time. 

When a few days had passed they began to notice 
strange movements among the men. Smith returned 
to the island more frequently, and after having a 
hurried talk with some of his men, would leave as 
suddenly as he came, and his followers became more 
watchful. The guards were increased, and David 
noticed that the store of ammunition was much larger 
than it had been. There were also more guns in the 
cave, and the men spent a good portion of the time 
in seeing that they were in proper condition. The 
lookout seemed to be maintained both up and down 
the river. Parties of strangers frequently came to 
the island, and among the new-comers David some- 
times noticed a British uniform and sometimes an 
American, but as he never was allowed under any 
circumstances to have any conversation with the 


A STRANGE LETTER 


281 


visitors he could not learn the reasons for the coming 
of the strangers. He became satisfied, however, that 
something very important was about to happen, 
although he did not know just what to expect, and 
yet his fears increased, and both he and Henry became 
more watchful. 

David was quiet most of the time, now holding but 
little conversation even with his friend, and yet they 
both worked steadily on, and occasionally some word 
would be spoken which would show them that their 
work was not unnoticed. They were not allowed to 
leave the island, even for fishing, any more, and it be- 
came evident that the men were afraid of some one or 
of something happening to them. The fires were not 
allowed to burn long, and all the singing and shout- 
ing in which they had indulged when the boys were 
first captured, ceased. The September rain set in, 
and the outlook for the boys became more and more 
dreary. Even David, whose courage seldom failed, 
began to feel somewhat hopeless, and Henry long 
since had given up any idea of escaping. 

Late one afternoon Smith arrived, coming over 
from the mainland in a little skiff alone. He had 
but few words to give his companions, and leaving 
them came at once to the place where the boys were. 

“You didn’t hear anything when you left Sack- 
ett’s Harbor of the plans they had there, did you ? ” 
he asked. 


282 THE BOF OFFICERS OF 1812 

“ No, ” replied David. “ It seems like an age since 
we left there, and nobody knows how long it will be 
before we go back. ” 

“ Do you know whether this new man, General 
Wilkinson, is apt to listen to the advice of his friends 
or not? ” 

“ No,” said David, “ I don’t know anything about 
it. He had only just come when we left, but I think 
I could find out if you’d give us the chance to go 
home.” Smith smiled and said nothing in reply. 

“ What do you keep us here for, anyway ? ” con- 
tinued David. “ What do you expect to gain by 
making prisoners of a couple of boys?” 

“You’ll know some day,” growled Smith; “and 
don’t you try to get away before the right time comes, 
either,” and he began to ask more questions about 
Sackett’s Harbor and the men there, to which David 
replied as best he could. 

The more David thought about it, the more 
puzzled he became as to the motive Smith could have 
in holding them prisoners. What he was expecting 
to gain he could not see, and now that he was satisfied 
that his motive was not revenge he tried hard to 
make out the reason for their being held. He turned 
the matter over many times in his mind, but what- 
ever the way in which he thought of it he could find 
no satisfactory reason. But he still worked on, for 
his occupation served to occupy his mind and keep 


A STRANGE LETTER 


283 


him from the depression which his captivity naturally 
produced. 

One night when they took their blankets and 
started for their bed the storm which had been 
threatening all day burst upon them. The wind 
howled through the trees and the waves dashed upon 
the shore in a manner that increased the home-sick- 
ness of the boys. David had noticed all that day that 
the men seemed more than usually nervous, and had 
watched the river more carefully than ever. Many 
of the men had left the island, and David had also 
marked that most of the stores were gone. A large 
part of the ammunition and many of the guns had 
been carried away, but as all this had been done in 
the night, the boys did not know how nor where they 
had gone. Sometimes he had seen the men start 
towards the Canadian shore when they left, and at 
others they had gone up the river towards the Ameri- 
can side. It was evident that they were not entirely 
devoted to either side in the struggle, and yet what 
their plans were could not be learned. 

But something unusual was about to occur, though 
just what this was David had no conception. The 
conversation of the men, which had been carried on in 
low tones during the evening, and the anxiety with 
which they seemed to be waiting for the return of 
Smith, made David more than usually restless that 
night. He was thinking of his home, and wondering 


284 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


whether Elijah had yet returned from Toronto or not. 
He thought also of his brother Andrew, and wondered 
whether he knew where they were. If he did, it 
seemed very strange that he made no effort for their 
release ; and then his thoughts turned upon the 
strange actions of the men on the island and the 
anxiety which they manifested, and which had in- 
creased so much of late. 

As a consequence of all this, when morning came 
David rose but little rested, and he roused his young 
companion and went to prepare breakfast for the men. 
The most of them were already astir, and David 
noticed how quiet they all appeared to be. Usually 
they were singing in the early morning or calling to 
one another, but to-day they had but little conversa- 
tion, and what they had was carried on in such low 
tones that David could catch but few of their words. 

As he moved about preparing the breakfast he 
lifted one of the iron pots, and as he did so he saw 
under it a little piece of paper. The way in which 
it was folded attracted his attention at once, and he 
knew that it could not have been there the night be- 
fore. He hurriedly thrust it into his pocket and 
went on with his work, but taking a pail he soon 
started for the shore for water. He paused a mo- 
ment when he was certain that no one was observing 
him, and as he read the paper his face flushed and 
his breath came faster. 


A STRANGE LETTER 


285 


It was a strange note, and how it came there was 
evidently a great puzzle to David. Manifestly it was 
designed for him, and yet what the meaning of it 
could be he was unable to tell. It put new hope in 
his heart, however, and as he noticed that some of 
the men were observing him he thrust the paper 
quickly into his pocket, and dipping up the water 
started once more to the cave. 

There was only one person in the world who 
would be apt to use such words as David had found 
written on the paper, but what could be meant by 
them ? More and more puzzled as he thought of 
them, he went back to the place where he had left 
Henry, and as he arrived his companion called his 
attention to the men. 

“ What’s going on ? ” said Henry. “ Something’s 
up, but I can’t just make out what it is.” 

“They’re carrying away everything they’ve got 
on the island,” replied David, in surprise. And 
indeed it did appear to be so, for they all were 
carrying down to the shore and placing on two small 
boats that were there the guns and ammunition, and 
the most of such stores as yet remained upon the 
island. 

“ There’s no use in asking them the meaning of it,” 
said Henry, “ for they wouldn’t tell us if we should 
ask.” 

“Strange things are in the wind,” said David 


286 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


thoughtfully, “ but I can’t make out what it all 
means.” 

“ You don’t suppose they’re afraid of being 
attacked here?” asked Henry. 

“ It looks a little that way,” replied David ; “ and 
I’ve no doubt they’re pretty well posted on all the 
movements on both sides of the river.” 

“ Perhaps Andrew is leading an expedition down 
here,” said Henry, “ to come and release us. I hope 
he is.” 

“ So do I,” replied David, “ but I’ve no great 
hope of it. But see,” continued David, “here’s 
something I found this morning under one of the 
kettles, when I first began to get breakfast,” and 
he handed his friend the letter of which we have 
already spoken. Henry took the letter and read 
aloud these words, “ Wings, wings is the things ! You 
watched ’em and saw ’em grow on one man, now 
keep your eyes open and see ’em grow on some 
others.” 

“ What does that mean ? ” said Henry, looking 
inquiringly at his friend. 

“You know as much about it as I do,” replied 
David, “ and that’s just nothing. There’s only one 
person ever used such words that I know, and that 
was ” — 

“ The dwarf,” said Henry. 

No one now paid any attention to the boys, and, 


A STRANGE LETTER 


287 


cheered with their own thoughts and filled with hope 
that something was likely to occur which might open 
a way of escape for them, they busied themselves 
about their work, and watched the men, who still 
took but little notice of the boys. 


288 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XXXI 
smith’s interview 

mHE more David thought about his strange letter 
the more was he at a loss to understand it. He 
was satisfied that it must have been the dwarf who 
had sent it or brought it, but how he had been able 
to come to the island and escape the notice of the 
guard, and enter within the cave itself, was something 
he could not understand; and yet the words of the 
letter, meaningless in themselves, kept running 
through his mind, “ Wings, wings is the things ! ” 
What could it mean? 

Evidently the boys were not forgotten, and the 
dwarf had been gone from the island long enough to 
have been to Sackett’s Harbor and back several times. 
Possibly he had fallen in with some of their own 
friends, and the strange expression which he used 
was to warn the boys that something was being done 
for their release. 

“But then,” thought David, “it may have been 
only a piece of paper he had left behind him when 
he escaped, and may not have anything to do with us 


SMITH’S INTERVIEW 


289 


at all.” His heart fell at the thought, but when he 
remembered that the paper could not have been 
under the kettle when he put it away the night 
before, and that being there neatly folded, and being 
under the very kettle that he would necessarily first 
use in preparing the breakfast, all this quickly made 
him conclude that it must have some reference to 
them. But nothing occurred during the morning 
to explain it, and about noon Smith himself arrived. 

He was eagerly welcomed by his men, and had 
several earnest conversations with them. The boys 
watched him, and were satisfied that some plan was 
being formed in which they knew that they them- 
selves would be interested. 

When David had started towards the river to fill his 
pail with water, as his custom was, Smith met him, 
and, in a low voice, said, “ After you’ve fed the men 
this noon come down to the spring in the woods be- 
hind the cave. I’ve got something I want to say to 
you,” and then he turned and left him quickly, and 
went back among the men. 

David told Henry of the word which Smith had 
given him, and the boys talked it over in low and 
earnest tones. It seemed very strange that Smith 
should want to see them alone, for he never had paid 
much attention to them before, and such words as he 
had had with them were always spoken in the pres- 
ence of others, as if he cared nothing for the boys, and 


290 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


but little for what his men might think. Evidently 
his message was to be an important one, or, at least, 
the boys thought so, and at once they connected the 
proposed interview with the letter which had so 
strangely been left under the kettle. 

They had the dinner ready for the men earlier than 
usual that day, and soon after all had been fed they 
went together to the place which Smith had named, 
and waited for him to come. It was a clear autumn 
day, and the air was bracing, and across the sky the 
clouds were swiftly passing. The leaves were fast 
falling from the trees, and such as still clung to the 
branches were of many and brilliant hues. Their 
hope that their release was at hand had brought a 
new expression to Henry’s face, but David was not 
so hopeful. He was interested in the coming inter- 
view, but he had no such hope as his young friend 
that it would mean their release from the island, his 
experience with Smith and his knowledge of the des- 
perate character of his followers having made him more 
than uncertain as to what the leader’s words might 
mean, and yet he did not like to disappoint Henry, 
and he smiled as he had noticed the expression upon 
his face when they heard the sound of footsteps behind 
them and saw the leader approaching them. 

David noticed what a repulsive face he had. It 
seemed to him that it had grown coarser during the 
year, and now it was extremely harsh and unassuring, 


SMITH’S INTERVIEW 


291 


and yet it had an expression upon it he had never 
noticed there before. It seemed to David as if he 
were a little more kindly disposed towards them, 
and in his own heart he began to have hope that 
the interview might not prove to be so bad after 
all. 

Smith stood for a moment and watched the boys 
without saying a word when he had come near them, 
and both of them were silent and uncomfortable 
under the steady look which the desperate man was 
giving them. They waited for him to begin, neither 
caring to say anything, and at last he said, “ I s’pose 
you boys have some hard feelings toward me.” As 
the boys were silent, he continued, “ I don’t know 
that I blame ye. It doesn’t look very good, and yet 
ye don’t know all, ye don’t know all,” he repeated. 
“If ye did know more of the causes, ye wouldn’t 
be quite so hard on me as ye are now. Let me 
tell you a little. There was a time when I s’pose 
I could have been as good a youngster as any- 
body, but almost from the time I first saw the light, 
I have had a hard time of it. My father was the 
hardest man I ever saw. He didn’t care any more 
about me than he did about the stones that were in 
our pasture, and I don’t think half as much, for he 
kept us at work digging them out, and he never did 
a thing to help the boys out of the hole in which they 
were. I remember one thing when I had my first 


292 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


pair of shoes. I felt very big then, I can tell you. 
They were all black, and the edge of the heel was 
most as sharp as a knife. My father used to make 
us go to church, and I went enough when I was 
a boy to last me all my life. Well, we used to 
have to walk barefooted to church and carry our 
shoes in our hands, and the first day I had those 
shoes my father called me into the room where he 
was, and said, 4 Now, you take care of them ’ere 
shoes. It will be a long time before you get another 
pair. I’m going to l’arn ye to be careful of them. 
Now, ye see that ye remember,’ and he took the shoe 
and hit me on the head with the sharp edge of the 
heel, which, as I told you, was almost as sharp as a 
knife. It cut through the skin and the blood ran 
down all over my face. That wasn’t very much, but 
that’s a sample of the way I was brought up. He 
used to whip us unmercifully when we did anything 
wrong, and he never helped us to do anything right. 
I grew up to be almost a man, feeling that no one 
cared forme and that everybody’s hand was ag’in me. 
I was born in Canada, and the British and the 
Kanucks never did the square thing for me. I tell 
you I hate the British,” he added with sudden 
energy, and the boys were almost frightened at the 
savage scowl that came over his face. 

44 Well, I next tried the Yankees, and that wasn’t 
very much better either. I tell you no one in this 


SMITH’S INTERVIEW 


293 


world has ever given me a fair show. The first thing 
I can remember is the thrashings my dad used to give, 
and from that time on everybody has done pretty much 
the same thing, or at least they’ve tried to. No one 
would ever give me a fair show, and then I made up 
my mind I’d start in for myself. If no one else cared 
for me, then I made up my mind I’d start in for my- 
self. I have looked out for number one, and you 
look around here and see this place that I’ve got on 
the river. I ain’t made such bad work of it, after 
all,” and he stopped for a moment and looked about 
the island, his face glowing with pride as he saw 
what a strong position it was. 

The boys followed his glance, wondering what all 
this talk meant, and why Smith had been telling them 
his own story. In a moment, however, he resumed, 
and said, “ Well, Chauncey, Brown, and Forsythe 
treated me all square, I’ll say that for them, and when 
I’ve been willing to give ’em a point ag’in the British, 
of course I expected them to pay me for it, and I’ll say 
for ’em that they acted all square ; but this man 
Wilkinson, he’s been no good,” and he became more 
and more angry as he spoke. “ I’ve tried to fix 
things all right with him, but he took two of my men, 
and I thought by taking you two youngsters I might 
be able to trade off and get ’em back. I didn't do it 
all on my own account, for I hardly wanted to take you, 
I’ll tell you that now, but my right-hand man he 


294 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


knew you, and lie was bound to have run you in, so 
when he saw ye over in Canada he made up his mind 
he’d take you, and I guess he wasn’t any averse to 
getting hold of that boat of yours. Ye see, we keep 
watch of Canada, and we knew what you’d started 
for, and when he heard that one o’ ye was an officer, 
and two of our men had just been taken, he insisted 
on taking ye ” — 

“An officer?” interrupted David, in surprise. 
“ What do you mean ? ” 

“ Why, you’re an officer,” said Smith ; “ didn’t you 
know you were an officer? You and that Spicer boy, 
both ; they call you, over at Sackett’s Harbor, ‘ The 
boy officers.’ I s’posed you knew it.” 

“No, I didn’t know anything about it,” said David, 
strangely elated at the news which came to him in 
such an unexpected manner. 

Henry was also excited, and tapping his friend on 
the back, he shouted, “ Hooray ! What are you, a 
general or commodore?” 

“ He’s a corporal,” said Smith. 

“Well, I’m afraid he’s not much good of a cor- 
poral,” said David. 

“Well, we took you, anyway,” resumed Smith, 
“ hoping to get our men off, but it wasn’t of much 
use, and they’ve just got away now. A good many 
times we thought we’d let you go.” 

“ But you are going to let us go now, aren’t you? ” 


SMITH’S INTERVIEW 


295 


said Henry eagerly. “ Your men are free, and you’ve 
no use for us any more.” 

“ No, not just yet,” replied Smith. “ You can’t go 
right away. ’Twould hardly do, but I don’t mind 
saying it won’t be very long before you do go, for 
there’s something in the wind, and something you’re 
interested in, too, goin’ to happen pretty quick.” 

“ Doesn’t any one at Sackett’s Harbor know we’re 
here ? ” said Henry. 

“ They haven’t known where you were, and they 
never would know unless we should tell ’em.” 

“If they did know they’d come and get us in 
pretty short order,” said Henry. 

“ Not unless we wanted to let you go,” said Smith 
angrily. “I hate the British, but I’d let no Yankees 
land here without my permission, either. But there 
are great things coming, and soon you’ll be all right, 
so you just keep on and do your work and wait a 
while. That’s all I’ve got to say. Don’t talk too 
much, and keep quiet.” 

“What’s become of the dwarf that used to be 
here, do you know?” said David. 

“ Oh, he cleared out and left us,” said Smith. 
“ He doesn’t know enough to know when he’s well 
off.” 

“ What’s become of him ? ” said David, trying to 
appear careless. 

“ Oh, he went over to Sackett’s Harbor. That’s 


296 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


where all the rascals go, and that’s where I’m going 
pretty soon, I s’pose,” said Smith, laughing a little, as 
he left the boys, who remained for a long time by the 
spring, talking of the strange message which Smith 
had brought them. 

They were thoroughly satisfied that their captor 
had told them his story and had tried to be on 
friendly terms, not because of his own regard for 
them, for they knew that his hatred of them was 
almost as strong as it was against the British. They 
were convinced that something was about to happen, 
and they thought that Smith was trying to gain their 
good-will, and treated them in this new way so that 
when the proper time came they would have a good 
word to say for him. 

They both were filled with hope, now that the end 
of their captivity was approaching, and that soon 
they would be restored to their friends. They had 
no idea how this was to be done, and would have 
been greatly surprised if they had been told just 
what was being planned by the Americans at Sack- 
ett’s Harbor. But they turned to their work, re- 
solved to try and do that as well as they could, both 
to retain the new good-will of Smith, which appar- 
ently he was now feeling towards them, and to 
occupy the time which now would hang heavily on 
their hands. 


NEW PLANS 


297 


CHAPTER XXXII 

NEW PLANS 

T^LIJAH SPICER had returned to Sackett’s Har- 
^ bor strong and well. For some reason, which he 
did not care to explain, his stay at Toronto had been 
prolonged until he was fully restored to health. 
Perhaps Mary McGann, if she had chosen, could have 
explained this in part, but at an} r rate she had proved 
herself to be a capital nurse and Elijah a most 
excellent patient in her hands. It is true there had 
been a very decided difference of opinion between 
Mary and her sister Maggie as to which was the more 
promising young soldier, Elijah or David, a question 
which was never settled, or at least not soon, to the 
satisfaction of either ; but at length Elijah had been so 
evidently restored that he could find no reasonable 
excuse for remaining longer among his friends, and 
Donald McGann, remembering his promise, had 
brought the young soldier across the lake, and one 
night, in the darkness, had landed him at his father’s 
dock. He himself had not dared to remain, and had 
immediately returned to his Canadian home ; but the 


298 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


reception which Elijah met in his own family can be 
well imagined. 

He soon had been informed of the position in the 
army which Major Forsythe had secured for him, 
and had assumed the duties of a corporal at once. 

Corporal Elijah and Sergeant Andrew sat together 
one evening in the quarters of their friend, Major 
Forsythe. 

“ Major,” — said Elijah. 

“Ah, but you mustn’t say ‘Major,’” interrupted 
Andrew. “ You must say ‘ Lieutenant-colonel ’ 
now.” 

“I am delighted to be corrected in such a manner, ” 
laughed Elijah, “ but you change your name so often 
that I can’t just keep track of you. Here you are 
captain, major, lieutenant-colonel — all within nine 
months. You’ll get soon so that your own friends 
won’t know what to call you.” 

“Well, you can call me a friend, anyway,” said 
Colonel Forsythe, “ for such I shall always be to my 
own officers ; but I sent for you to-night to talk with 
you about something that is going to be done. Per- 
haps you have heard that the War Department has 
been planning an expedition against Montreal. They 
want us here at Sackett’s Harbor, backed up by 
Chauncey’s fleet, and joined by General Wade 
Hampton’s forces, which are now at Lake Champlain, 
to unite in the expedition.” 


NEW PLANS 


299 


“ It’ll be a good thing, won’t it ? ” said Andrew 
thoughtfully. 

“The plan is all right,” replied the Colonel, 
“ the trouble is in the men. I wouldn’t dare say this 
out loud, and yet to you I don’t mind mentioning the 
fears I have that the jealousy, the lack of experience, 
and the incompetency of our leaders, which has been 
our chief trouble since the beginning of the war, may 
not cover this expedition with glory. However, 
I’m not going to prophesy evil,” he added cheerily, 
“ and I shall look for the best all the time. At the 
same time I have fears in my heart that everything 
may not turn out just as we are planning it.” 

“Well, we done some things, anyway,” said Andrew. 
“ That battle of Perry’s on Lake Erie was a great 
piece of work.” 

“ Yes, he’s a great man,” replied the Colonel, “ and 
a born leader. He isn’t afraid of himself, and he 
never knows how to give up. If it had been almost 
any of our other men in command of the fleet on 
Lake Erie they would have given up in that fight off 
Put-in Bay when the 1 Lawrence ’ was so riddled with 
shot, and the 4 Niagara ’ holding off as she did.” 

“Well, but he won it,” said Elijah enthusiasti- 
cally. “ Now, what effect will that victory have upon 
General Harrison and his army ? ” 

“Oh, General Harrison is as good a man as 
Perry. In fact, he’s one of the very best we’ve ever 


300 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


had, and it won’t be long — indeed it may have been 
done already — before General Harrison will drive 
the British out of Detroit and regain the Michigan 
territory.” 

“Well, what’s the reason that Commodore Chaun- 
cey hasn’t been able to do as well on Lake Ontario 
as Perry did on Lake Erie ? ” asked Andrew. 

The Colonel shrugged his shoulders, which was the 
only reply he made. 

“ But the Commodore has done some good work 
on the lake, hasn’t he ? ” persisted Andrew. 

“Yes,” replied the Colonel. “Several times he has 
tried to engage the fleet of Sir James Yeo, but with- 
out much success. The British have done some 
damage along the shore, and pretend to be very 
anxious to meet Chauncey, but ever since he’s had 
his new ship, the 4 General Pike,’ with her twenty- 
six long twenty-fours, it has seemed to destroy their 
appetite. 

“ Several times Chauncey has had his fleet all drawn 
up for an engagement with the British, but the wind 
or something else has always prevented a fight. He’s 
been back and forth between here and Niagara 
several times, and started out the twenty-eighth of 
July on his last trip, but it wasn’t till the seventh of 
September that he really had a good chance at the 
enemy. You see, Chauncey had the 4 Pike,’ 4 Madi- 
son,’ and 4 Sylph,’ each with a good schooner in tow, 


NEW PLANS 


301 


and that morning they had started after Sir James, 
but he had had orders to avoid the contest if possible, 
and not run the chance of leaving the Canadian shore 
defenceless, and so it was six days that Chauncey 
was chasing around after him. On the eleventh they 
had a little tussle off the Genesee. They fired some 
shot there for two or three hours, but the British 
finally drew off to Amherst Bay, and Chauncey, not 
knowing the water there, didn’t dare follow him. He 
put out from here on the eighteenth, having heard 
that the British fleet was at Toronto; but when 
Chauncey came near, Sir James thought he had 
urgent business somewhere else and tried to get 
away, but he’d been bragging a good deal of his 
desire to meet the Yankees, and he either had to fight 
then or quit talking. The latter was harder for him, 
so they turned to for the tussle. The ‘ Pike ’ received 
almost all the attention of the heavy boats of the 
British, but they failed to do much damage, as she 
was managed in great shape, and was backed up most 
admirably by some of the other boats. When the 
smoke cleared away it was seen that the ‘Wolfe’ — 
she was Sir James’ flag-ship — had lost her main and 
mizzen topmast and her main yard, besides some 
other injuries. The first thing they knew she was 
pushing away with all her canvas dead before the 
wind with the ‘ Royal George ’ protecting her. 
Chauncey started on the chase, and they kept up a 


302 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


running fire for some time. The British ran for Bur- 
lington Bay, and as the wind had sprung up, and 
Chauncey didn’t know of any harbor around there, 
and he was satisfied that if driven ashore he would 
be captured by the land forces, he pulled off his boats. 
Everybody thinks it was a great mistake, and that if 
he had kept on, as he ought to, he could either have 
captured or destroyed all the British forces on Lake 
Ontario. I don’t know just what he is up to now, 
though we shall soon learn, I presume, if he takes a 
hand in this Montreal expedition.” 

“ What’s been going on along the sea-coast ? ” said 
Elijah. 

“ Oh, the most besides what you knew before you 
left for Toronto has been the blockades the British 
have established almost all along the coast. Of 
course a good many of the Yankees have tried to run 
the blockades, and there’s been a lot of privateering 
going on ; but the British were so stung by our suc- 
cesses on the ocean last year that they have sent over 
a lot more of their war vessels, and as they so greatly 
outnumbered ours, of course they have had the ad- 
vantage. They have threatened to burn some of the 
seaports, and they have done some damage, and some 
of their men have been guilty of landing at some of 
the little places and doing damage and committing 
outrages that ought to make the cheek of every Eng- 
lishman burn with shame, and in fact some of their 


NEW PLANS 


303 


leaders have tried to apologize for the actions of 
some of their men along the southern coast.” 

“ But what about this General Hampton over on 
Lake Champlain ? ” asked Andrew. 44 I should like to 
know what kind of a man he is. By the time Jack 
Smart and Heman Chubb come back from the West, 
for I suspect they will come, we shall know all about 
General Harrison’s movements. But what about 
General Hampton ? ” 

“ They’ve had quite a time on Lake Champlain this 
summer,” replied the Colonel, 44 though much wasn’t 
done before July. You see, when war was declared, 
two gun-boats were all the Americans had on that 
lake. The British had some gun-boats and armed 
galleys in the Richelieu — you know that’s the outlet 
of Lake Champlain into the St. Lawrence. Well, the 
reports began to come that the British were attacking 
our small craft around Rouse’s Point, so Macdonough 
sent Lieutenant Smith with a hundred and twelve 
men and the little 4 Growler ’ and 4 Eagle ’ to look after 
it. I think it was on the evening of the second of 
June that they anchored near Rouse’s Point, about 
a mile off the Canadian shore. The next morning 
they chased the three British gun-boats down the 
Richelieu, and they kept up the chase till they got in 
sight of the fortifications on Isle aux Noix. There 
Smith gave up the case and tried to beat back up 
the river. The British saw how he was fixed, and 


304 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


chased him. They kept up the fight for some time, 
and although the British lost five men to our one 
they sunk the ‘ Eagle ’ and ran the 4 Growler ’ ashore. 
That gave the British the control of the lake, but 
still Macdonough didn’t give up, and by the sixth of 
August he had three sloops and six gun-boats ready; 
but the British, on the last day of July, with about 
fourteen hundred men, fell upon Plattsburgh. We 
had no soldiers upon the west side of the lake, so 
they landed without any opposition, and from one in 
the afternoon till ten o’clock the next day they kept 
up their work of destruction. This General Wade 
Hampton was at Burlington with four thousand men, 
only twenty miles away, but he never lifted his hand 
nor did a thing to try to check the British, who 
violated every promise they’d given of respecting 
private property, and went about burning houses, 
hospitals, and pretty much everything. 

“ Colonel Murray, however, was a quick man, and 
he went up the lake, leaving a picket of twenty men 
behind him, and plundered property all along. You 
see that doesn’t give me a very high opinion of Gen- 
eral Hampton, and what he’s done just lately doesn’t 
promise any more. You know we thought for awhile 
that we’d make Kingston the point of our attack, and 
General Hampton was ordered to go to Canada by 
the way of the Richelieu towards Montreal, and make 
as if that was the place we were going to attack, but 


NEW PLANS 


305 


for some reason (he said, I understand, it was because 
he couldn’t wait for his horses) he didn’t do what 
he was told to, although he started. I understand 
he’s encamped on the Chateaugay now. I have no 
great confidence that he can be depended upon in 
this movement against Montreal, which we’re going 
to try to make. 

“ I wish I felt a little more confidence,” said the 
impulsive Elijah, “in General Wilkinson. I’ve 
always remembered what He man said about General 
Hull, that he never liked to see a man that had a 
perpetual grin on his face. General Wilkinson is so 
sweet that he’s sticky.” 

“ Hush ! ” said the Colonel sharply, “ you mustn’t 
talk against your superiors. You’re an officer now 
yourself, and it will get you into trouble, besides 
being wrong in itself ; but we’re going to start pretty 
quick on this expedition. Both of you will go, so you 
had better run over home and say your good-byes, 
and be ready to start at any moment.” 

Andrew and Elijah followed the Colonel’s sugges- 
tion, and at once started for their homes. 


306 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XXXIII 

LEAVING THE ISLAND 

mHE few long days that passed after the interview 
recorded in a previous chapter were doubly try- 
ing to David and Henry. No news had been re- 
ceived, and the impatience which they felt seemed to 
be shared by Smith himself. The most of his men 
had now left the island, but the leader had been there 
all the time. For several days it was evident that he 
was waiting for some one to come, but just who he 
was, or what the purpose of his visit was to be, the 
boys could not determine. 

“ What a terrible storm this is ! ” said David to 
Henry, as they stood together on the shore of the 
island looking out over the river, an occupation in 
which they indulged now the most of their spare time. 

“Yes,” replied Henry, “there’s no doubt about the 
September and October gales this year ; I don’t think 
I ever knew it to rain so much and so steadily as it 
has for the past month. Just look at the trees 
sweeping down the river ! ” said David ; “ I think 
they’ve had a wind somewhere.” 


LEAVING THE ISLAND 


307 


“Yes, and there’s more than trees there, too,” re- 
plied Henry. “ There’s some spars and floating tim- 
bers. I’ve thought several times that I have seen 
parts of a boat floating by ; but just look out there,” 
and he pointed out in the river. 

David followed his directions and could plainly see 
parts of wrecked boats that were being swept past 
them in the swift current of the river. 

“My! but they must have had some wrecks some- 
where,” he said; “but I haven’t seen any boats or 
men.” 

“Neither have I,” replied Henry. “Probably the 
men got to the shore all right, but this storm has 
played havoc with some boats, that’s very plainly to 
be seen.” 

The river bore witness to the truth of Henry’s 
words. It had risen high above its banks, and there 
were waves on its surface that would have done 
credit to the sea itself. These dashed upon the 
shore and broke over the little dock which Smith 
had built, at times in such a manner as to almost hide 
it from view. The rain fell frequently in torrents, 
and the wind often howled until it was almost a gale. 
The trees bent beneath it, and the many branches 
which had been broken in the storm lay all about the 
island. 

“ This is discouraging enough,” said David. 
“ When we’ve just had a little inkling that release 


308 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


was coming, for us to have this storm sweep down 
and do all the damage it has, is enough to take the 
heart out of us.” 

“ I know,” replied Harry. “ I don’t think I ever 
felt so homesick in my life before.” 

“ Never mind,” replied David, trying by his cheery 
words to bring some hope back into his own heart as 
well as in that of his friend, “here comes Smith 
himself. Perhaps he has something to say to us that 
may throw a little light upon the situation.” 

They could see Smith as he came down the path, 
evidently with the purpose of approaching them. 
David looked at him with renewed interest. He was 
a medium-sized man, with broad shoulders, and a 
bearing that indicated great physical strength, and 
yet David found himself wondering how it was that 
he had gained such a control over his followers, and 
had been free from arrest on both shores of the lake. 
He also noticed as he drew nearer that his face wore 
an unusually pleasant expression. 

“ Well, boys,” said their captor as he came to the 
place where they were standing, “ this makes me 
think of that trip we took together to catch that 
runner from Toronto. Not that it was such a stormy 
day, but somehow it has come into my mind.” 

The boys were silent, and Smith continued his 
talking. “ I don’t want you to be afraid of me now,” 
he said. “ There isn’t anything going to happen to 


LEAVING THE ISLAND 


309 


you, and I’m sure it won’t be long before everything 
will turn out right. You see I just couldn’t help 
myself when you were brought in here. It wasn’t 
any of my doings, neither was it anything I wanted 
done, but my right-hand man, Jim Nairne, he just 
insisted upon it, as he thought we’d get back the two 
men we’d lost if we made prisoners of you ; but it 
didn’t work, and now Jim himself has just cleared 
out, and I suppose by this time he’s a good Britisher, 
and telling them all he knows about the plans on the 
Yankees’ side. But I’ll make it all right with ye, and 
ye won’t be any the worse for the little visit ye’ve 
made here. It isn’t often,” he added with a laugh, 
“ that I let a Yankee officer come to see me in my 
den.” 

“ There doesn’t seem to be many of them that 
want to come,” said David a little bitterly. “ Why 
they let you keep up such an establishment as you 
have here is more than I can understand.” 

Smith was inclined to be a little angry at his words, 
but in a moment he seemed to gain control of his 
feelings, and said, “Well, you came here, anyway, 
whether you wanted to or not ; but I’m going to let 
you get out of this, only I want ye to promise one 
thing afore you go, and that is : when ye get back 
amongst yer friends that ye won’t go back on me, 
and that ye won’t talk too much about what ye’ve 
seen here.” 


310 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ All right,” replied David. “ We’ve learned some 
things since this war began, and one of them is to keep 
our tongues between our teeth, and you won’t suffer 
anything from us or what we can say if you’ll only 
get us out of this all right.” 

“ That’s what I will ; but I can’t tell you the exact 
time when you’ll go,” he added, as he started back 
for the cave, and as the rain began to fall again the 
boys speedily followed him. 

It became evident to them that Smith was impa- 
tiently watching and waiting for some one to come. 
The suspense increased every hour. They were 
entirely in the dark as to what Smith’s plans were, 
and their confidence in his words was not at all 
strong ; but there was nothing for them to do but to 
wait his movements, and they tried to content them- 
selves as best they could. 

The next day the river was still rough, although 
the. waves seemed to have fallen somewhat and the 
wind still blew hard. Almost all the leaves had been 
stripped from the trees by this time, and from the 
mouth of the cave they were able to take a long view 
of the river in either direction. 

After they had had their breakfast, Smith said to 
them, “You boys are getting restless, I see. I 
wonder how you’d like to take a trip to Montreal.” 

They were silent at his words, and afraid that 
some mischief was being planned. 


LEAVING THE ISLAND 


311 


“I happen to know,” continued Smith, apparently 
not noticing their alarm, “ that there is an expedition 
soon to be made against that town by the Yankees. 
General Wilkinson has been getting ready for it at 
Sackett’s Harbor, and he’s going to start down the 
river, backed by Chauncey’s fleet. And I also hap- 
pen to know that the plan is for General Wade 
Hampton to go down the Chateaugay with his men 
and join them. It’s a good scheme, but I don’t be- 
lieve it’ll ever work, though I’m going to take a hand 
in it myself.” 

“ Why won’t it work ? ” said David, interested in 
spite of himself in what Smith was saying. 

“For the simple reason that the Yankee leaders 
aren’t worth the powder to blow them up. Here’s 
this man Wilkinson, — he pretends to be sick every 
time there’s anything to be done, but then I guess he 
doesn’t feel very well, though I tell you the trouble 
with him is just this worry about the whole business. 
He isn’t strong enough or big enough to do the 
work. I don’t mean to do more than just look at 
his mouth to see that he’s as weakly as Hull ever 
was ; I tell you, boys, you never see a man with a 
perpetual grin on his face who ever amounted to 
much.” 

“But General Wilkinson did very well in the 
other positions he held,” said David. 


312 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ That may all be so,” replied Smith, “ but it doesn’t 
at all follow that he’ll do just as well in a bigger 
place. My old mother was a good woman and used 
to read her Bible to me, and it isn’t any fault of hers 
that I haven’t gone straight since ; but I remember 
her reading to me when I was a lad about the man 
that was faithful in the little things being made a 
ruler over ten cities. Now, I s’pose what it meant 
was, that a man had to learn to do the little things 
before he ever learned to do the big ones ; but it 
doesn’t follow at all that the man who does the little 
things well can do the big things just as well. I 
s’pose the Almighty made a pint cup, but it doesn’t 
follow because the pint cup is plumb full that it’ll 
ever hold a bushel.” 

“Did you ever see General Hampton?” asked 
David. 

“ Yes,” replied Smith ; “ I’ve been over on Lake 
Champlain a number of times, and he’s no good 
either. He’s as full of excuses as an egg of meat, 
and he’ll find plenty of ’em for never doing what he 
don’t want to do; and the biggest trouble of all is 
that the leaders are jealous of one another. But 
what’s that coming down the river? Your eyes are 
younger than mine.” 

“ It’s a canoe,” said Henry in a moment. “ How 
she flies! She just skims over the top of the water 
like an egg shell,” and they all went down to the 


LEAVING THE ISLAND 


313 


shore to watch the little boat which seemed to be 
headed for the island. 

“The river runs like a mill-race,” said David, 
“ but the fellow in that canoe knows how to manage 
it. Just see him skim the breakers ! ” They became 
almost as interested in watching the little boat as 
they would have been had they been on board. 

It was but a few moments before the canoe ran 
in under the lee of the island, and drawing his light 
boat up on the shore the sole occupant stepped forth 
and greeted them. 

Smith evidently was pleased to see him, and 
motioning to the boys to remain where they were, 
he went off with the new-comer to the other side of 
the island and seemed to be engaged in a very earnest 
conversation with him as they went. They remained 
for a long time together, and the stranger left with- 
out having been seen again by the boys, and the next 
morning they found that Smith was the only man 
remaining on the island. All of his followers had 
gone, and the breakfast which the boys had to 
prepare was only for Smith and themselves. They 
could see him as he was busy in his boat near the 
shore, taking reefs in the sails and evidently getting 
her ready for departure. 

“He’s going somewhere to-day,” said Henry, “and 
as the storm has mostly gone, I hope he’ll take us 
with him.” 


314 THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 

“ Perhaps that’s what he means to do,” replied 
David. 

After breakfast Smith said to them, “Come on, 
boys. It’s time to leave this island for good. I’ll 
make everything ship-shape before we start, so that 
I shan’t be afraid to leave it without a guard.” 

The boys fell to with a will, and it was not long 
before Smith declared everything to be in readiness 
for their departure, and so stepping on board of his 
boat they were soon sailing up the river. 

“ This isn’t the way to Montreal,” said David, 
when he noticed the direction in which they were 
going. 

“ This is the way I’m going, anyway,” replied 
Smith, and he appeared to have relapsed into one of 
his former ugly moods. “ Don’t you boys make any 
trouble for me, though,” he added. 

“We told you we wouldn’t,” replied David, “if 
you got us safely out of this.” 

But Smith became silent, and the boys indulged in 
but little conversation between themselves. They 
had sailed on for an hour or more and were approach- 
ing Grenadier Island when Henry called out ex- 
citedly, “ Dave ! Dave ! Just look up ahead at the 
island. The shore is all covered over with boats, and 
there’s hundreds of soldiers there, too ; you can see 
their uniforms.” 

“ Yes,” said David, almost as excited as his friend, 


LEAVING THE ISLAND 


315 


“ and there are a lot more boats coming down the 
river, too.” 

“There’s where we’re going,” said Smith as he 
headed the boat straight for Grenadier Island. 

The boys were both highly excited, and at the dis- 
tance at which they were from the shore they could 
not discern whether the soldiers were British or 
American, but they knew that they would soon learn, 
for Smith confidently was making straight for the 
shore. 

In spite of his attitude towards them, which had 
changed so much in the past few days, they were still 
afraid of him. Their experience with him had made 
any such thing as confidence almost impossible, and 
now that they were approaching the place where 
hundreds and perhaps thousands of soldiers were 
gathered, their minds were filled with uncertainty 
and forebodings. 

“ Look there ! look there ! ” called out Henry 
excitedly, pointing to a group of men upon the shore. 

David quickly looked in the direction in which 
Henry pointed, and greatly stirred by what he saw 
was soon shouting at the top of his voice. 


316 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XXXIV 

DOWN THE LONG SAUT 

LITTLE group of men stood upon the shore 



watching the approaching boat in which, as we 
know, were Smith and the two boys. In the group 
Henry had quickly noticed his brother Elijah and 
Andrew Field. He had also caught a glimpse of 
Colonel Forsythe, but the sight of his brother at once 
put all his fears about their own destination at rest, 
and the shout which the boys had given was quickly 
answered from the shore. 

As soon as they had landed Smith had disappeared, 
and the boy officers were quickly together, exchang- 
ing greetings and expressing their delight at the 
reunion. There were many questions to be answered 
and words to be given which had been sent from the 
homes at Sackett’s Harbor. Elijah told how he had 
been nursed back to health, and brought safely home 
by Donald McGann, and he also told them of the 
anxiety which had been felt at their failure to return, 
and the fear which had come when they had found 
the oar drifting in the lake. 


DOWN THE LONG SAUT 


317 


“I dropped that overboard myself,” said Henry, 
“ and got a good scolding from onr boss for it, too, 
but I never thought of its making trouble for any 
one but myself.” 

When Elijah and Andrew heard of the stay which 
the boys had had on Smith’s island they told them 
how that Smith was to be one of the pilots of the 
expedition against Montreal, the one upon which they 
had then engaged. 

“ You are to go on the expedition, David,” said 
Elijah, “ and we’ve got your stripes for your arms all 
here in safe-keeping, too. I judge that you didn’t 
know that you were a boy officer.” 

“ Yes, I did, for Smith told me.” 

“ Smith ? How did he ever know ? ” 

“There isn’t anything that happens on or about 
the lake that he doesn’t know,” replied David ; “ and 
he’s been pretty decent to us, after all, though he 
didn’t care about our making many excursions from 
the island.” 

“ Henry is to go too,” said Elijah ; “ that is, if 
father doesn’t come and get him. You see this ex- 
pedition expected to start the fourth of October, but 
it wasn’t till the twelfth that they were ready, and 
then we were hindered from starting till the seven- 
teenth. We’ve had a lively time of it, and have lost 
a dozen or fifteen of our boats in the storm. We’ve 
been waiting here for awhile, and pretty soon we’re 


318 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


going to start again, and General Hampton is coming 
down to the mouth of the Chateaugay and join us.” 

“Yes, I know that,” said David. 

“ I don’t see as there’s any use in telling you any- 
thing more,” said Elijah with a laugh ; “ you seem to 
know about everything that’s going on now.” 

“We think we saw some of your boats, or pieces 
of them, at least, go down the river within the past 
few days,” said Henry. 

“I presume you did,” replied Elijah, “as we’ve 
lost fifteen good-sized boats and some of the others 
have been scattered. You see it was a very dark 
and stormy night when we started, and if you’d seen all 
the scows and bateaux, Durham boats and sail-boats 
of all descriptions, we had, and without any pilots, 
you wouldn’t he so surprised that we’d lost some of 
them in this storm ; but Smith’s going to be one of 
the pilots now, and if he doesn’t lead us into any 
British camp, I think he’ll show us the way to Mon- 
treal, for I think he knows it, if anybody does.” 

But the men remained on Grenadier Island until 
November first. General Wilkinson was back and 
forth between there and Sackett’s Harbor and seemed 
unable to arrange for the start before that time. 
Mr. Spicer did not come, and had sent word that 
Henry might join the expedition. The boy officers 
had been assigned their positions, and Henry had 
been placed with his brother Elijah. 


DOWN THE LONG SAUT 


319 


On the morning of November fifth, just at dawn, 
when the air was cold and raw, and flurries of snow 
were falling, the soldiers embarked on three hundred 
boats and started down the St. Lawrence. The 
most serious obstacle they had to contend with was 
the lack of confidence which the men had in General 
Wilkinson; but as they swept on they soon found 
their attention so entirely taken up with the parties 
of British that were gathered at different points along 
the shore, and whose shots were a continual annoy- 
ance, that almost everything else was forgotten. 
Sometimes it was necessary for them to turn and 
engage with the enemy, and as these were not col- 
lected in sufficient force at any one place to with- 
stand any serious attack, it was more to put an end 
to the annoyance they made, than to drive away any 
danger, that they made their stops. The entire party 
moved onward, and early in the evening arrived at 
Morristown. 

Here many of the men were landed, and to avoid 
the guns at Prescott were marched around by land, 
and the boats were left in the charge of General 
Brown, and so skilful was his management, that with 
a loss of only two he safely passed the enemy’s guns. 

Proclamations which the British officers had made 
and printed were scattered among our men, and one 
of them fell into the hands of David. It read as fol- 
lows : “ Notice. — All American soldiers who may 


320 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


wish to quit the unnatural war in which they are at 
present engaged will receive the arrears due to them 
by the American government* to the extent of five 
months’ pay on their arrival at the British outposts. 
No man shall be required to serve against his own 
country.” 

This was followed by counter-proclamation by the 
Americans to the Canadians, in which they promised 
that those who should remain quietly at home, if the 
Americans were victorious, should be protected and 
their property kept safe ; but those who were found 
in arms would have to be treated as avowed 
enemies. 

On the eighth of November the entire expedition 
had arrived at a point about eighteen miles below 
Ogdensburg. It was a perilous position, as large 
numbers of the enemy were upon the shore, and 
bodies of them were also following. Not far below them 
were the Long Saut Rapids. Great stories had been 
told about the dangers to be met in the passage of 
these rapids, and the most alarming report of all 
was that the enemy had gathered in great force just 
below the Long Saut, to fall upon the Americans 
when they would be unable in the swift current to 
protect themselves. 

Colonel Wilkinson called a council of his officers, 
and for a long time they debated whether they should 
go on or not. It was finally decided that General 


DOWN THE LONG SAUT 


321 


Brown should take his forces (and among these were 
Andrew and David Field) and land on the Canadian 
shore and dislodge the soldiers that had gathered there. 
If he succeeded in doing this, then word was to be 
sent General Wilkinson, and the descent of the Long 
Saut would be made. 

The fleet came to anchor about ten o’clock in the 
morning, in front of a farm which was owned by 
John Chrysler. David Field made his way from five 
miles below Cornwall, to which place General Brown 
had penetrated, and brought word of the success 
which had attended his efforts. Colonel Forsythe, 
indeed, had been wounded, and there had been a small 
loss, but they had succeeded in dislodging the Brit- 
ish who had gathered to fall upon the Americans 
when they would be defenceless. General Brown 
urged them to come at once, but General Wilkinson 
was almost too ill to lead his men by this time, and 
the cold and snow and sleet were even more trying 
than the waters of the river. They had barely 
started with such leaders as they had, before the 
British forces which had gathered there fell upon the 
Americans, and for a long time they had a hard and 
bitter struggle. 

The victory seemed to promise to fall now on one 
side and now on the other. The great lack of the 
.Imericans was that which had become almost their 
chronic trouble in all wars and almost in every battle, 


322 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


— that of ammunition. A retreat was sounded which 
promised to be almost a rout, but reenforcements 
here joined them, and on their arrival the fight was 
renewed, and kept up until darkness came and put an 
end to the struggle. 

Both sides were glad of an excuse for stopping, 
and though neither side had gained a decided victory 
the advantage appeared to be with the British. 
The boys afterwards learned that nearly three 
hundred and fifty of their own men had either been 
killed or wounded, while the British losses were less 
than two hundred. 

On the morning after the battle the flotilla and the 
gunboats made ready to go down the Long Saut, 
while many of the men were to march by land. 
This battle of Chrysler’s Farm had made them some- 
what discouraged, and yet they were ready to push 
on and join General Brown, who was about three 
miles below the rapids, and where they expected 
that General Hampton and his forces would also be 
waiting. 

Corporal Elijah Spicer had charge of one boat in 
which there were ten men. Henry was to come in 
another boat, and Smith, who was one of the main 
pilots, was now busy making everything ready for 
the attempt to shoot the rapids. Great stories were 
being told about the dangers of the passage and the 
swiftness of the river there. The promised excite- 


DOWN THE LONG SAUT 


323 


ment kept all the men alert, and at last everything 
was ready for them to embark. 

Henry Spicer had stepped lightly into a boat in his 
boyish eagerness to gain the position in the bow, but 
the motion which he gave the boat when he jumped 
on board started it out into the river, and the current 
soon caught him up and carried him swiftly on. 
Elijah heard the call of his brother, and although 
he did not realize the danger in which he was, he 
ordered his own men to take their places at the oars 
and speedily to follow. In a few moments all the 
boats were in motion, and the men were breathless in 
their excitement as they caught the roar of the rapids 
just below them and felt how powerless they were in 
the swift current which was now carrying them on. 
All the efforts which they might make would be 
powerless now to stop them in their course. The 
water became rougher and rougher, and as they 
looked ahead, when they came in sight of the Long 
Saut itself, they could see the high and angry waves 
which seemed to them to rise many feet into the air, 
while above all there was the hoarse roar which be- 
came louder and louder every moment. As far as 
they could see now, there was nothing ahead of them 
but the rough and boisterous water of the rapids, 
foaming and tossing in every direction. 

Elijah could compare the sensation produced by 
the swift motion of the boat to nothing but coasting 


324 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


down a steep liill on hard crusty snow. Here and 
there eddies in the current appeared, and he could 
also see the sharp line that appeared to divide the 
swift water from the still, in the bays along the 
shore ; but it was impossible for them to change their 
course now, and all the efforts of the men were 
directed towards keeping the boat head down in the 
stream. 

The face of every man was almost as white as the 
snow which was to be seen in patches along the 
banks. Elijah was looking ahead at the little boat 
in which his younger brother Henry was being car- 
ried. It sat so much more lightly than his own upon 
the water, that it responded to every movement of 
the current. Elijah thought he could see the appeal- 
ing look upon the face of Henry, but he was powerless 
to assist him, as like a race-horse each boat swept on. 

The men in Elijah’s boat followed the direction of 
the pilot they had, who was familiar with the rapids, 
and exerting all their strength had brought their 
boat a little nearer the shore, where the current 
seemed to be swifter but a little safer. A groan arose 
from every man in the boat as they heard the keel 
grate upon a rock which rose almost to the surface, 
but the force of the water swept them quickly over 
it, and they had just a moment in which to glance 
back and see the great danger which they had 
escaped. Henry’s boat had not been swept in so 


DOWN THE LONG SAUT 


325 


near the shore, and as Elijah followed it with his 
eyes he saw it was nearly parallel with his own. 
Suddenly Henry’s boat appeared to stop, although it 
was in the very swiftest of the current, and then 
Elijah could see that it began to spin round and 
round. 

44 He’s caught in an eddy,” groaned one of the men 
by Elijah’s side. 44 There’s no hope for the lad. If 
he once gets into the water, the under-current will 
suck him in quicker than a pickerel can grab 
a shiner.” 

Henry appeared to realize something of the danger 
in which he was, and gave a loud cry, which Elijah 
tried to answer, but it seemed to him that only a 
hoarse groan came from his lips. Even as he looked 
his own boat was swept rapidly on, and just as he 
turned a bend in the river he looked back to see 
Henry’s boat, as he thought, begin to whirl more 
rapidly, and, as it appeared to him, to be sucked 
under by the treacherous river. But he himself was 
around the point almost before the sight had been 
seen, and Henry and the rapids had disappeared from 
view, and nothing was to be seen of the whirling, 
boisterous waters above him, and nothing heard save 
the hoarse roar of the rapids, which every moment 
became less and less, so rapidly was the boat swept 
on by the current, which was still very swift for miles 
below the Long Saut. 


326 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


CHAPTER XXXV 

CONCLUSION 

mHE perilous situation in which Henry Spicer 
found himself, and from which it was impossible 
for him to escape by his own exertions, had been 
noticed by some of the men in the boats which 
quickly followed. His light boat was whirling in the 
eddy when the boat next behind him had noticed 
it, and the men had made a great effort to go out of 
their course far enough to rescue the brave lad who 
was threatened with destruction ; but their efforts had 
been unavailing, and almost quicker than thought 
they had been swept past Henry’s boat, which re- 
mained stationary in the eddy in which it had been 
caught. The men in the boat next behind had rec- 
ognized the danger when they were farther up the 
stream, and they had been able to change their course 
enough to throw a rope to the boy, retaining one end 
of it in their own boat. It came just in time, for 
even as he grasped it Henry felt his own boat sucked 
under, and as his hands tightened upon the rope he 
was almost blinded and choked by the water into 



“ He knew it was his only hope ” Page 327 














































































































































CONCLUSION 


327 


which he was at once thrown, but he had presence of 
mind and courage enough to exert all his strength in 
retaining his grasp upon the rope. He knew it was 
his only hope. There was a roaring in his ears, 
and the choking increased every minute, and it 
seemed to him as if he must let go his hold. The 
current pulled in one direction and the men in an- 
other, and at first it seemed to him almost impossible 
for him to retain his grasp another moment. 

But meanwhile the swift river had swept them all 
onward, and almost before they were aware of it 
they had passed the bend in the river, and the boat 
had been pulled into the quiet waters of the little 
bay there, and Henry was drawn alongside. 

He was almost unconscious when they lifted him 
into the boat, but as the danger from the river was 
now largely past, the men turned to, and the vigorous 
rubbing which they gave the boy, chilled as he was 
by the cold water of the river and almost choked by 
the water he had swallowed, soon restored him ; and 
clothed in garments contributed by the soldiers, each 
one willingly giving up something of his own for 
the chilled boy, he was soon restored and compara- 
tively comfortable, and it was not long before he 
joined his brother, who already had landed with his 
men. 

There was not much time for brotherly greetings, 
as all the men were now landing, and greatly dis- 


328 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


appointed and somewhat angered at the message 
which had just been received from General Hampton 
that he had met a little opposition, and had thought 
best to give up all attempt to join General Wilkin- 
son’s forces. He said he would go back to Lake 
Champlain, and from that point act with the forces 
from Sackett’s Harbor. 

Perhaps the most angry man in the ranks was 
Smith. “ Didn’t I tell you ? ” he said to David. “ That 
man is no good ; he hasn’t any grit, and isn’t fit to do 
anything but deal with the darkies. I hear he has 
five thousand of them, and I think he’d better go 
back to his lands and be a nigger driver ; it’s about 
all he’s fit for.” 

It probably was not because of Smith’s suggestion, 
but it did transpire before long that General Hamp- 
ton threw up his commission in the army, and did 
repair to his Southern plantation. The only result 
he seemed to have achieved in his efforts in the war 
of 1812 was to gain the contempt of his countrymen. 

General Wilkinson’s suffering under the contempt 
of his own soldiers, and from the sickness, which now 
became rapidly worse, left them in a quandary. It 
would be impossible for his army to advance as it 
then was and without the cooperation of General 
Hampton, and yet he was not ready to return. He 
decided to go into quarters at French Mills, where 
his men suffered almost as much as in any of the 


CONCLUSION 


329 


earlier experiences of the country. The most of the 
men had lost their blankets, they were without 
suitable protection from the cold which now became 
intense, and as the country near by was largely a 
wilderness, but little food could be looked for from 
that source, and as a consequence sickness soon be- 
came prevalent among the soldiers. Some of them 
had already gone back to Sackett’s Harbor, but large 
bodies of them remained, and among whom were our 
boy officers. 

As the snow increased, the boys were encouraged to 
go out into the forest and to shoot such game as they 
could find. Anything in the line of food was most 
acceptable at French Mills. One day, when they had 
gone to an island up the river, on which they had 
heard there were large quantities of rabbits and squir- 
rels, and when thejr were almost ready to return to 
camp, they noticed some one coming down the river 
on the ice close in shore, and stopped for a few mo- 
ments to watch him. He came on swiftly, with long 
swift strokes, and as he skated he sang. When he 
came a little nearer the boys could hear the words of 
the song. 

‘ ‘ When Proctor saw lost was the day, 

He fled La Franche’s plain ; 

A carriage bore the chief away, 

Who ne’er returned again.” 

The boys looked at each other a moment, and then 


330 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


again listened as they caught the words of another 
song. 

“ The moment was fearful ; a mightier foe 
Had ne’er swung his battle-axe o’er him ; 

But hope nerved his arm for a desperate blow , 

And Tecumseh fell prostrate before him. 

He fought in defence of his kindred and king 
With a spirit most loving and loyal, 

And long shall the Indian warrior sing 
The deeds of Tecumseh the royal.” 

“ Hooray ! Hooray ! ” shouted both of the boys 
together. “ Hallo, Heman, Heman Jeduthan ! 
Hold on! Come over here! Wait for us!” The 
skater’s attention had at last been attracted by the 
shouts, and great was the rejoicing when Heman 
recognized his young friends. 

“ How in the world did you come here ? ” asked 
Elijah. 

“ Oh ! I’m a messenger,” said Heman proudly. 
“ I’m on official business from General Harrison to 
General Wilkinson. I came on to Sackett’s Harbor, 
but I didn’t find him there. I saw all of your people 
for a few minutes, and then I started right on for 
the place where I heard he was. I hear you’re 
boy officers now.” 

“ Yes,” replied David, “ we’ve been promoted ; but 
tell us what’s happened to you since you’ve been 
gone ; ” and as they skated on together Heman told 


CONCLUSION 


331 


his young friends the story of Perry’s victory on 
Lake Erie, with which we are already familiar. He 
enlarged especially upon the Commodore’s young 
brother Alexander, and told of the part he had taken 
in the engagement. 

“ You see,” he went on to say, “ after Perry had 
cleared things up on Lake Erie, he and General Har- 
rison were ready to make a move against the British at 
Detroit, and I tell you they just did move things too. 
You never saw such Indians in the world as the Brit- 
ish had under Tecumseh ; but there’s one good thing 
about it, and that is that he got killed in that battle.” 

“ Who? Tecumseh?” asked Elijah eagerly. 

“ Yes ; shot, dead, and buried. When Perry found 
he couldn’t help on the water he helped on the land, 
and they chased the British till there wasn’t any- 
thing of them left hardly. You see, some of their 
Indians had deserted, and that pulled the heart out of 
Proctor, — at least what heart he had, for I never 
thought he had much, and it was a long time before 
General Harrison could get him and his men into 
close quarters. I think the British will remember 
that battle of the Thames, for the whole of the Brit- 
ish force, more than eight hundred strong, was thor- 
oughly whipped and most of them made prisoners. 
Proctor cleared out in his carriage, but only about 
fifty altogether of the Forty-first regulars escaped,” 
and Heman struck up once more his song. 


332 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ When Proctor saw lost was the day, 

He fled La Franche’s plain ; 

A carriage bore the chief away, 

Who ne’er returned again.” 

“ I think the Indian fighters are pretty well killed 
off by this time,” he went on to say ; “ and one of the 
best things of all was that so many of the cannon and 
other things which we had taken from the British in 
the Revolutionary war, and which they had taken 
from us when Hull sold out, were retaken. I tell 
you, General Harrison was. worth the whole of 
them.” 

It was not long before many of the soldiers were 
sent back to Sackett’s Harbor. Andrew remained 
behind longer than the other hoys, and they, with 
Heman, who had now delivered his despatches, started 
back for home. 

“ What became of your friend Jack Smart ? ” said 
Elijah to Heman. 

Heman’s face became sober. “ Dead, dead as 
Tecumseh,” he said. 

“ Why, how was that ? ” said the boys, interested at 
once. 

“ In almost the first charge that General Harrison 
made at the battle of the Thames he fell. I haven’t 
been the same man since,” said Heman, u and I never 
expect to be again. ‘ I am a sojourner, as all my 
fathers were.’ Genesis, twenty-three, four.” 


CONCLUSION 


333 


It was a long and trying winter which followed in 
the home of the Fields. There was great anxiety 
felt there, for Andrew did not return until February, 
when the camp at French Mills was broken up. 
Heman remained until spring, when his restless and 
roving disposition started him forth on journeys to 
distant parts of the land. Once or twice during the 
winter word came from Toronto that seemed to 
interest especially the younger members of the 
family. 

“ I’ll tell you what,” said Elijah, “ I’m going over 
there again when this war is over, if it ever is 
finished.” 

“ And I’m going too,” said David. 

“ I think I know some one who’d be glad to see 
you,” said Elijah, at which for some strange reason 
David was seen to blush. 

The hermit and the cook also spent a large portion 
of their time at the home of the boys, and many con- 
versations were had concerning the prospects of the 
country. The “peace men” were as sharply con- 
demned and as much detested as ever the Tories had 
been in the preceding war. 

Nothing had been seen of Smith all winter long, 
but the report came that the dwarf had been heard 
of again, following his old master, and as much a 
slave to him as ever. 


334 


THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812 


“ He didn’t find out that ‘ wings was the things,’ 
after all, did he ? ” said Elijah, when they heard that 
he had gone back to following Jim Nairne, who 
had once been Smith’s right-hand man. 

But the war of 1812 was by no means finished. 
The outrages of the British on the seaboard had done 
more to arouse the feeling of the Americans than al- 
most anything that had happened during the war. 
No one knew how long the struggle would last. The 
“ peace men ” were not so numerous as they had 
been, and did not dare lift up their voices so loudly 
as they had been in the habit of doing, and yet the 
anxiety in the country was becoming more and more 
intense. 

Along the St. Lawrence border petitions for pro- 
tection from the inroads and depredations of British 
soldiers and lawless Canadians were continually be- 
ing sent in to the War Department. The boy officers 
of 1812 were not idle, and later we shall follow their 
further adventures; but in our next volume we shall 
tell of the Indian wars in the South, and of the 
many exciting events which occurred in that struggle, 
in which the savage Indian showed his true disposi- 
tion. 

I trust our readers will be glad to follow General 
Jackson and his friends, and some of the boys and 
girls who had an active part in those perilous times, 
when even the children were massacred and the 


CONCLUSION 


335 


block-houses were besieged, and homes were burned, 
and almost no man dared to venture forth from his 
home unattended. 

This story we shall call, Tecumseh’s Young 
Braves, a story of the war of 1812. 

























I 






















•> 
















• I 








































































































































































































































































> 




l! 4 ' 





